User Manual
TDS 500C, TDS 600B & TDS 700C
Digitizing Oscilloscopes
070-9869-00
This document applies for firmware version 1.0
and above.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARRANTY
Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three (3) years
from the date of shipment. If any such product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, either
will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in exchange for the
defective product.
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the
warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for
packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid.
Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the
Tektronix service center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any
other charges for products returned to any other locations.
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate
maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting
from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair
damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; or c) to service a product that has been
modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or
difficulty of servicing the product.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX
AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS
ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
General Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiii
xiii
xiv
xiv
xiv
Getting Started
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Differences by Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–1
1–2
1–3
Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Putting into Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–5
1–5
1–6
Operating Basics
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Interface Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–1
2–3
Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up for the Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 1: Displaying a Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 2: Displaying Multiple Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 3: Taking Automated Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 4: Saving Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–9
2–9
2–13
2–17
2–22
2–28
Reference
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–1
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coupling Waveforms to the Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up Automatically: Autoset and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling and Positioning Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choosing an Acquisition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing the Display Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zooming on Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using InstaVuT Acquisition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using FastFrameT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–5
3–5
3–8
3–11
3–14
3–25
3–38
3–44
3–49
3–55
3–59
Triggering on Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Triggering Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Triggering from the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Triggering on a Waveform Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Triggering Based on Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–63
3–63
3–68
3–72
3–76
i
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Triggering on Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delayed Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–89
3–103
3–106
Measuring Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–113
Taking Automated Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taking Cursor Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taking Graticule Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Histograms (TDS 500C and TDS 700C Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mask Testing (Option 2C Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimizing Measurement Accuracy: SPC and Probe Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–114
3–126
3–132
3–133
3–136
3–141
Saving Waveforms and Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–151
Saving and Recalling Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving and Recalling Waveforms and Acquisitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing the File System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing a Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communicating with Remote Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–151
3–154
3–160
3–164
3–174
Determining Status and Accessing Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–179
Displaying Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–179
3–181
Using Features for Advanced Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–183
Limit Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waveform Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast Fourier Transforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waveform Differentiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waveform Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–183
3–188
3–191
3–210
3–215
Appendices
Appendix A: Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A–1
A–1
A–3
A–4
Appendix B: Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix C: Packaging for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix D: Probe Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix E: Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix F: Programmer Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–1
C–1
D–1
E–1
F–1
Glossary
Index
ii
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Figure 1–1: Rear Panel Controls Used in Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–7
1–8
Figure 1–2: ON/STBY Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–1: Connecting a Probe for the Examples (P6245 shown) . .
Figure 2–2: SETUP Button Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–3: The Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–4: Trigger Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–5: The Display After Factory Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–6: The VERTICAL and HORIZONTAL Controls . . . . . . .
Figure 2–7: TRIGGER Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–8: AUTOSET Button Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–9: The Display After Pressing Autoset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–10: Display Signals Requiring Probe Compensation . . . . . .
Figure 2–11: The Channel Buttons and Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–12: The Vertical Main Menu and Coupling Side Menu . . . .
Figure 2–13: The Menus After Changing Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–10
2–11
2–11
2–12
2–13
2–14
2–15
2–16
2–16
2–17
2–18
2–20
2–21
Figure 2–14: Measure Main Menu and Select Measurement
Side Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–23
2–24
2–26
2–28
2–30
Figure 2–15: Four Simultaneous Measurement Readouts . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–16: General Purpose Knob Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–17: Snapshot of Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–18: Save/Recall Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–1: How Probe Compensation Affects Signals . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–2: P6139A Probe Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–3: The Channel Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–4: Waveform Selection Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–5: Scaling and Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–6: Vertical Readouts and Channel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–7: Record View and Time Base Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–8: Horizontal Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–9: Displaying an Extended Acquisition Length Record . . .
Figure 3–10: Extended Acquisition Length and Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–11: Acquisition: Input Analog Signal, Sample, and Digitize
Figure 3–12: Several Points May be Acquired for Each Point Used .
Figure 3–13: Real-Time Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–6
3–7
3–12
3–13
3–15
3–16
3–19
3–20
3–23
3–24
3–25
3–26
3–26
iii
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Figure 3–14: Equivalent-Time Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–15: How the Acquisition Modes Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–16: Acquisition Menu and Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–17: Acquire Menu — Stop After . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–18: Aliasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–19: Display Menu — Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–20: Trigger Point and Level Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–21: Display Menu — Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–22: Display Menu — Palette Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–23: Display Menu — Map Reference Colors . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–24: Display Menu — Restore Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–25: Zoom Mode with Horizontal Lock Set to None . . . . . . .
Figure 3–26: Dual Window (Preview) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–27: Dual Zoom — Shown Dual Window (Preview) Mode . .
Figure 3–28: InstaVu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–27
3–31
3–33
3–36
3–37
3–40
3–41
3–45
3–47
3–48
3–49
3–52
3–53
3–55
3–56
Figure 3–29: Normal DSO Acquisition and Display Mode Versus
InstaVu Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–57
3–59
3–60
3–64
3–67
3–68
3–69
3–71
Figure 3–30: Fast Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–31: Horizontal Menu — FastFrame Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–32: Triggered Versus Untriggered Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–33: Trigger Holdoff Time Ensures Valid Triggering . . . . . .
Figure 3–34: Slope and Level Controls Help Define the Trigger . . . .
Figure 3–35: TRIGGER Controls and Status Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–36: Example Trigger Readouts — Edge Trigger Selected . .
Figure 3–37: Record View, Trigger Position, and Trigger Level
Bar Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–72
3–73
3–73
3–80
3–81
3–82
3–84
3–88
3–90
3–92
3–95
Figure 3–38: Edge Trigger Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–39: Main Trigger Menu — Edge Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–40: Violation Zones for Setup/Hold Triggering . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–41: Logic Trigger Readouts — State Class Selected . . . . . .
Figure 3–42: Logic Trigger Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–43: Logic Trigger Menu — Time Qualified TRUE . . . . . . .
Figure 3–44: Triggering on a Setup/Hold Time Violation . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–45: Pulse Trigger Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–46: Main Trigger Menu — Glitch Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–47: Main Trigger Menu — Runt Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–48: Main Trigger Menu — Slew Rate Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–100
Figure 3–49: Main Trigger Menu — Comm Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–105
Figure 3–50: Delayed Runs After Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–107
iv
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Figure 3–51: Delayed Triggerable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–107
Figure 3–52: How the Delayed Triggers Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–109
Figure 3–53: Delayed Trigger Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–111
Figure 3–54: Histogram, Graticule, Cursor and Automated
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–113
Figure 3–55: Measurement Readouts with Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–117
Figure 3–56: Measure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–118
Figure 3–57: Measure Menu — Gating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–119
Figure 3–58: Measure Menu — Reference Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–121
Figure 3–59: Measure Delay Menu — Delay To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–122
Figure 3–60: Snapshot Menu and Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–124
Figure 3–61: Cursor Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–127
Figure 3–62: Cursor Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–128
Figure 3–63: H Bars Cursor Menu and Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–129
Figure 3–64: Paired Cursor Menu and Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–130
Figure 3–65: Histogram Menu and Vertical Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . 3–133
Figure 3–66: Mask menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–137
Figure 3–67: Creating a User Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–140
Figure 3–68: Performing a Signal Path Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–143
Figure 3–69: Probe Cal Menu and Gain Compensation Display . . . . 3–146
Figure 3–70: Re-use Probe Calibration Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–149
Figure 3–71: Save/Recall Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–152
Figure 3–72: Save Waveform Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–155
Figure 3–73: More Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–158
Figure 3–74: File Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–161
Figure 3–75: File System — Labeling Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–162
Figure 3–76: Utility Menu — System I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–166
Figure 3–77: Hardcopy Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–167
Figure 3–78: Date and Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–168
Figure 3–79: Connecting the Oscilloscope Directly to the
Hardcopy Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–169
Figure 3–80: Connecting the Oscilloscope and Hardcopy
Device Via a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–172
Figure 3–81: Typical GPIB Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–175
Figure 3–82: Stacking GPIB Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–176
Figure 3–83: Connecting the Oscilloscope to a Controller . . . . . . . . . 3–176
Figure 3–84: Utility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–177
Figure 3–85: Status Menu — System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–180
Figure 3–86: Banner Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–181
v
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Figure 3–87: Initial Help Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–182
Figure 3–88: Comparing a Waveform to a Limit Template . . . . . . . . 3–184
Figure 3–89: Acquire Menu — Create Limit Test Template . . . . . . . . 3–185
Figure 3–90: More Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–189
Figure 3–91: Dual Waveform Math Main and Side Menus . . . . . . . . 3–190
Figure 3–92: System Response to an Impulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–193
Figure 3–93: Define FFT Waveform Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–194
Figure 3–94: FFT Math Waveform in Math1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–196
Figure 3–95: Cursor Measurement of an FFT Waveform . . . . . . . . . . 3–197
Figure 3–96: Waveform Record vs. FFT Time Domain Record . . . . . 3–199
Figure 3–97: FFT Time Domain Record vs. FFT Frequency
Domain Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–200
Figure 3–98: How Aliased Frequencies Appear in an FFT . . . . . . . . . 3–204
Figure 3–99: Windowing the FFT Time Domain Record . . . . . . . . . . 3–207
Figure 3–100: FFT Windows and Bandpass Characteristics . . . . . . . 3–210
Figure 3–101: Derivative Math Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–212
Figure 3–102: Peak-Peak Amplitude Measurement of a Derivative
Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–213
Figure 3–103: Integral Math Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–217
Figure 3–104: H Bars Cursors Measure an Integral Math Waveform 3–218
Figure B–1: MCross Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure B–2: Fall Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–4
B–9
Figure B–3: Rise Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–14
Figure B–4: Choosing Minima or Maxima to Use for Envelope
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–16
Figure D–1: Typical High Voltage Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure D–2: A6303 Current Probe Used in the AM 503S Opt. 03 . . .
D–3
D–5
Figure F–1: Equipment Needed to Run the Example Programs . . . .
F–1
vi
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
List of Tables
Table 1–1: Key Features and differences of models . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
1–7
Table 1–2: Fuse and fuse cap part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3–1: Autoset defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3–2: How interleaving affects sample rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3–3: Additional resolution bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–9
3–29
3–32
Table 3–4: TDS 500C and TDS 700C Sampling mode selection
(when fit to screen is off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–35
3–43
3–78
3–90
Table 3–5: XY Format pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3–6: Pattern and State Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3–7: Pulse trigger definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3–8: Comm triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–103
Table 3–9: Communications pulse forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–106
Table 3–10: Measurement definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–114
Table 3–11: Measurement definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–135
Table 3–12: Standard masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–141
Table 3–13: Probe cal status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–150
Table A–1: Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–2: Standard Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–3: Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–4: Accessory software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A–1
A–3
A–4
A–7
Table E–1: External inspection check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E–2
vii
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
viii
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Safety Summary
Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to
this product or any products connected to it. To avoid potential hazards, use this
product only as specified.
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.
To Avoid Fire or
Personal Injury
Use Proper Power Cord. Use only the power cord specified for this product and
certified for the country of use.
Connect and Disconnect Properly. Do not connect or disconnect probes or test
leads while they are connected to a voltage source.
Ground the Product. This product is grounded through the grounding conductor
of the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be
connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the input or output
terminals of the product, ensure that the product is properly grounded.
Observe All Terminal Ratings. To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings
and marking on the product. Consult the product manual for further ratings
information before making connections to the product.
The common terminal is at ground potential. Do not connect the common
terminal to elevated voltages.
Do not apply a potential to any terminal, including the common terminal, that
exceeds the maximum rating of that terminal.
Do Not Operate Without Covers. Do not operate this product with covers or panels
removed.
Use Proper Fuse. Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product.
Avoid Exposed Circuitry. Do not touch exposed connections and components
when power is present.
Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures. If you suspect there is damage to this
product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel.
ix
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Safety Summary
Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions.
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere.
Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry.
Provide Proper Ventilation. Refer to the manual’s installation instructions for
details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation.
Symbols and Terms
Terms in this Manual. These terms may appear in this manual:
WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result
in injury or loss of life.
CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in
damage to this product or other property.
Terms on the Product. These terms may appear on the product:
DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the
marking.
WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the
marking.
CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.
Symbols on the Product. The following symbols may appear on the product:
WARNING
High Voltage
Protective Ground
(Earth) Terminal
CAUTION
Refer to Manual
Double
Insulated
x
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
This is the User Manual for the TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C Digitizing
Oscilloscopes.
The chapter Getting Started briefly describes the TDS Oscilloscope, prepares
you to install it, and tells you how to put it into service.
The chapter Operating Basics covers basic principles of the operation of the
oscilloscope. The operating interface illustrations and the tutorial examples
rapidly help you understand how your oscilloscope operates.
The chapter Reference teaches you how to perform specific tasks. See page 3–1
for a complete list of operating tasks covered in that chapter.
The Appendices provide an options listing, an accessories listing, and other
useful information.
Related Manuals
The following documents are related to the use or service of the oscilloscope.
H
The TDS Family Digitizing Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual (diskette is
included with the user manual) describes using a computer to control the
oscilloscope through the GPIB interface.
H
H
The TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C Reference gives you a quick
overview of how to operate the oscilloscope.
The TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C Technical Reference (Performance
Verification and Specifications) tells how to verify the performance of the
oscilloscope and lists its specifications.
H
H
The TDS Family Option 05 Video Trigger Instruction Manual describes use
of the video trigger option (for TDS oscilloscopes equipped with that option
only).
The TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C Service Manual provides informa-
tion for maintaining and servicing the oscilloscope to the module level.
xi
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
Default Model
This manual documents the TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C Digitizing
Oscilloscopes. Take special note of the following conventions:
H
Some TDS models have two auxiliary channels called AUX 1 and AUX 2,
instead of CH 3 and CH 4. References to these channels default to CH 3 and
CH 4; if your oscilloscope is one of these models, read AUX 1 and AUX 2
respectively for all references to CH 3 and CH 4 in this manual.
H
The TDS 684B display screen appears as the default screen wherever a
display screen is illustrated in this manual.
Model References
This manual documents the TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C Digitizing
Oscilloscopes. Take note of the following conventions used when referencing
these oscilloscopes:
H
H
H
The name “TDS 500C” is used when providing information common to the
TDS 520C and TDS 540C model oscilloscopes.
The name “TDS 600B” is used when providing information common to the
TDS 620B, TDS 644B, TDS 680B, and TDS 684B model oscilloscopes.
The name “TDS 700C” is used when providing information common to the
TDS 724C, TDS 754C, and TDS 784C model oscilloscopes.
Conventions
In this manual, you will find various procedures which contain steps of
instructions for you to perform. To keep those instructions clear and consistent,
this manual uses the following conventions:
H
In procedures, names of front panel controls and menu labels appear in
boldface print.
xii
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
H
Names also appear in the same case (initial capitals or all uppercase) in the
manual as is used on the oscilloscope front panel and menus. Front panel names
are all upper case letters, for example, VERTICAL MENU and CH 1.
H
H
Instruction steps are numbered. The number is omitted if there is only one step.
When steps require that you make a sequence of selections using front panel
controls and menu buttons, an arrow ( ➞ ) marks each transition between a
front panel button and a menu, or between menus. Also, whether a name is a
main menu or side menu item is clearly indicated: Press VERTICAL
MENU ➞ Coupling (main) ➞ DC (side) ➞ Bandwidth (main) ➞
250 MHz (side).
Using the convention just described results in instructions that are graphically
intuitive and simplifies procedures. For example, the instruction just given
replaces these five steps:
1. Press the front-panel button VERTICAL MENU.
2. Press the main-menu button Coupling.
3. Press the side-menu button DC.
4. Press the main-menu button Bandwidth.
5. Press the side-menu button 250 MHz.
Sometimes you may have to make a selection from a pop-up menu: Press
TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Edge (pop-up). In this example, you
repeatedly press the main menu button Type until Edge is highlighted in the
pop-up menu.
xiii
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
xiv
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Product Description
The Tektronix TDS Oscilloscope is a superb tool for acquiring, displaying, and
measuring waveforms. Its performance addresses the needs of both benchtop lab
and portable applications with the following features:
H
H
H
H
A maximum sample rate of up to 5 GS/s per channel, depending on the
model (see Table 1–1 Key Features and Differences of by Models)
A analog bandwidth of 1 GHz or 500 MHz, depending on the model (see
Table 1–1)
Records lengths up to 50 K standard and 500 K with Option 1M and up to
8 M with Option 2M, depending on the model (see Table 1–1)
Four channel or 2 + 2 channel operation, depending on model. (Two plus
Two channel operation allows two of four channels to be displayed
simultaneously.) All channels have 8-bit resolution. (See Table 1–1.)
H
Trigger modes include edge, logic, and pulse. Video trigger modes, available
with option 05 only, include NTSC, SECAM, PAL, HDTV, and FlexFor-
matT. Available with option 2C only, 28 Communications trigger modes
(see Table 3–8 on page 3–103).
H
H
Dual Window Zoom, which shows a waveform magnified and unmagnified
on the same display
Sample, envelope, average, high res, peak-detect and InstaVuT acquisition
mode, which updates the display at rates rivaling the fastest analog oscillo-
scopes (see Table 1–1 for models and modes available)
1–1
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Product Description
Differences by Model
Table 1–1 lists some key TDS features and relates them to the different
TDS models that this manual covers.
Table 1–1: Key Features and differences of models
Feature
520C
540C
4
620B
644B
680B
684B
724C
754C
784C
1
1
1
1
No. of channels
Digitizing rate, max.
2+2
2 + 2
4
2 + 2
4
2 + 2
1 GS/s
1
4
2 GS/s
2
4
4 GS/s
1
1 GS/s
2 GS/s
2.5 GS/s
5 GS/s
No. of Channels. @ maxi-
mum rate
1
2
4
2
4
Analog Bandwidth
Record Lengths, max.
InstaVu Acquisitions
Hi Res Acquisitions
500 MHz
1 GHz
500 MHz
1 GHz
2
2
To 50K/Channel
To 15K/Channel
To 50K/Channel
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
3
4
Advanced DSP Math
Opt. 2F
Opt. 2F
Std.
Communication Signal
Analyzer
Opt. 2C
No
Opt. 2C
Opt. HD
Storage, Hard Disk
Opt. HD
Opt. 13
No
Storage, Floppy Disk
I/0 includes RS–232 and
Std.
Std.
5
Centronics
Display
Mono
Color
Mono
Color
1
Two plus Two channel operation allows two of four channels to be displayed simultaneously. Channels not displayed can
be used to couple a triggering signal to the oscilloscope.
2
This TDS model can be purchased with Option 1M or Option 2M, which add longer record length settings (up to
2 Mb/channel). See Option 1M and Option 2M on page A–2.
3
4
5
Advanced digital signal processing provides FFTs, integrals, and derivatives of waveforms. See Option 2F on page A–4.
Std. denotes a standard product feature as opposed to a feature included as part of an option.
GPIB I/O included with all models.
1–2
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Product Description
Product Specification
The product specification is found in the technical reference TDS 500C,
TDS 600B, & TDS 700C Technical Reference (Performance Verification and
Specifications) that is shipped as a standard accessory with the TDS Oscillo-
scope.
1–3
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Product Description
1–4
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Start Up
Before you use the TDS Oscilloscope, ensure that it is properly installed and
powered on.
Preparation
To ensure maximum accuracy for your most critical measurements, you should
know about signal path compensation and the proper use of the probe you choose
to use with your oscilloscope.
Signal Path Compensation
Recommended Probes
Be sure you compensate your oscilloscope for the surrounding temperature. This
action, called Signal Path Compensation (SPC), ensures maximum possible
accuracy for your most critical measurements. See Signal Path Compensation on
page 3–142 for a description of and operating information on this feature.
The TDS 680B, TDS 684B, and TDS 784C oscilloscopes ship without probes.
To take advantage of the higher bandwidth of the oscilloscopes, order the P6245
Active Probe.
The remaining TDS 500C, TDS 600B, and TDS 700C oscilloscopes ship with
general-purpose probes — either the P6139A or the P6243, depending on the
oscilloscope model. The standard-accessory probes and quantities shipped for
these oscilloscopes are listed on in Standard Accessories on page A–4.
For a list of optional-accessory probes for all TDS 500C, TDS 600B, and
TDS 700C oscilloscope models, see Accessory Probes on page A–5.
Probe Usage
Be sure you use the appropriate probe for the measurement. For instance, do not
use the P6245 Active Probe to measure signals greater than ±8 volts or with
more than ±10 volts of offset, since errors in signal measurement will result. (See
the User manual for the probe for more information.) Instead, use a passive
probe, such as P6139A passive probe, that allows higher voltage measurements.
The P6139A probe is for measurements up to ±500 volts.
1–5
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Start Up
CAUTION. Using the P6243 or P6245 Active Probe to measure signals greater
than ±40 volts may damage the probe.
Input Coupling
Be sure to choose the proper input coupling and impedance for the probe or other
cabling you use to couple signals to your oscilloscope. You should read Input
Impedance Considerations on page 3–7 for information needed to ensure proper
coupling of your input signals.
Putting into Service
To learn how to install, access the front panel, power on, do a self test, and
power off the oscilloscope, do the following procedures:
Installation
To properly install and power on the oscilloscope, do the following steps:
1. Be sure you have the appropriate operating environment. Specifications for
temperature, relative humidity, altitude, vibrations, and emissions are
included in the TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C Technical Reference
(Performance Verification and Specifications) manual (Tektronix part
number 070-9874-xx).
2. Leave space for cooling. Do this by verifying that the air intake and exhaust
holes on the sides of the cabinet (where the fan operates) are free of any
airflow obstructions. Leave at least 5.1 cm (2 inches) free on each side.
WARNING. To avoid electrical shock, be sure that the power cord is disconnected
before checking the fuse.
3. Check the fuse to be sure it is the proper type and rating (see Figure 1–1).
You can use either of two fuses. Each fuse requires its own cap (see
Table 1–2). The oscilloscope is shipped with the UL approved fuse installed.
4. Check that you have the proper electrical connections. The oscilloscope
requires 90 to 250 VACRMS, continuous range, 45 Hz to 440 Hz, and may
require up to 300 W.
1–6
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Start Up
Power Connector
Principal Power Switch
Fuse
Figure 1–1: Rear Panel Controls Used in Start Up
5. Connect the proper power cord from the rear-panel power connector (see
Figure 1–1) to the power system.
Table 1–2: Fuse and fuse cap part numbers
Fuse cap part
number
Fuse
Fuse part number
0.25 inch × 1.25 inch (UL 198.6, 3AG): 6 A
FAST, 250 V
159-0013-00
200-2264-00
5 mm × 20 mm (IEC 127): 5 A (T), 250 V
159-0210-00
200-2265-00
Front Cover Removal
Power On
To remove the front cover, grasp the left and right edges and snap the cover off
of the front subpanel. (To reinstall the cover, align it to the front subpanel and
snap it back on.)
To power on the oscilloscope, do the following steps:
1. Check that the rear-panel principal power switch is on (see Figure 1–1). The
principal power switch controls all AC power to the instrument.
2. If the oscilloscope is not powered on (the screen is blank), push the
front-panel ON/STBY button to toggle it on (see Figure 1–2).
1–7
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Start Up
ON/STBY Button
Figure 1–2: ON/STBY Button
The ON/STBY button controls power to most of the instrument circuits. Power
continues to go to certain parts even when this switch is set to STBY.
Once the oscilloscope is installed, it is typical to leave the principal power
switch on and use the ON/STBY button instead of the power switch.
Self Test
The oscilloscope automatically performs power-up tests each time it is turned on.
It will come up with a display screen that states whether or not it passed the self
test. To determine the self-test results, check the screen. (If the self test passed,
the status display screen will be removed after a few seconds.)
If the self test fails, call your local Tektronix Service Center. Depending on the
type of failure, you may still be able to use the oscilloscope before it is serviced.
Power Off
To power off the oscilloscope, toggle the ON/STBY switch.
1–8
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
This chapter describes the basic concepts of operating the TDS Oscilloscope.
Understanding the basic concepts of your oscilloscope will help you use it much
more effectively.
The first section, Operating Interface Maps, quickly shows you how the
oscilloscope controls are organized and where you can read about them. It also
illustrates the general procedures for operating the menu system. This section
includes the titles:
H
H
H
H
H
Front Panel Map
Rear Panel Map
Display Map
To Operate a Menu
To Operate a Pop-Up Menu
The second section, Tutorial, contains example procedures that lead you through
the fundamental tasks needed to display a waveform measurement. It also
includes an example procedure that teaches you how to store a setup of the
oscilloscope controls for later use. This section includes the following tuto-
rial examples:
H
H
H
H
H
Setting Up for the Examples
Example 1: Displaying a Waveform
Example 2: Displaying Multiple Waveforms
Example 3: Taking Automated Measurements
Example 4: Saving Setups
To explore these topics in more depth and to read about topics not covered in this
section, see Reference. A list of the topics covered begins on Page 3–1.
2–1
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
2–2
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Interface Maps
This section contains illustrations, or maps, of the display, the front and rear
panels, and the menu system of the TDS Oscilloscope. These maps will help you
understand and operate the oscilloscope. This section also contains a visual guide
to using the menu system.
Front Panel Map — Left Side
File System,
page 3–160
Side Menu Buttons,
page 2–7
CLEAR MENU
Removes Menus
from the Display
ON/STBY Switch,
page 1–7
Main Menu Buttons,
page 2–7
2–3
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Interface Maps
Front Panel Map — Right Side
Measurement System, page 3–114
Cursor Measurements, page 3–126
Saving and Recalling
Hardcopy, page 3–164
File System, page 3–160
Waveforms, page 3–154
File System, page 3–160
Acquisition Modes, page 3–29
Cursor
Measurements,
page 3–126
Autoset, page 3–8
InstaVu,
page 3–55
(TDS 500C
& TDS 700C
models only)
Help, page 3–181
Status, page 3–179
Saving and Recalling
Setups, page 3–151
Color, page 3–44
Display Settings,
page 3–38
Selecting Channels,
page 3–11
Remote
Communication,
page 3–174
Waveform Math,
page 3–188
Probe Calibration,
page 3–143
Vertical Controls,
page 3–15
Zoom, page 3–49
Ground
Triggering, page 3–63
Delay Triggering, page 3–106
Edge Triggering, page 3–72
Logic Triggering, page 3–76
Pulse Triggering, page 3–89
Comm Triggering, page 3–103
Horizontal Controls,
page 3–19
2–4
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Interface Maps
Rear Panel Map
Principal Power
Switch,
GPIB Connector,
page 3–174
page 1–7
Centronics Connector
RS-232 Connector
VGA Output
Fuse,
page 1–6
Serial Number
Power Connector,
page 1–6
Rear Panel Connectors
Security Bracket
SIGNAL OUTPUT –
(Provides Analog Signal Output
from CH3 – or AX1 – @ 10 mV/div)
AUX TRIGGER INPUT –
(Provides Auxiliary Trigger Signal Input)
MAIN TRIGGER OUTPUT –
(Provides Main Trigger (TTL) Output)
DELAYED TRIGGER OUTPUT –
(Provides Delayed Trigger (TTL) Output)
2–5
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Interface Maps
Display Map
The
acquisition
status,
Indicates position of
vertical bar cursors in the
waveform record,
When present, the general
purpose knob makes coarse
adjustments; when absent,
fine adjustments.
Trigger
position (T),
page 3–71
The value entered with
the general purpose
page 3–33
page 3–130
knob or keypad.
The acquisition record icon
Shows what part of the waveform
record is displayed, page 3–18
The waveform
record icon
Shows what part of
the acquisition
record is in the
waveform record,
page 3–24
Trigger level on
waveform (may be an
arrow at right side of
screen instead of a bar).
Cursor measurements,
page 3–126
The side menu
with choices of
specific actions.
Channel level and
waveform source.
Vertical scale,
page 3–15
Trigger parameters,
page 3–71
The main menu with
choices of major actions
Horizontal scale and time
base type, page 3–19
2–6
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Interface Maps
To Operate a Menu
1 Press front-panel menu button. (Press SHIFT first if button label is blue.)
2 Press one of these buttons to select from main menu.
3 Press one of these buttons to select from side menu (if displayed).
4 If side menu item has an adjustable value (shown in reverse video), adjust it with the general purpose knob or keypad.
2–7
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Interface Maps
To Operate a Pop-Up Menu
Press to display pop-up menus.
Press here to
remove menus from
screen.
Press it again
to make selection.
Alternatively, press SHIFT first to make
selection in the opposite direction.
A pop-up selection changes the other
main menu titles.
2–8
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
This section quickly makes you acquainted with some of the fundamental
operations required to use the TDS Oscilloscope to take measurements. Start this
tutorial by doing Setting Up for the Examples on this page.
Setting Up for the Examples
Perform the following tasks to connect input signals to the TDS Oscilloscope, to
reset it, and to become acquainted with its display screen. Once completed, these
tasks ready the oscilloscope for use in the examples that follow.
Connect the Input Signal
Remove all probes and signal inputs from the input BNC connectors along the
lower right of the front panel. Then, using an appropriate probe (such as the
P6245), connect from the CH 1 connector of the oscilloscope to the PROBE
COMPENSATION connectors. (See Figure 2–1.)
NOTE. See Appendix A: Options and Accessories for optional probes you can
order and use with this product.
2–9
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
Signal
Gnd
Figure 2–1: Connecting a Probe for the Examples (P6245 shown)
Reset the Oscilloscope
Do the following steps to reset the oscilloscope to a known factory default state
before doing the examples. (You can reset the oscilloscope anytime you begin a
new task and need to “start fresh” with known default settings.)
1. Press the save/recall SETUP button to display the Setup menu. (See
Figure 2–2.)
2–10
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
SETUP Button
Figure 2–2: SETUP Button Location
The oscilloscope displays main menus along the bottom of the screen.
Figure 2–3 shows the Setup main menu.
OK Confirm Factory Init
Menu Item and Button
Recall Factory Setup
Menu Item and Button
Figure 2–3: The Setup Menu
2. Press the button directly below the Recall Factory Setup menu item.
The display shows side menus along the right side of the screen. The buttons
to select these side menu items are to the right of the side menu.
Because an accidental instrument reset could destroy a setup that took a long
time to create, the oscilloscope asks you to verify the Recall Factory Setup
selection. (See Figure 2–3.)
3. Press the button to the right of the OK Confirm Factory Init side menu item.
2–11
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
NOTE. This manual uses the following notation to represent the sequence of
selections you made in steps 1, 2 and 3: Press save/recall SETUP ➞ Recall
Factory Setup (main) ➞ OK Confirm Factory Init (side).
Note that a clock icon appears on screen. The oscilloscope displays this icon
when performing operations that take longer than several seconds.
4. Press SET LEVEL TO 50% (see Figure 2–4) to be sure the oscilloscope
triggers on the input signal.
SET LEVEL TO 50% Button
Figure 2–4: Trigger Controls
Examine the Display
Elements
Read the following information to become familiar with the oscilloscope display
before doing the examples.
Figure 2–5 shows the display that results from the oscilloscope reset. There are
several important points to observe:
H
H
H
The trigger level bar shows that the waveform is triggered at a level near
50% of its amplitude (from step 4).
The trigger position indicator shows that the trigger position of the
waveform is located at the horizontal center of the graticule.
The channel reference indicator shows the vertical position of channel 1
with no input signal. This indicator points to the ground level for the channel
when its vertical offset is set to 0 V in the vertical menu; when vertical offset
is not set to 0 V, it points to the vertical offset level.
2–12
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
H
H
H
The trigger readout shows that the oscilloscope is triggering on channel 1
(Ch1) on a rising edge, and that the trigger level is about 200–300 mV.
The time base readout shows that the main time base is set to a horizontal
scale of 500 ms/div.
The channel readout indicates that channel 1 (Ch1) is displayed with DC
coupling. (In AC coupling, ~ appears after the volts/div readout.) The
oscilloscope always displays channel 1 at reset.
Trigger Level Bar
Trigger Position Indicator
Channel Reference Indicator
Trigger Readout
Time Base Readout
Channel Readout
Figure 2–5: The Display After Factory Initialization
Right now, the channel, time base, and trigger readouts appear in the graticule
area because a menu is displayed. You can press the CLEAR MENU button at
any time to remove any menus and to move the readouts below the graticule.
Example 1: Displaying a Waveform
The TDS Oscilloscope provides front panel knobs for you to adjust a waveform,
or it can automatically set up its controls to display a waveform. Do the following
tasks to learn how to adjust a waveform and how to autoset the TDS Oscilloscope.
2–13
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
Adjust the Waveform
Display
The display shows the probe compensation signal. It is a 1 kHz square wave of
approximately 0.5 V amplitude.
Figure 2–6 shows the main VERTICAL and HORIZONTAL sections of the front
panel. Each has SCALE and POSITION knobs. Do the following steps to adjust
the size and placement of the waveform using the front-panel knobs:
1. Turn the vertical SCALE knob clockwise. Observe the change in the
displayed waveform and the channel readout at the bottom of the display.
Figure 2–6: The VERTICAL and HORIZONTAL Controls
2. Turn the vertical POSITION knob first one direction, and then the other.
Observe the change in the displayed waveform. Then return the waveform to
the center of the graticule.
3. Turn the horizontal SCALE knob one click clockwise. Observe the time
base readout at the bottom of the display. The time base should be set to
200 ms/div now, and you should see two complete waveform cycles on the
display.
2–14
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
Autoset the Oscilloscope
When you first connect a signal to a channel and display it, the signal displayed
may not be scaled and triggered correctly. Use the autoset function and you
should quickly get a meaningful display.
You should have a stable display of the probe compensation waveform from the
last step. Do the following steps to first create an unstable display and then to
autoset the display:
1. To create an unstable display, slowly turn the trigger MAIN LEVEL knob
(see Figure 2–7) first one direction, and then the other. Observe what
happens when you move the trigger level above the highest part of the
waveform. Leave the trigger level in that untriggered state.
MAIN LEVEL Knob
Figure 2–7: TRIGGER Controls
2. Press AUTOSET (see Figure 2–8) and observe the stable waveform display.
2–15
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
AUTOSETButton
Figure 2–8: AUTOSET Button Location
Figure 2–9 shows the display after pressing AUTOSET. If necessary, you can
adjust the waveform now by using the knobs discussed earlier in this example.
Figure 2–9: The Display After Pressing Autoset
2–16
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
NOTE. If you are using a passive probe, such as the P6139A probe, the corners
on your displayed signal may look rounded or pointed. (See Figure 2–10.) If so,
then you may need to compensate your probe. See To Compensate Passive
Probes on page 3–6.
Figure 2–10: Display Signals Requiring Probe Compensation
Example 2: Displaying Multiple Waveforms
The TDS Oscilloscope can display up to four channels, three math waveforms,
and four reference waveforms at one time. Do the following tasks to learn how to
display and control more than one waveform at a time.
Add a Waveform The VERTICAL section of the front panel contains the channel selection
buttons. These buttons are CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, CH 4, and MORE. (See Fig-
ure 2–11.) (CH 3 and CH 4 will be replaced by AUX1 and AUX2 on some
models; see Default Model on page xii and Differences by Model on page 1–2.)
2–17
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
Figure 2–11: The Channel Buttons and Lights
Each of the channel (CH) buttons has a light behind its label. Right now, the
CH 1 light is on. That light indicates that the vertical controls are set to adjust
channel 1. Do the following steps to add a waveform to the display:
1. If you are not continuing from the previous example, follow the instructions
on page 2–9 under the heading Setting Up for the Examples.
2. Press SETUP ➞ Recall Factory Setup (main) ➞ OK Confirm Factory
Init (side).
3. Press AUTOSET.
4. Press CH 2.
The display shows a second waveform, which represents the signal on
channel 2. Since there is nothing connected to the CH 2 input connector, this
waveform is a flat line. There are several other important things to observe:
H
The channel readout on the display now shows the settings for both Ch1
and Ch2.
2–18
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
H
H
There are two channel indicators at the left edge of the graticule. Right
now, they overlap.
The light above the CH 2 button is now on, and the CH 1 light is off.
Because the knobs control only one channel at a time, the vertical
controls are now set to adjust channel 2.
H
The trigger readout still indicates that the trigger is detecting trigger
events on channel one. The trigger source is not changed simply by
adding a channel. (You can change the trigger source by using the
TRIGGER MENU button to display the trigger menu.)
5. Turn the vertical POSITION knob clockwise to move the channel 2
waveform up on the graticule. You will notice that the channel reference
indicator for channel 2 moves with the waveform.
6. Press VERTICAL MENU ➞ Coupling (main).
The VERTICAL MENU button displays a menu that gives you control over
many vertical channel parameters. (See Figure 2–12.) Although there can be
more than one channel displayed, the vertical menu and buttons only adjust
the selected channel.
Each menu item in the Vertical menu displays a side menu. Right now, the
Coupling item in the main menu is highlighted, which means that the side
menu shows the coupling choices. At the top of the side menu, the menu title
shows the channel affected by the menu choices. That channel always
matches the lighted channel button.
7. Press W (side) to toggle the selection to 50 W. That changes the input
coupling of channel 2 from 1 MW to 50 W. The channel readout for
channel 2 (near the bottom of the graticule) now shows an W indicator
(probes with a level 2 interface automatically select 50 W, but they do not
display W in the readout).
2–19
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
Side Menu Title
Ch2 Reference Indicator
Figure 2–12: The Vertical Main Menu and Coupling Side Menu
Assign Controls to
Another Channel
Pressing a channel (CH) button sets the vertical controls to that channel. It also
adds the channel to the display if that waveform is not already displayed. To
explore assigning controls to different channels, do the following steps:
1. Press CH 1.
Observe that now the side menu title shows Ch1. (See Figure 2–13), and that
the light above CH 1 is lighted. The highlighted menu item in the side menu
has changed from the 50 W channel 2 setting to the 1 MW impedance setting
of channel 1.
2. Press CH 2 ➞ W (side) to toggle the selection to 1 MW. That returns the
coupling impedance of channel 2 to its initial state.
2–20
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
Side Menu Title
Figure 2–13: The Menus After Changing Channels
Remove a Waveform
Pressing the WAVEFORM OFF button removes the waveform for the currently
selected channel. If the waveform you want to remove is not already selected,
select that channel using the channel (CH) button.
1. Press WAVEFORM OFF (under the vertical SCALE knob).
Since the CH 2 light was on when you pressed the WAVEFORM OFF
button, the channel 2 waveform was removed.
The channel (CH) lights now indicate channel 1. Channel 1 has become the
selected channel. When you remove the last waveform, all the CH lights are
turned off.
2. Press WAVEFORM OFF again to remove the channel 1 waveform.
2–21
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
Example 3: Taking Automated Measurements
The TDS Oscilloscope can measure many waveform parameters automatically
and read out the results on screen. Do the following tasks to discover how to set
up the oscilloscope to measure waveforms automatically. (For information on
additional measurement features, see Display Measurement Statistics on
page 3–125, Displaying Histograms on page 3–133, and Mask Testing on
page 3–136.)
Display Measurements
Automatically
To use the automated measurement system, you must have a stable display of
your signal. Also, the waveform must have all the segments necessary for the
measurement you want. For example, a rise time measurement requires at least
one rising edge, and a frequency measurement needs at least one complete cycle.
To take automated measurements, do the following steps:
1. If you are not continuing from the previous example, follow the instructions
on page 2–9 under the heading Setting Up for the Examples.
2. Press SETUP ➞ Recall Factory Setup (main) ➞ OK Confirm Factory
Init (side).
3. Press AUTOSET.
4. TDS 600B: Press MEASURE to display the Measure main menu.
5. TDS 500C and TDS 700C: Press MEASURE ➞ Measure (pop-up) to
display the Measure main menu. (See Figure 2–14.)
6. If it is not already selected, press Select Measrmnt (main). The readout for
that menu item indicates which channel the measurement will be taken from.
All automated measurements are made on the selected channel.
The Select Measurement side menu lists some of the measurements that can
be taken on waveforms. There are many different measurements available;
up to four can be taken and displayed at any one time. Pressing the button
next to the –more– menu item brings up the other measurement selections.
7. Press Frequency (side). If the Frequency menu item is not visible, press
–more– (side) repeatedly until the Frequency item appears. Then press
Frequency (side).
2–22
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
Observe that the frequency measurement appears within the right side of the
graticule area. The measurement readout includes the notation Ch1, meaning
that the measurement is taken on the channel 1 waveform. (To take a
measurement on another channel, select that channel, and then select the
measurement.)
Figure 2–14: Measure Main Menu and Select Measurement Side Menu
8. Press Positive Width (side) ➞ –more– (side) ➞ Rise Time (side) ➞
Positive Duty Cycle (side).
All four measurements are displayed. Right now, they cover a part of the
graticule area, including the displayed waveforms.
9. To move the measurement readouts outside the graticule area, press CLEAR
MENU. (See Figure 2–15.)
2–23
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
Remove Measurement
Use the Measure menu to remove waveforms you no longer want. To remove a
measurement individually (you can also remove them, as a group), do the
following step:
Readouts
1. TDS 600B: Press MEASURE ➞ Remove Measrmnt (main) ➞ Measure-
ment 1, Measurement 2, and Measurement 4 (side) to remove those
measurements. Leave the rise time measurement displayed.
2. TDS500C and TDS 700C: Press MEASURE ➞ Measure (pop-up) ➞
Remove Measrmnt (main) ➞ Measurement 1, Measurement 2, and
Measurement 4 (side) to remove those measurements. Leave the rise time
measurement displayed.
Press to Remove Menus From Screen
Figure 2–15: Four Simultaneous Measurement Readouts
Change the Measurement
Reference Levels
By default, the measurement system will use the 10% and 90% levels of the
waveform for taking the rise time measurement. You can change these values to
other percentages or change them to absolute voltage levels.
2–24
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
To examine the current values, press Level Setup (main) ➞ High Ref (side).
The General Purpose Knob. The general purpose knob, the large knob, is now set
to adjust the high reference level (Figure 2–16.)
There are several important things to observe on the screen:
H
The knob icon appears at the top of the screen. The knob icon indicates that
the general purpose knob has just been set to adjust a parameter.
H
H
The upper right corner of the screen shows the readout High Ref: 90%.
The High Ref side menu item is highlighted, and a box appears around the
90% readout in the High Ref menu item. The box indicates that the general
purpose knob is currently set to adjust that parameter.
Turn the general purpose knob left and right, and then use it to adjust the high
level to 80%. That sets the high measurement reference to 80%.
Hint: To make large changes quickly with the general purpose knob, press the
SHIFT button before turning the knob. When the light above the SHIFT button
is on and the display says Coarse Knobs in the upper-right corner, the general
purpose knob speeds up significantly.
2–25
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
General Purpose Knob
Setting and Readout
General
Purpose
Knob Icon
Highlighted
Menu Item
with Boxed
Readout
Value
Figure 2–16: General Purpose Knob Indicators
The Numeric Keypad. Any time the general purpose knob is set to adjust a
numeric parameter, you can enter the value as a number using the keypad instead
of using the knob. Always end the entry of a number by pressing ENTER ( ).
The numeric keypad also provides multipliers for engineering exponents, such as
m for milli, M for mega, and m for micro. To enter these multiplier values, press
the SHIFT button, and then press the multiplier.
2–26
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
1. Press Low Ref (side).
2. On the numeric keypad, press the 2, the 0, and the ENTER ( ) buttons,
which sets the low measurement reference to 20%. Observe that the rise-time
value has changed.
3. Press Remove Measrmnt (main) ➞ All Measurements (side). That returns
the display to its original state.
Displaying a Snapshot of
Automated Measurements
You have seen how to display up to four individual automated measurements on
screen. You can also pop up a display of almost all of the automated measure-
ments available in the Select Measrmnts side menus. This snapshot of measure-
ments is taken on the waveform currently selected using the channel selection
buttons.
As when displaying individual measurements, you must have a stable display of
your signal, and that signal must have all the segments necessary for the
measurement you want.
1. Press Snapshot (main) to pop up a snapshot of all available single waveform
measurements. (See Figure 2–17.)
The snapshot display includes the label Ch 1, meaning that the measure-
ments displayed are taken on the channel 1 waveform. You take a snapshot
of a waveform in another channel by first selecting that channel using the
channel selection buttons.
The snapshot measurements do not continuously update. Snapshot executes a
one-time capture of all measurements and does not update those measure-
ments unless it is performed again.
2. Press Again (side) to do another snapshot and update the snapshot measure-
ments.
3. Press Remove Measrmnt (main) to remove the snapshot display. (You can
also press CLEAR MENU, but a new snapshot will be executed the next
time you display the Measure menu.)
2–27
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
Figure 2–17: Snapshot of Channel 1
Example 4: Saving Setups
The TDS Oscilloscope can save its controls settings and recall them later to
quickly re-establish a setup. It provides ten storage locations to store up to ten
setups. It also provides a file system, so that you can also save setups to a floppy
disk. Do the following procedures to learn how to save, and then recall, a setup.
NOTE. Besides being able to save several complete setups, the oscilloscope
remembers all the parameter settings when you power it off. That feature lets
you power on and continue where you left off without having to reconstruct the
setup in effect when you powered off the oscilloscope.
2–28
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
Save a Setup
First, you need to create an instrument setup you want to save. Perform the
following steps to create and save a setup that is complex enough that you might
prefer not to go through all these steps each time you want that display:
1. If you are not continuing from the previous example, follow the instructions
on page 2–9 under the heading Setting Up for the Examples.
2. Press SETUP ➞ Recall Factory Setup (main) ➞ OK Confirm Factory
Init (side).
3. Press AUTOSET.
4. TDS 600B: Press MEASURE ➞ Select Measrmnt (main) ➞ Frequency
(side). (Press the –more– side menu item if the Frequency selection does
not appear in the side menu.)
5. TDS 500C and TDS 700C: Press MEASURE ➞ Measure (pop-up) ➞
Select Measrmnt (main) ➞ Frequency (side). (Press the –more– side menu
item if the Frequency selection does not appear in the side menu.)
6. Press CH 2 ➞ CLEAR MENU.
7. Press SAVE/RECALL SETUP ➞ Save Current Setup (main) to display
the Setup main menu. (See Figure 2–18.)
CAUTION. Setup locations in the side menu appear with the label user if they
contain a stored setup or with the label factory if they do not. To avoid overwrit-
ing (and losing forever) a saved setup, choose a setup location labeled factory.
(Setup locations labeled factory have the factory setup stored as a default and
can be used to store current setups without disturbing previously stored setups.)
2–29
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
Figure 2–18: Save/Recall Setup Menu
8. Press one of the To Setup side menu buttons to store the current instrument
settings into that setup location. Remember which setup location you
selected for use later.
There are more setup locations than can be listed at one time in the side
menu. The –more– side menu item gives you access to all the setup
locations.
Once you have saved a particular setup, you can change the settings as you
wish, knowing that you can come back to that setup at any time.
9. TDS 600B: Press MEASURE ➞ Positive Width (side) to add that
measurement to the display.
10. TDS 500C and TDS 700C: Press MEASURE ➞ Measure (pop-up) ➞
Positive Width (side) to add that measurement to the display.
2–30
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
Recall a Setup
To recall the setup, press SAVE/RECALL SETUP ➞ Recall Saved Set-
up (main) ➞ Recall Setup (side) for the setup location you used in the last
exercise. The positive width measurement is now removed from the display
because you selected it after you saved the setup.
The step just performed completes the examples. You can restore the default
settings by pressing SETUP ➞ Recall Factory Setup (main) ➞ OK Confirm
Factory Init (side).
2–31
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorial
2–32
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
This chapter describes in detail how to perform the operating tasks you must do
to measure, test, process, or save and document your waveforms. It leads with
three sections on the fundamental tasks of acquiring, stably displaying, and
taking measurements on waveforms:
H
H
H
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Triggering on Waveforms
Measuring Waveforms
Once you have acquired and measured waveforms, you may want to save and
restore them or the control setups used to acquire and measure them. Or you may
want to save the display screen, complete with waveform and setup information,
to include them with the documents you produce with your desk top publishing
system. You may even want to digitally process them (add, multiply, or divide
them; integrate, differentiate or take an FFT of them). The following two topics
cover these tasks:
H
H
Saving Waveforms and Setups
Using Features for Advanced Applications
When performing any operation task, you might want to display a comprehen-
sive listing of its current control settings on screen. Or you may find it handy to
display operating information about front panel controls and menus instead of
looking them up in this manual. The following topic tells you how to do both:
H
Determining Status and Accessing Help
The topics just listed contain steps that you perform to accomplish the task that
the topic defines. You should read Conventions on page xii of Preface before
reading about these tasks.
Each topic just listed comprises more basic operation tasks and topics. A list of
these tasks follows.
3–1
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Acquiring and Displaying
Waveforms
Coupling Waveforms to the Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up Automatically: Autoset and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling and Positioning Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choosing an Acquisition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing the Display Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zooming on Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using InstaVuT Acquisition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using FastFrameT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–5
3–8
3–11
3–14
3–25
3–38
3–44
3–49
3–55
3–59
Triggering on Waveforms
Triggering Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Triggering from the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Triggering on a Waveform Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Triggering Based on Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Triggering on Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–63
3–68
3–72
3–76
3–89
Communications Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–103
Delayed Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–106
Measuring Waveforms
Taking Automated Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–114
Taking Cursor Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–126
Taking Graticule Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–132
Displaying Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–133
Mask Testing (Option 2C Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–136
Optimizing Measurement Accuracy: SPC and Probe Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–141
Saving Waveforms and
Setups
Saving and Recalling Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–151
Saving and Recalling Waveforms and Acquisitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–154
Managing the File System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–160
Printing a Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–164
Communicating with Remote Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–174
3–2
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Determining Status and
Accessing Help
Displaying Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–179
Displaying the Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–181
Displaying Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–181
Using Features for
Advanced Applications
Limit Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–183
Waveform Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–188
Fast Fourier Transforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–191
Waveform Differentiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–210
Waveform Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–215
3–3
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
3–4
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
To use the TDS Oscilloscope to measure or monitor waveforms, you need to
know how to acquire, select, and display those waveforms properly. To help you
do so, this section describes how to do the following tasks:
H
H
H
H
How to couple waveforms to the oscilloscope channels
How to select channels to turn on and off their display
How to size and position the selected channel on screen
How to use the menus to set vertical (coupling, offset, and bandwidth) and
horizontal (time base, record length, and so on) parameters
This section also describes how to choose the appropriate acquisition mode for
acquiring your waveform, how to customize the display (including selecting the
color of the display elements), and how to use the Zoom, FastFrame, and InstaVu
features.
Coupling Waveforms to the Oscilloscope
Tektronix produces a variety of probes and cables suitable for connecting various
types of signals to the input channels of this product. This subsection covers two
topics important to coupling: Probe Compensation and Input Impedance
Considerations.
If your model oscilloscope ships with a probe, use it for general-purpose
coupling of waveforms to the oscilloscope. For a list of other probes available
for use, see Accessory Probes on page A–5.
The TDS 680B, TDS 684B, and TDS 784C oscilloscopes ship without probes.
Tektronix recommends you order and use the P6245 Active Probes to take
advantage of the higher bandwidth of these models.
3–5
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
The remaining TDS 500C, TDS 600B, and TDS 700C oscilloscopes ship with
general-purpose probes — either the P6139A or the P6243, depending on the
oscilloscope model. The standard-accessory probes and quantities shipped for
these oscilloscopes are listed in Standard Accessories on page A–4.
Tektronix also offers a variety of optical probes, differential probes, adapters, and
BNC cabling and connectors to couple a variety of signal sources to the input
channels. See Options and Accessories on page A–1 or your Tektronix Sales
representative for the specific items offered for signal coupling.
To Compensate
Passive Probes
When using a passive probe with any product, compensate it to ensure maximum
distortion-free input to the oscilloscope and to avoid high frequency amplitude
errors (see Figure 3–1). To compensate your probe, do the following steps:
1. Connect the probe to the probe compensation signal on the front panel.
Connect the probe ground lead to the ground terminal on the front panel.
2. Press AUTOSET.
3. Press VERTICAL MENU ➞ Bandwidth (main) ➞ 20 MHz (side).
Probe Compensated Correctly
Probe Overcompensated
Probe Undercompensated
Figure 3–1: How Probe Compensation Affects Signals
4. If you need to change the input impedance, press Coupling (main). Then
toggle the side menu selection W to get the correct impedance.
3–6
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
5. TDS 500C and 700C models only: Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU ➞
Mode (main) ➞ Hi Res (side).
6. TDS 600B models only: Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU ➞
Mode (main) ➞ Average (side). Use the keypad to set Averages to 5.
7. Adjust the probe until you see a square wave with a perfectly flat top on the
display. Figure 3–2 shows where the adjustment is located.
Figure 3–2: P6139A Probe Adjustment
Input Impedance
Considerations
To ensure proper coupling of your input signals to the oscilloscope, consider the
following points when you use 50 W coupling with any channel:
H
H
The oscilloscope does not accurately display frequencies under 200 kHz if
AC coupling is selected.
The oscilloscope reduces the maximum volts/division setting for the channel
to 1 V from 10 V (to 10 V from 100 V with a X10 probe attached), since
input amplitudes appropriate for the higher settings would overload the
50 W input.
3–7
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
H
The oscilloscope switches to 50 W and disables AC coupling (and switches
coupling to DC if AC is selected) if you connect an active probe, such as the
P6245 probe. Such probes also reduce the maximum volts/div to 10 V as just
described. This behavior results in 50 W, nonAC coupling, which is
appropriate for such probes (probes with a level 2 interface do not display W
in the readout).
NOTE. If you remove an active probe, the oscilloscope does not switch coupling
back to 1 MW (nor AC if it was previously selected). Nor does the oscilloscope,
when you restore 1 MW coupling, return to a volts/division setting that was
reduced due to the 50 W selection. In general, you must set channel scale, input
coupling, and impedance appropriate for your input coupling scheme. Be sure to
switch to 1 MW for any input signal not from a 50 W system.
To Find More Information
To find a procedure for changing the coupling and input impedance settings, see
To Change Vertical Parameters on page 3–17.
To find a list of available probes, see Accessory Probes on page 0–5.
To find a guide for selecting probes for a variety of applications, see Appen-
dix D: Probe Selection on page D–1.
Setting up Automatically: Autoset and Reset
The TDS Oscilloscope can automatically obtain and display a stable waveform
of usable size. It can also be reset to its factory default settings. This subsection
describes how to execute Autoset and reset, and lists the default settings in effect
after an Autoset.
Autoset automatically sets up the front panel controls based on the characteristics
of the input signal. It is much faster and easier than a manual control-by-control
setup. Autoset adjusts controls in these categories: Acquisition, Display,
Horizontal, Trigger, and Vertical.
3–8
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
To Autoset the
Oscilloscope
Do the following steps to automatically set up the oscilloscope:
1. Press the channel selection button (such as CH 1) corresponding to your
input channel to make it active.
2. Press AUTOSET.
If you use Autoset when one or more channels are displayed, the oscilloscope
selects the lowest numbered channel for horizontal scaling and triggering.
Vertically, all channels in use are individually scaled. If you use Autoset when no
channels are displayed, the oscilloscope will turn on channel one (CH 1) and
scale it.
NOTE. Autoset may change vertical position in order to position the waveform
appropriately. It always sets vertical offset to 0 V.
If a standard mask is active, Autoset adjusts the selected trace to match the
mask, if possible. Vertical scale and offset, horizontal scale, trigger position, full
bandwidth, average, and trigger parameters are set as required for the standard.
If a calibrated optical probe is attached to Ch1 and an OC or FC standard is
selected, Ch 1 is selected and other channels are turned off.
List of Autoset Defaults
Table 3–1 lists the autoset defaults.
Table 3–1: Autoset defaults
Control
Changed by autoset to
Selected channel
Acquire Mode
Numerically lowest of the displayed channels
Sample
On
Acquire Repetitive Signal
(TDS 500C and 700C Models
Only)
Acquire Stop After
RUN/STOP button only
Unchanged
Deskew, Channel/Probe
3–9
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Table 3–1: Autoset defaults (Cont.)
Control
Changed by autoset to
Display Style
Vectors
Display Intensity — Overall
Display Format
If less than 50%, set to 75%
YT
Off
FastFrame (TDS 500C and
700C Models Only)
Horizontal Position
Horizontal Scale
Centered within the graticule window
As determined by the signal frequency
Main Only
Horizontal Time Base
Horizontal Record Length
Horizontal Lock
Unchanged
Unchanged
InstaVu Acquisitions
(TDS 500C and 700C Models
Only)
Unchanged
Limit Test
Off
Trigger Position
Trigger Type
Trigger Source
Unchanged
Edge
Numerically lowest of the displayed channels (the selected
channel)
Trigger Level
Midpoint of data for the trigger source
Trigger Slope
Trigger Coupling
Trigger Holdoff
Positive
DC
Default Holdoff: Set equal to 5 horizontal divisions
Adjustable Holdoff: 250 ns
Selection in Mode and Holdoff menu determines whether the
default holdoff value or the adjustable hold value is used.
Vertical Scale
Vertical Coupling
Vertical Bandwidth
Vertical Offset
Zoom
As determined by the signal level
DC unless AC was previously set. AC remains unchanged.
Full
0 volts
Off
3–10
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
To Reset the
Oscilloscope
Do the following steps to reset the oscilloscope to its factory default settings:
1. Press the Save/Recall SETUP button to display the Setup menu (see Fig-
ure 3–3). Press the button directly below the Recall Factory Setup menu item.
2. Press the button to the right of the OK Confirm Factory Init side menu item.
3. Press the SET LEVEL TO 50% button (front panel) to be sure the
oscilloscope triggers on the input signal.
Selecting Channels
The TDS Oscilloscope applies all actions based on a specific waveform, such as
taking measurements or applying any changes it receives to the vertical control
settings, to the selected waveform. You can select a channel waveform, a math
waveform, or a reference waveform. This subsection describes how to select a
waveform and how you can turn the display of a waveform off.
To Identify the
Selected Channel
To determine which channel is currently selected, check the channel readout. It
shows the selected channel in inverse video in the lower left corner of the
display. The channel reference indicator for the selected channel also appears in
reverse video along the left side of the display. (See Figure 3–3.)
3–11
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Channel Reference
Indicator
Channel Readout
Figure 3–3: The Channel Readout
To Select and
Remove Waveforms
To select a channel, use the channel selection buttons on the right of the display.
These buttons labeled CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, CH 4, and MORE select a channel
and display it if its off. (The MORE button allows you to select internally stored
Math and Ref waveforms for display and manipulation.) The selected channel is
indicated by the lighting the LED above the button of the selected channel.
3–12
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Do the following steps to first display and then remove waveforms from the
display:
1. Press CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, or CH 4 to turn on as many of these channels as
desired. The one you select last (or first if you only select one) becomes the
selected channel. Selecting a channel turns it on if it is not already on.
You do not use the channel selection buttons to select the trigger source.
Instead you select the trigger source in the Main Trigger menu or Delayed
Trigger menu.
2. Press WAVEFORM OFF to turn OFF the display of the selected channel
waveform. It will also remove from the display any automated measurements
being made on that waveform.
3. To select a math waveform you have created or a reference waveform you
have stored, press MORE and select the waveform from the More menu.
Press WAVEFORM OFF while the MORE button is lit to remove the
display of the waveform selected in the More menu.
Waveform Priority
When you turn off a waveform, the oscilloscope automatically selects the next
highest priority waveform. Figure 3–4 shows the order of priority.
1. CH1
2. CH2
3. CH3 or AX1
4. CH4 or AX2
1. MATH1
2. MATH2
3. MATH3
4. REF1
5. REF2
6. REF3
7. REF4
Figure 3–4: Waveform Selection Priority
Note Figure 3–4 shows two orders of priority due to the following rules: If you
are turning off more than one waveform and you start by turning off a channel
waveform, all channels will be turned off before going to the MORE waveforms.
If you start by turning off the MORE waveforms, all the MORE waveforms will
be turned off before going to the channel waveforms.
If you turn off a channel that is a trigger source, it continues to be the trigger
source even though the waveform is not displayed.
3–13
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
To Find More Information
To read about selecting reference waveforms, see Saving and Recalling
Waveforms on page 3–154.
To read about selecting (and creating) math waveforms, see Waveform Math on
page 3–188.
Scaling and Positioning Waveforms
The TDS Oscilloscope allows you to scale (change the vertical or horizontal
size) and position (move up, down, left, or right) waveforms on screen for best
display. (Figure 3–5 shows the results of both vertical and horizontal scaling and
positioning.) This section first tells you how to quickly check and set vertical
and horizontal scales, positions, and other parameters, such as vertical bandwidth
and horizontal record length.
To Check Position
To quickly see the position of the waveform in the display, check the Channel
Reference, Record View, and Acquisition View icons. (See figures 3–5, 3–9, and
3–10.)
The Channel Reference icon, at the left side of the display, points to ground on
the waveform record when offset is set to 0 V. The oscilloscope contracts or
expands the selected waveform around this point when you change the vertical
scale.
The Record View, at the top of the display, indicates where the trigger occurs and
what part of the waveform record is displayed. In extended acquisition mode, if
the trigger is shown at 0% or 100% of the record view, see the acquisition view
for the actual trigger location.
In extended acquisition mode (option 2M only), when a live channel is dis-
played, the acquisition view at the top of the display indicates where the trigger
and waveform record occur in the extended acquisition.
To Check the
Vertical Scale
Check the Vertical Readout at the bottom-left part of the display to read the
volts/division setting for each displayed channel (the selected channel is in
inverse video). (See Figure 3–6.)
3–14
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Acquisition View
Record View
Channel Reference Icon
Original Position
Positioned Vertically
Positioned Horizontally
Original Scale
Scaled Vertically
Scaled Horizontally
Figure 3–5: Scaling and Positioning
To Change Vertical Scale
and Position
The TDS Oscilloscope permits you to change vertical scale and position quickly
from the front panel using dedicated control knobs. To change the vertical scale
and position:
1. Turn the vertical SCALE knob. Note only the scale of the selected wave-
form changes.
As you turn the vertical SCALE knob clockwise, the value decreases
resulting in higher resolution because you see a smaller part of the wave-
form. As you turn it counterclockwise, the scale increases allowing you to
see more of the waveform but with lower resolution.
2. Turn the vertical POSITION knob. Again, note that only the selected
waveform changes position.
3–15
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
3. To make positioning faster, press the SHIFT button. When the light above
the SHIFT button is on and the display says Coarse Knobs in the upper
right corner, the POSITION knob positions waveforms more quickly.
The POSITION knob simply adds screen divisions to the reference point of
the selected waveform. Adding divisions moves the waveform up and
subtracting them moves the waveform down. You also can adjust the
waveform position using the offset option in the Vertical menu (discussed
later in this section).
Vertical Readout
Figure 3–6: Vertical Readouts and Channel Menu
By changing the vertical scale, you can focus on a particular portion of a
waveform. By adjusting the vertical position, you can move the waveform up or
down on the display. Adjustment of vertical position is particularly useful when
you are comparing two or more waveforms.
3–16
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
To Change
Vertical Parameters
To select the coupling, bandwidth, and offset for the selected waveform, use the
Vertical menu (Figure 3–6). This menu also lets you numerically change the
position or scale instead of using the vertical knobs. To make such changes, do
the following procedures:
Coupling. To choose the type of coupling for attaching the input signal to the
vertical attenuator for the selected channel and to set its input impedance:
Press VERTICAL MENU ➞ Coupling (main) ➞ DC, AC, GND, or W (side).
H
H
H
H
DC coupling shows both the AC and DC components of an input signal.
AC coupling shows only the alternating components of an input signal.
Ground (GND) coupling disconnects the input signal from the acquisition.
Input impedance lets you select either 1 M W or 50 W impedance.
NOTE. If you select 50 W impedance with AC coupling, the digitizing oscillo-
scope will not accurately display frequencies under 200 kHz.
Also, when you connect an active probe to the oscilloscope (such as the P6245),
the input impedance of the oscilloscope automatically becomes 50 W. If you then
connect a passive probe (like the P6139A), you need to set the input impedance
back to 1 MW.
The maximum volts/div setting is reduced from 10 V to 1 V when you select 50 W
impedance. See the discussion Input Impedance Considerations on page 3–7.
Bandwidth. Bandwidth refers to the range of frequencies that an oscilloscope can
acquire and display accurately (that is, with less than 3 dB attenuation). If you
limit the upper limit for the higher frequency components by selecting 250 MHz
or 20 MHz, a BW symbol will appear in the lower part of the display. To change
the bandwidth of the selected channel:
Press VERTICAL MENU ➞ Bandwidth (main) ➞ Full, 250 MHz, or
20 MHz (side).
3–17
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Fine Scale. To make fine adjustments to the vertical scale, press VERTICAL
MENU ➞ Fine Scale (main) and use the general purpose knob or the keypad.
Position. To adjust the vertical position to a specific number of divisions, press
VERTICAL MENU ➞ Position (main) and use the general purpose knob or the
keypad to set the offset value. Press Set to 0 divs (side) if you want to reset the
reference point of the selected waveform to the center of the display.
Offset. Use offset to subtract DC bias before examining a waveform. For example,
you might want to display a small ripple (for example, 100 mV of ripple) on a
power supply output (for example, a +15 V output). Adjust offset to keep the ripple
on screen while setting the vertical scale sensitive enough to best display the ripple.
To adjust offset, press VERTICAL MENU ➞ Offset (main). Then use the
general purpose knob or keypad to set the vertical offset. Press Set to 0 V (side)
if you want to reset the offset to zero.
To Set External
Attenuation (TDS 500C
and TDS 700C Only)
Set external attenuation (or gain) in addition to the attenuation specified by the
probe.
To set external attenuation, press VERTICAL MENU ➞ Probe Func-
tions (main) ➞ External Attenuation or External Attenuation in dB (side).
External Attenuation — Use the general purpose knob or the keypad to set the
external attenuation multiplier.
External Attenuation — Use the general purpose knob or the keypad to set the
external attenuation in dB.
To set the probe attenuation to its default value, press VERTICAL MENU ➞
Probe Functions (main) ➞ Set to Unity External Attenuation (side).
Attaching a probe also sets the probe attenuation to its default value.
To Check the
Horizontal Status
Check the Record View to determine the size and location of the waveform
record and the location of the trigger relative to the display. (See Figure 3–7.)
3–18
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Check the Time Base readout at the lower right of the display to see the
time/division settings and the time base (main or delayed) being referred to. (See
Figure 3–7. Also see Figure 3–5 on page 3–15.) Since all live waveforms use the
same time base, the oscilloscope only displays one time base and time/division
setting for all the active channels.
Record View Readout
Time Base Readout
Extd Acq
Set up
8M
FastFrame
Setup
Figure 3–7: Record View and Time Base Readouts
To Change Horizontal
Scale and Position
The TDS Oscilloscope provides control of horizontal position and scale using
the horizontal front panel knobs.
By changing the horizontal position, you can move the waveform right or left to
see different portions of the waveform. That is particularly useful when you are
using larger record sizes and cannot view the entire waveform on one screen.
To change the horizontal scale and position:
1. Turn the horizontal POSITION and horizontal SCALE knobs. (See
Figure 3–8.)
3–19
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
2. If you want the POSITION knob to move faster, press the SHIFT button.
When the light above the shift button is on and the display says Coarse Knobs
in the upper right corner, the POSITION knob positions waveforms more
quickly.
Figure 3–8: Horizontal Controls
When you select a channel, the horizontal SCALE knob scales all channel
waveforms displayed at the same time. If you select a math or reference
waveform, the knob scales only the selected waveform.
When you select a channel, the horizontal POSITION knob positions all channel,
reference, and math waveforms displayed at the same time when Horizontal Lock is
set to Lock in the Zoom menu. See Zoom a Waveform on page 3–51.
To Change Horizontal
Parameters
To select the waveform record length and the trigger position, use the Horizontal
menu. You can also use this menu to change the horizontal position or scale
instead of using the horizontal knobs. You can select the delayed time base (see
Delayed Triggering on page 3–106) or choose the frames on the waveform that
you want to see (see Using FastFrame on page 3–59).
3–20
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Trigger Position. The trigger point marks time zero in a waveform or acquisition
(in Extended Acquisition mode) record. All record points before the trigger event
make up the pretrigger portion of the record. Every record point after the trigger
event is part of the posttrigger portion. All timing measurements in the record are
made relative to the trigger event. To define the trigger point position:
Press HORIZONTAL MENU ➞ Trigger Position (main) ➞ Set to 10%, Set
to 50%, or Set to 90% (side), or use the general purpose knob or the keypad to
change the value.
Record Length. The number of points that make up the waveform record is
defined by the record length. To set the waveform record length:
1. Press HORIZONTAL MENU ➞ Record Length (main). Select the record
length desired from the side menu. Press –more– to see additional choices:
H
H
All TDS 500C, TDS 600B, and TDS 700C Oscilloscopes provide
standard record lengths of 500, 1000, 2500, 5000, and 15000 points.
For instruments shipped with Option 1M, the TDS 500C and TDS 700C
Oscilloscopes provide additional extended record lengths up to 500,000
points, depending on the model. For specific record lengths available,
see the 1M option in the Table A–1 on page A–2. Option 1M is available
only at the time of original purchase and is not available for the
TDS 600B models.
NOTE. TDS 500C and TDS 700C Models: Hi Res acquisition mode requires
twice the acquisition memory of other acquisition modes. Therefore, the
maximum record length available is 15,000 points without option 1M and 50,000
points with option 1M. Turning Hi Res on switches the setting for record length
accordingly, thereby keeping the oscilloscope from running out of memory.
H
For instruments with Option 2M, the oscilloscopes provide extended
acquisition lengths up to 8 M points, depending on the model. For
specific Acquisition lengths available, see the 2M option in Table A–1
on page 0–1. Option 2M is available only at the time of original
purchase and is not available for the TDS 600B models.
3–21
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
2. To fit an acquired waveform (or with Extended Acquisition On, an acquisi-
tion) to the visible screen, regardless of record length, press HORIZONTAL
MENU ➞ Record Length (main). Then toggle Fit to Screen to ON from
the side menu. This feature fits the waveform automatically much like you
could do manually — by turning zoom mode on and changing the time/division
until the waveform fits the screen. To turn off this feature, toggle Fit to Screen
to OFF.
Horizontal Scale. To change the horizontal scale (time per division) numerically
in the menu instead of using the Horizontal SCALE knob:
Press HORIZONTAL MENU ➞ Horiz Scale (main) ➞ Main Scale or
Delayed Scale (side), and use the keypad or the general purpose knob to change
the scale values.
Horizontal Position. To set the horizontal position to specific values in the menu
instead of using the Horizontal POSITION knob:
Press HORIZONTAL MENU ➞ Horiz Pos (main) ➞ Set to 10%, Set to
50%, or Set to 90% (side) to choose how much of the waveform will be
displayed to the left of the display center.
You can also control whether changing the horizontal position setting affects all
displayed waveforms, just the live waveforms, or only the selected waveform.
See Zoom a Waveform, on page 3–51 for the steps to set the horizontal lock feature.
To Select the
Delayed Time Base
You also can select Delayed Runs After Main or Delayed Triggerable. Use the
main time base for most applications. Use the delayed time base when you want
to delay an acquisition so it captures and displays events that follow other
events. See To Find More Information below.
Extended Acquisition
Length (Option 2M Only)
Use Extended Acquisition mode to acquire an extended-length acquisition
record. After the data is acquired, you can move to and display any portion of the
data (see Figure 3–9).
3–22
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
NOTE. To function properly, Extended acquisition mode forces some oscilloscope
modes and settings to new values. Also, measurements, gating, math, and
cursors are restricted to the current waveform record.
Move to any portion of the acquisition record
Extended-length Acquisition Record
Waveform
Record
Display
Figure 3–9: Displaying an Extended Acquisition Length Record
Extended acquisition mode is a single acquisition sequence mode allowing you
time to examine the acquired data. To set Extended Acquisition mode:
Press HORIZONTAL MENU ➞ Extd Acq Setup (main) ➞ Extended
Acquisition (side) to toggle Extended Acquisition mode On (see Figure 3–10).
To acquire a new data record, press Run/Stop.
Read the side menus to determine the acquisition length, waveform record
length, acquisition duration, and the record starting location:
H
Acq Len displays the length of the acquisition record. The oscilloscope
model and the number of channels in use determines the length.
3–23
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
H
Wfm Len displays the length of the waveform record. The settings for
Record Length in the Horizontal menu and for Extended Acquisition mode
(on or off) determine the length.
H
H
Acq Duration displays the time spanned by the acquisition data.
Waveform Record Start displays/selects the percentage of the acquisition
data that is before the waveform record of the selected channel and any
locked live channels.
H
Fit To Screen duplicates the function of Fit To Screen in the Record Length
menu.
To set the starting position of the waveform record in the acquisition data, press
HORIZONTAL MENU ➞ Extd Acq Setup (main) ➞ Waveform Record
Start (side). Then use the general purpose knob or keypad to set the percentage.
To view all acquisition data, use the Horizontal Position to pan the waveform
record through the acquisition record. Or, use Zoom or Fit To Screen to
compress the acquisition data into the waveform record.
Percentage of
acquisition data before
start of the waveform
record
End of waveform record
Trigger point
Start of waveform record
Acquisition record waveform
Figure 3–10: Extended Acquisition Length and Zoom
3–24
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
To Find More Information
To perform tutorials that teach selecting, scaling, and positioning of waveforms,
see Example 1: Displaying a Waveform on page 2–13 and Example 2: Displaying
Multiple Waveforms on page 2–17.
To learn how to use delay with waveforms, see Delayed Triggering on
page 3–106. To learn how to magnify waveforms, see Zooming on Waveforms,
on page 3–49.
Choosing an Acquisition Mode
The TDS Oscilloscopes are digital products that can acquire and process your
input signal in a variety of modes. To help you choose the best mode to use for
your signal measurement task, this section first describes:
H
H
H
How the oscilloscope samples and digitizes an input signal
How the different acquisition modes (such as interpolation) affect this process
How to select among these modes
Following these descriptions are procedures for selecting the sampling and
acquisition modes, beginning with Checking the Acquisition Readout on page 3–33.
Sampling and Digitizing
Acquisition is the process of sampling the analog input signal, digitizing it to
convert it into digital data, and assembling it into a waveform record. (See
Figure 3–11.) The oscilloscope creates a digital representation of the input signal
by sampling the voltage level of the signal at regular time intervals. The sampled
and digitized points are stored in memory along with corresponding timing
information. You can use this digital representation of the signal for display,
measurements, or further processing.
+5.0 V
0 V 0 V
+5.0 V
0 V 0 V
–5.0 V
–5.0 V
Digital Values
Input Signal
Sampled Points
Figure 3–11: Acquisition: Input Analog Signal, Sample, and Digitize
3–25
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
The oscilloscope uses the samples it takes (see Figure 3–13) to create a
waveform record containing a user-specified number of data or record points.
Each record point represents a certain voltage level that occurs a determined
amount of time from the trigger event.
The oscilloscope may take more samples than the number of points in your
waveform record. In fact, the oscilloscope may take several samples for each record
point (see Figure 3–12). The digitizer can use any extra samples to perform
additional processing, such as averaging or looking for minimum and maximum
values. The methods of sampling and acquisition modes you choose determine how
the oscilloscope assembles the sample points it acquires into the waveform record.
Interval for one waveform record point.
Samples for a record point.
Figure 3–12: Several Points May be Acquired for Each Point Used
Real-time Sampling
The two general methods of sampling are real-time and equivalent-time. The
TDS 600B Oscilloscopes use only real-time sampling; the TDS 500C and
TDS 700C Oscilloscopes use both real- and equivalent-time sampling.
In real-time sampling, the oscilloscope digitizes all the points it acquires after
one trigger event (see Figure 3–13). Always use real-time sampling to capture
single-shot or transient events.
Record Points
Sampling Rate
Figure 3–13: Real-Time Sampling
3–26
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Equivalent-Time Sampling
A TDS 500C or TDS 700C model oscilloscope (the TDS 600B models use only
real time sampling) uses equivalent time sampling to extend its sample rate over
its real-time maximum sampling rate, but only under two conditions:
H
H
You must have turned equivalent-time on in the Acquisition menu.
You must have set the oscilloscope to a sampling rate that is too fast to allow
it to get enough samples with which to create a waveform record using
real-time sampling.
If both conditions are the case, the oscilloscope takes a few samples with each
trigger event and eventually obtains enough samples to construct a waveform
record. In short, the oscilloscope makes multiple acquisitions of a repetitive
waveform to obtain the sample density required for a waveform record. (See
Figure 3–14.) By doing so, the oscilloscope lets you accurately acquire signals
with frequencies much higher than its maximum real-time bandwidth would
allow. Equivalent-time sampling should only be used on repetitive signals.
Record Points
1st Acquisition Cycle
2nd Acquisition Cycle
3rd Acquisition Cycle
nth Acquisition Cycle
Figure 3–14: Equivalent-Time Sampling
The type of equivalent-time sampling the oscilloscope uses is called random
equivalent-time sampling. Although it takes the samples sequentially in time, it
takes them randomly with respect to the trigger. Random sampling occurs
because the oscilloscope sample clock runs asynchronously with respect to the
input signal and the signal trigger. The oscilloscope takes samples independently
of the trigger position and displays them based on the time difference between
the sample and the trigger.
3–27
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Interpolation
Your oscilloscope can interpolate between the samples it acquires. Like for
equivalent time sampling, it does so only when it cannot obtain all the real
samples it needs to fill up its waveform record. For instance, setting the
horizontal SCALE to progressively faster acquisition rates leaves progressively
shorter time periods for the waveform record. Therefore, the oscilloscope must
sample faster to acquire the samples (record points) needed to fill up the record.
Eventually the time period established by scale setting does not allow enough
time to get all the real samples needed to fill the record.
The situation just described occurs if you set the Horizontal SCALE knob to a
time base setting that is faster than 10 ns (TDS 600B). (The setting varies with
the number of channels for TDS 500C and TDS 700C models; see Table 3–4 on
page 3–35.) The oscilloscope then interpolates to create the intervening points in
the waveform record. There are two options for interpolation: linear or sin(x)/x.
(TDS 500C and TDS 700C models can also equivalent-time sample to acquire
more samples; see Equivalent-Time Sampling on page 3–27.)
Linear interpolation computes record points between actual acquired samples by
using a straight line fit. It assumes all the interpolated points fall in their
appropriate point in time on that straight line. Linear interpolation is useful for
many waveforms such as pulse trains.
Sin(x)/x interpolation computes record points using a curve fit between the actual
values acquired. It assumes all the interpolated points fall along that curve. That
is particularly useful when acquiring more rounded waveforms such as sine
waves. Actually, it is appropriate for general use, although it may introduce some
overshoot or undershoot in signals with fast rise times.
NOTE. When using either type of interpolation, you may want to set the display
style so that the real samples are displayed intensified relative to the interpolated
samples. The instructions under Select the Display Style on page 3–39 explain
how to turn on intensified samples.
3–28
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Interleaving
A TDS 500C or TDS 700C Oscilloscope can interleave its channels to attain
higher digitizing rates without equivalent time sampling or interpolating. The
oscilloscope applies the digitizing resources of unused channels (that is, channels
that are turned off) to sample those that are in use (turned on). Table 3–2 lists
how interleaving more than one digitizer to sample a channel extends the
maximum digitizing rate.
Once you set horizontal scale to exceed the maximum digitizing rate for the
number of channels in use (see Table 3–2), the oscilloscope will not be able to
get enough samples to create a waveform record. At that point, the oscilloscope
will either interpolate to calculate additional samples or it will switch from real
to equivalent time sampling to obtain additional samples. (See Interpolation on
page 3–28 and Equivalent-Time Sampling on page 3–27.)
Table 3–2: How interleaving affects sample rate
1
Maximum digitizing rate
No. of
channels on
TDS 520C &
TDS 724C
TDS 540C
TDS 754C
2 GS/sec
2 GS/sec
1 GS/sec
TDS 784C
4 GS/sec
2 GS/sec
1 GS/sec
One
Two
1 GS/sec
2 GS/sec
1 GS/sec
500 MS/sec
500 MS/sec
Not Available
Three or Four
1
When real-time sampling. (GS = Gigasamples; MS = Megasamples.)
The Acquisition Modes
All oscilloscopes in this manual support the following four acquisition modes:
Sample, Envelope, Average, and Peak Detect. TDS 500 C and TDS 700C
Oscilloscopes also support Hi Res. Keep in mind which modes apply to your
model oscilloscope as you read the following descriptions.
Sample (the mode most commonly used), Peak Detect, and Hi Res modes
operate in real time on a single trigger event, provided that the oscilloscope can
acquire enough samples for each trigger event. Envelope and Average modes
operate on multiple acquisitions; the oscilloscope averages or envelopes several
waveforms on a point-by-point basis. (For TDS 500C and TDS 700C models
only, Hi Res, Envelope, and Average modes are not available when in InstaVu
mode; see Incompatible Modes on page 3–58.)
3–29
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Figure 3–15 illustrates the different modes and lists the benefits of each. It will
help you select the appropriate mode for your application. Refer to it as your
read the following descriptions of each mode.
Sample Mode. In Sample mode, the oscilloscope creates a record point by saving
the first sample (of perhaps many) during each acquisition interval. (An
acquisition interval is the time covered by the waveform record divided by the
record length.) Sample mode is the default mode.
Envelope Mode. In Envelope mode, the oscilloscope acquires and displays a
waveform record that shows the extremes in variation over several acquisitions
(you specify the number of acquisitions). The oscilloscope saves the highest and
lowest values in two adjacent intervals similar to the Peak Detect mode. But
Envelope mode, unlike Peak Detect, gathers peaks over many trigger events.
After each trigger event, the oscilloscope acquires data and then compares the
min/max values from the current acquisition with those stored from previous
acquisitions. The final display shows the most extreme values for all the
acquisitions for each point in the waveform record.
Average Mode. Average mode lets you acquire and display a waveform record
that is the averaged result of several acquisitions. This mode reduces random
noise. The oscilloscope acquires data after each trigger event using Sample
mode. It then averages the record point from the current acquisition with those
stored from previous acquisitions.
Peak Detect Mode. Peak Detect mode alternates between saving the highest
sample in one acquisition interval and lowest sample in the next acquisition
interval. Peak Detect mode only works with real-time, noninterpolated sampling.
If you set the time base so fast that it requires real-time interpolation or
equivalent-time sampling, the mode automatically changes from Peak Detect to
Sample, although the menu selection will not change.
3–30
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Single Waveform Acquisition
Samples Acquired in Four
Acquisition Intervals
Acquisition
Mode
Displayed
Record Points
Waveform Drawn
on CRT
Interval 1
2
3
4
Interval 1
2
3
4
Sample
Uses first sample in
interval
Use for fastest acquisition rate. This is the default mode.
Peak Detect
Uses highest and lowest samples in
two intervals
Use to reveal aliasing and for glitch detection. Provides the benefits of enveloping with the speed of a single acquisition.
Hi Res
Calculates average of all samples in
interval (TDS 500C and TDS 700C
Models Only)
Use to reduce apparent noise. Provides the benefits of averaging with the speed of a single acquisition.
Multiple Waveform Acquisitions
Acquisition
Mode
Waveform Drawn
on CRT
Three Acquisitions from One Source
Acquisition 1
2
3
Envelope
Finds highest and
lowest record points over
many acquisitions
Uses Peak Detect Mode for Each Acquisition
Use to reveal variations in the signal across time.
Average
Calculates average value for
each record point over
many acquisitions
Uses Sample Mode for Each Acquisition
Use to reduce apparent noise in a repetitive signal.
Figure 3–15: How the Acquisition Modes Work
3–31
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Hi Res Mode. TDS 500C and 700C models only: Hi Res mode averages all
samples taken during an acquisition interval to create a record point. The average
results in a higher-resolution, lower-bandwidth waveform.
A key advantage of Hi Res is its potential for increasing resolution regardless of
the input signal. Table 3–3 and the equations shown below illustrate how you
can obtain up to 15 significant bits with Hi res mode. Note that the resolution
improvements are limited to speeds slower than 100 ns/div. Also, resolutions
above 15 bits are not allowed by internal hardware and computation limitations.
Si = Sampling Interval for TDS 754C = 1 ns
TimeńDiv
5 msńDiv
Dt = Sample Interval =
=
= 100 ns
Number Of Points/Div 50 PointsńDiv
Dt
Si
Nd = Number of points per decimation interval =
= 100
Resolution Enhancement (bits) = 0.5 LOG2(Nd) ꢀ 3 extra bits
Bits of Resolution = Resolution Enhancement (3 bits) + 8 bits ꢀ 11 bits
Hi Res mode only works with real-time, noninterpolated sampling. If you set the
time base so fast that it requires real-time interpolation or equivalent-time
sampling, the mode automatically becomes Sample even though the menu
selection will not change.
Table 3–3: Additional resolution bits
Time base speed
100 ns and faster
200 ns to 500 ns
1 ms to 2 ms
Bits of resolution
8 bits
9 bits
10 bits
5 ms to 10 ms
20 ms to 50 ms
100 ms to 200 ms
500 ms
11 bits
12 bits
13 bits
14 bits
1 ms and slower
15 bits
3–32
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Checking the
Acquisition Readout
To determine the acquisition sampling rate, the acquisition state (running or
stopped), and the acquisition mode, check the Acquisition readout at the top of
the display. (See Figure 3–16.) The state “Run:” shows the sample rate and
acquisition mode. The state “Stop:”shows the number of acquisitions acquired
since the last stop or major change.
Acquisition Readout
Figure 3–16: Acquisition Menu and Readout
Selecting an
Acquisition Mode
The oscilloscope provides several modes (see The Acquisition Modes on
page 3–29) for acquiring and converting analog data into digital form. To choose
how the oscilloscope will create points in the waveform record:
1. Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU ➞ Mode (main). (See Figure 3–16.)
2. TDS 600B: Press Sample, Envelope, Average, or Peak Detect (side) or ...
TDS 500C and TDS 700C Models: Press Sample, Peak Detect, Hi Res,
Envelope, or Average (side). (InstaVu mode must be off to use Hi Res,
Envelope, or Average modes.)
3. If you selected Envelope or Average, enter the number of waveform records
to be enveloped or averaged using the keypad or the general purpose knob.
3–33
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
NOTE. TDS 500C and 700C models only: Selecting Hi Res mode in the Acquire
menu automatically reduces long record-length settings to prevent overflow of
acquisition memory. Because Hi Res mode uses twice the acquisition memory
used by other acquisition modes, allowing selection of the longer horizontal
record lengths with Hi Res mode would cause the oscilloscope to run out of
memory.
Selecting Repetitive
Sampling
TDS 500C and TDS 700C models only: To limit the oscilloscope to real-time
sampling or let it choose between real-time or equivalent-time sampling:
Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU ➞ Repetitive Signal (main) ➞
ON or OFF (side).
H
H
ON (Enable ET) uses both the real-time and the equivalent-time sampling
as appropriate (see Table 3–4).
OFF (Real Time Only) limits the oscilloscope to real-time sampling. If the
oscilloscope cannot accurately get enough samples for a complete waveform,
it will interpolate.
NOTE. The oscilloscope will use the interpolation method selected in the display
menu to fill in the missing record points — either linear or sin(x)/x interpolation.
See Interpolation on page 3–28 for a discussion of interpolation.
The sampling speeds and the number of channels you choose affect the mode the
oscilloscope uses to sample waveforms:
H
The oscilloscope always real-time samples at slower time base settings;
faster time settings force the oscilloscope to switch from real-time sampling
to equivalent-time sampling or interpolation, depending on whether ET is on
or off.
H
The oscilloscope extends the limit at which it must switch from real-time
sampling by using the digitizers of channels that are turned off to sample the
channel or channels that are turned on.
3–34
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Check Table 3–4 below to determine the time base setting(s) at which the switch
from real-time sampling (RT) to equivalent time sampling or interpolation (ETI)
occurs for your model.
Table 3–4: TDS 500C and TDS 700C Sampling mode selection (when fit to screen is off)
TDS 754C
1 or 2
Model
TDS 540C
1
TDS 520C & 724C
TDS 784C
1
1
Channels on
2
3 or 4
1
2
3 or 4
2
3 or 4
2
Time base
3
u50 ns
50 ns
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
ETI
RT
RT
RT
ETI
ETI
RT
4
RT
ETI
RT
25 ns
RT
ETI
ETI
RT
ETI
RT
ETI
ETI
ETI
ETI
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
12.5 ns
t25 ns
ETI
ETI
ETI
ETI
ETI
ETI
ETI
1
2
3
4
5
Note that the TDS 520C and TDS 724C can have no more that two channels on at a time.
“u” means “slower than”; “t” means “faster than.”
“RT” abbreviates “Real-Time Sampling” throughout this table.
“ETI” abbreviates “Equivalent-Time Sampling or Interpolation” throughout this table.
Time base setting not available for this model.
Stop After
To choose the event that stops the acquiring waveforms, do the following step:
Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU ➞ Stop After (main) ➞ RUN/STOP button
only, Single Acquisition Sequence, or Limit Test Condition Met (side). (See
Figure 3–17.) (TDS 500C and TDS 700C models only: single acquisition and
limit testing are ignored in InstaVu mode; see Incompatible Modes on
page 3–58.)
3–35
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Figure 3–17: Acquire Menu — Stop After
H
Press RUN/STOP button only (side) to use the RUN/STOP button to start
or stop acquiring. Pressing the RUN/STOP button once will stop the
acquisitions. The upper left hand corner in the display will say “Stop” and
show the number of acquisitions. If you press the button again, the oscillo-
scope will resume taking acquisitions.
H
Press Single Acquisition Sequence (side). That selection lets you run a
single sequence of acquisitions by pressing the RUN/STOP button. In
Sample, Peak Detect, or Hi Res mode, the oscilloscope will acquire a
waveform record with the first valid trigger event and stop. (Hi Res is
available only on TDS 500C and TDS 700C models.)
In Envelope or Average mode, the oscilloscope will make the specified
number of acquisitions to complete the averaging or enveloping task.
TDS 500C and TDS 700C models only: If the oscilloscope is in equivalent-
time mode and you press Single Acquisition Sequence (side), it will
continue to recognize trigger events and acquire samples until the waveform
record is filled.
3–36
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
NOTE. To quickly select Single Acquisition Sequence without displaying the
Acquire and Stop After menus, press SHIFT FORCE TRIG. Now the RUN/STOP
button operates as just described. (You still must display the Acquire menu and
then the Stop After menu to leave Single Acquisition Sequence operation.)
H
Press Limit Test Condition Met (side) to acquire waveforms until
waveform data exceeds the limits specified in the limit test. Then acquisition
stops. At that point, you can also specify other actions for the oscilloscope to
take, using the selections available in the Limit Test Setup main menu.
NOTE. For the oscilloscope to stop an acquisition when limit test conditions have
been met, limit testing must be turned ON using the Limit Test Setup main menu.
Setting up limit testing requires several more steps. See Limit Testing on
page 3–183.
Preventing Aliasing
Under certain conditions, a waveform may be aliased on screen. Read the
following description about aliasing and the suggestions for preventing it.
About Aliasing. When a waveform aliases, it appears on screen with a frequency
lower than the actual waveform being input or it appears unstable even though
the light next to TRIG’D is lighted. Aliasing occurs because the oscilloscope
cannot sample the signal fast enough to construct an accurate waveform record.
(See Figure 3–18.)
Actual High-Frequency Waveform
Apparent Low-frequency
Waveform Due to Aliasing
Sampled Points
Figure 3–18: Aliasing
3–37
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Methods to Check and Eliminate. To quickly check for aliasing, slowly increase
the horizontal scale (time per division setting). If the shape of the displayed
waveform changes drastically or becomes stable at a faster time base setting,
your waveform was probably aliased.
To avoid aliasing, be sure to sample the input signal at a rate more than twice as
fast as the highest frequency component. For example, a signal with frequency
components of 500 MHz would need to be sampled at a rate faster than
1 Gigasamples/second to represent it accurately and to avoid aliasing. The
following tips may help you eliminate aliasing on a signal:
H
H
H
Try adjusting the horizontal scale.
Try pressing the AUTOSET button.
Try switching the acquisition mode (in the acquisition menu) to Envelope or
Peak Detect. Envelope searches for samples with the highest and lowest
values over multiple acquisitions; Peak Detect mode does the same but in a
single acquisition. Either can detect faster signal components over time.
H
Try pressing the InstaVu acquisition button (TDS 500C and TDS 700C
models only). InstaVu mode results in waveform displays similar to those
obtained using an analog oscilloscope, due to its fast waveform capture rate.
Customizing the Display
The TDS Oscilloscope can display waveform records and other display elements
in different ways. This section describes how to adjust the oscilloscope display
style, intensity level, graticule, and format.
NOTE. TDS 500C and 700C models only: This section assumes you are using
Normal acquisitions mode and gives display settings for this mode. If you select
InstaVu acquisitions, procedures for making Style, Format, and Readout display
settings differ and some selections are not permitted. See Using InstaVuT
Acquisition Mode, on page 3–55, for setup differences and Incompatible Modes on
page 3–58.
3–38
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Change Display Settings
To bring up the Display menu:
Press DISPLAY ➞ Settings (main) ➞ Display (pop-up).
The Display menu allows you to adjust the style, intensity level, graticule, and
format features described below. The Color menu allows you to alter color
settings for various display components such as waveforms and text. To find
more information on color, see Customizing the Display Color on page 3–44.
Select the Display Style
TDS 600B only: Press DISPLAY ➞ Style (main) ➞ Vectors, Dots, Intensified
Samples, Infinite Persistence, or Variable Persistence (side). (See Fig-
ure 3–19.)
TDS 500C and TDS 700C models only: Press DISPLAY ➞ Mode (main) ➞
Normal (pop-up) ➞ Style (main) ➞ Vectors, Dots, Intensified Samples,
Infinite Persistence, or Variable Persistence (side)
Vectors style displays vectors (lines) between the record points.
Dots style displays waveform record points as dots.
Intensified Samples style also displays waveform record points as dots. However,
the points actually sampled are displayed in the color labeled “Zone” in the
Display Colors menus.
In addition to choosing Intensified Samples in the side menu, the oscilloscope
must be interpolating (equivalent time must be off for TDS 500C and TDS 700C
models) or Zoom must be on with its horizontal expansion greater that 1X. See
Interpolation on page 3–28; see Zooming on Waveforms on page 3–49.
Variable Persistence style accumulates the record points on screen and displays
them only for a specific time interval. In that mode, the display behaves like that
of an analog oscilloscope. You enter the time for that option with the keypad or
the general purpose knob. Record points are also displayed with colors that vary
depending on the persistence of the point. See Choose a Palette on page 3–45.
Infinite Persistence style accumulates the record points until you change some
control (such as scale factor) causing the display to be erased.
3–39
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Figure 3–19: Display Menu — Style
NOTE. TDS 500C and TDS 700C models only: See Using InstaVuT Acquisition
Mode, on page 3–55, to see how Style setup differs for InstaVu mode.
Adjust Intensity
Intensity lets you set text/graticule and waveform intensity (brightness) levels.
To set the intensity:
Press DISPLAY ➞ Intensity (main) ➞ Text/Grat or Waveform (side). Enter
the intensity percentage values with the keypad or the general purpose knob.
All intensity adjustments operate over a range from 20% (close to fully off) to
100% (fully bright).
Set Display Readout
Options
Readout options control whether the trigger indicator, trigger level bar, and
current date and time appear on the display. The options also control what style
trigger level bar, long or short, is displayed.
3–40
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
1. TDS 600B: Press DISPLAY ➞ Readout Options (main).
TDS 500C and TDS 700C Models: Press DISPLAY ➞ Mode (main) ➞
Normal (pop-up) ➞ Format/RO (main).
2. Toggle Display ‘T’ @ Trigger Point (side) to select whether or not to
display ‘T’ indicating the trigger point. You can select ON or OFF. (The
trigger point indicates the position of the trigger in the waveform record.)
3. Press Trigger Bar Style (side) to select either the short or the long trigger
bar or to turn the trigger bar off. (See Figure 3–20. Note that both styles are
shown for illustrating purposes, but you can only display one style at a time.)
The trigger bar is only displayed if the trigger source is an active, displayed
waveform. Also, two trigger bars are displayed when delay triggerable
acquisitions are displayed — one for the main and one for the delayed time
base. The trigger bar is a visual indicator of the trigger level.
Trigger Point Indicator
Trigger Bar—Long Style
-or-
Trigger Bar—Short Style
Figure 3–20: Trigger Point and Level Indicators
3–41
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Sometimes, especially when using the hardcopy feature, you may want to
display the current date and time on screen. (To find more information
displaying and setting date and time, see Date/Time Stamp the Hardcopy on
page 3–168.)
4. Press Display Date/Time (side) to turn it on or off. Push Clear Menu to see
the current date and time.
Select Interpolation Filter
The display filter types are sin(x)/x interpolation and linear interpolation. To
switch between interpolation filters:
Press DISPLAY ➞ Filter (main) ➞ Sin(x)/x Interpolation or Linear Inter-
polation (side).
NOTE. When the horizontal scale is set to the faster rates (10 ns/div for the
TDS 600B; see Table 3–4 on page 3–35 for rates specific to the TDS 500C and
TDS 700C models) or when using the ZOOM feature to expand waveforms
horizontally, interpolation occurs. (The filter type, linear or sin(x)/(x), depends
on which is set in the Display menu.) Otherwise, interpolation is not used. See
Interpolation on page 3–28 for a discussion of interpolation.
Select the Graticule Type
To change the graticule:
Press DISPLAY ➞ Graticule (main) ➞ Full, Grid, Cross Hair, Frame, NTSC
or PAL (side).
Full provides a grid, cross hairs and a frame.
Grid displays a frame and a grid.
Cross Hair provides cross hairs, and a frame.
Frame displays just a frame.
NTSC provides a grid useful for measuring NTSC-class waveforms.
PAL provides a grid useful for measuring PAL-class waveforms.
3–42
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
NOTE. Selecting either NTSC or PAL graticules automatically changes the
vertical scale, position settings, coupling, and sets to zero any vertical offset of
any channel displayed. These settings are not restored after switching to other
graticule types. Therefore, you might want to recall the factory setup or other
stored setup after selecting a different graticule.
Select the Format
The oscilloscope displays waveforms in either of two formats: YT and XY. To
set the display axis format:
TDS 600B: Press DISPLAY ➞ Format (main) ➞ XY or YT (side).
TDS 500C and TDS 700C models: Press DISPLAY ➞ Mode (main) ➞ Normal
(pop-up) ➞ Format/RO (main) ➞ XY or YT (side).
YT is the conventional oscilloscope display format. It shows a signal voltage (the
vertical axis) as it varies over time (the horizontal axis).
XY format compares the voltage levels of two waveform records point by point.
That is, the oscilloscope displays a graph of the voltage of one waveform record
against the voltage of another waveform record. This mode is particularly useful
for studying phase relationships.
When you choose the XY format, any channel or reference displayed is assigned
to the axis indicated in Table 3–5 and displayed as part of an XY pair. If only one
source in an XY pair is displayed, the oscilloscope automatically turns on the
other source to complete the XY pair when you select XY. Moreover, once XY is
on, selecting either source in a pair turns the pair on; pressing WAVEFORM OFF
for either source in the pair removes both sources from the display.
Table 3–5: XY Format pairs
XY Pair
X-Axis source
Y-Axis source
Ch 2
Ch 1 and Ch 2
Ch 1
Ch 3 and Ch 4 (Ax1 and Ax2) Ch 3 (Ax1)
Ch 4 (Ax2)
Ref 2
Ref 1 and Ref 2
Ref 3 and Ref 4
Ref 1
Ref 3
Ref 4
3–43
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Since selecting YT or XY affects only the display, the horizontal and vertical
scale and position knobs and menus control the same parameters regardless of
the mode selected. Specifically, in XY mode, the horizontal scale will continue
to control the time base and the horizontal position will continue to control
which portion of the waveforms are displayed.
XY format is a dot-only display, although it can have persistence. The Vector
style selection has no effect when you select XY format.
You cannot display Math waveforms in XY format. They will disappear from the
display when you select XY.
NOTE. Use of XY at higher room temperatures or with higher intensity display
formats, such as the white fields in the Hardcopy palette, can temporarily
degrade display quality.
Customizing the Display Color
The TDS Oscilloscope can display information in different colors. This section
describes how to use the Color menu to choose the colors in which the various
display objects appear.
Change the Display Color
To bring up the Color menu:
1. Press DISPLAY to show the Display menu.
2. Press Settings in the main menu until you select Color from the pop-up
menu. (See Figure 3–21.)
The Color menu allows you to alter color settings for various display compo-
nents such as waveforms and text. The Display menu allows you to adjust the
style, intensity level, graticule, and format features. To find more information on
display, see Change the Display Settings on page 3–39.
3–44
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Figure 3–21: Display Menu — Setting
Choose a Palette
To choose a palette of 13 colors from a menu of preset palettes:
1. Choose the starting palette by selecting Palette from the main menu.
2. Select one of the available palettes in the side menu. Choose from Normal,
Bold, Hardcopy Preview or Monochrome.
3. If you are using a persistence display and want to vary the color of each
point depending on its persistence, choose Persistence Palettes. Then
choose Temperature, Spectral, or Gray Scale from the resulting side menu.
Choose View Palette to preview your selection on the display. Press
Persistence Palette to quit preview mode. Press Clear Menu to return to the
Palette menu.
3–45
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
NOTE. Use at higher room temperatures or with higher intensity display formats,
such as the white fields in the Hardcopy Preview palette, can temporarily
degrade display quality.
You can select the Hardcopy Preview palette when using certain color hardcopy
formats. The default colors in the this palette comprise a white background and
fully saturated primary colors which generally produce the best result.
Change the Palette Colors
To change the color of the current palette, select a color and vary these attributes:
Hue, which is the wavelength of light reflected from the surface. It varies
continuously along the color spectrum as produced by a rainbow.
Lightness, which is the amount of light reflected from the surface. It varies from
black, to the nominal color, to white.
Saturation, which is the intensity of color. Completely desaturated color is gray.
Completely saturated color of any hue is that color at its most intense level.
1. Select the main menu Change Colors item. (See Figure 3–22.)
2. Select one of the colors by pressing (repeatedly) Color in the side menu.
3. If you want to use the factory default for this color, press the side menu
Reset to Factory Color.
4. Choose Hue from the side menu and use the general purpose knob or keypad
to select the desired hue. Values range from 0 to 359. Sample values are:
0 = blue, 60 = magenta, 120 = red, 180 = yellow, 240 = green, and
300 = cyan.
5. Choose Lightness from the side menu and use the general purpose knob or
keypad to select the lightness you desire. A value of 0 results in black. A
value of 50 provides the nominal color. A value of 100 results in white.
6. Choose Saturation from the side menu and use the general purpose knob or
keypad to select the saturation you desire. A value of 100 provides a pure
color. A value of 0 provides gray.
3–46
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Figure 3–22: Display Menu — Palette Colors
Set Math Waveform Color
To define math waveform colors:
1. Choose to define math waveform colors by selecting the main menu Map
Math item.
2. Select one of the three math waveforms by pressing Math in the side menu.
3. If you want to assign the selected math waveform to a specific color, press
Color and cycle through the choices.
4. If you want the selected math waveform to be the same color as the
waveform it is based on, select Color Matches Contents. If the math
waveform is based on dual waveforms, the math waveform will use the color
of the first constituent waveform.
To return to the factory defaults, select Reset to Factory Color.
Set Reference Waveform
Color
To define reference waveform colors:
1. Press Map Reference in the main menu. (See Figure 3–23.)
3–47
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
2. Select one of the four reference waveforms by pressing Ref in the side menu.
3. To assign the selected reference waveform to a specific color, press
(repeatedly) Color and choose the value.
4. To make the selected reference waveform the same color as the waveform it
is based on, select Color Matches Contents.
To return to the factory defaults, select Reset to Factory Color.
Figure 3–23: Display Menu — Map Reference Colors
Select Options
Restore Colors
To define what color to show where a waveform crosses another waveform:
1. Press the Options main menu item.
2. Toggle Collision Contrast to ON in the side menu to mark collision zones
with a special color.
To restore colors to their factory default settings:
1. Press the main menu Restore Colors item. (See Figure 3–24.)
3–48
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
2. Select the object(s) you want to restore by pressing Reset Current Palette
To Factory, Reset All Palettes To Factory or Reset All Mappings To
Factory in the side menu.
Figure 3–24: Display Menu — Restore Colors
Zooming on Waveforms
The TDS Oscilloscope can expand or compress (zoom in or out) on a waveform
without changing the acquisition parameters (sample rate, record length, and so
on). This subsection describes how to use Zoom and how it interacts with the
selected waveform. It also describes how interpolation can affect Zoom.
Use Zoom (press the ZOOM button) when you want to temporarily expand a
waveform to inspect small feature(s) on that waveform. For example, to
temporarily expand the front corner of a pulse to inspect its aberrations, use
Zoom to expand it horizontally and vertically. After you are finished, you can
return to your original horizontal scale setting by pressing one menu button.
(Zoom is also handy if you have acquired a waveform at the fastest time per
division and want to further expand the waveform horizontally.)
3–49
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Using with Waveforms
To help you use zoom effectively, consider how it operates on waveforms. When
zooming vertically, the oscilloscope expands or contracts the selected waveform
only. Also, the oscilloscope only positions the selected waveform when in Zoom.
When zooming horizontally, Zoom expands either the selected waveform, all live
waveforms, or all live and reference waveforms, depending on the setting for
Horizontal Lock in the Zoom menu.
When zooming horizontally or vertically, Zoom expands or contracts the
waveform by the zoom factor.
Interpolation and Zoom
To help you use Zoom effectively, consider how it is affected by interpolation.
When you zoom on a waveform, you expand a portion of it. If the expansion
requires the oscilloscope to show more points for that portion than it has
acquired, it interpolates.
The method the oscilloscope uses to interpolate, linear or sin(x)/x, can affect the
way Zoom displays your waveform. If you selected sin(x)/x (the default), it may
introduce some overshoot or undershoot to the waveform edges. If such is the
case, change the interpolation method to linear, following the instructions on
page 3–52.
To read about the two interpolation methods, see Interpolation on page 3–28. To
differentiate between the real and interpolated samples, set the display style to
Intensified Samples. (See Select the Display Style on page 3–39.)
Checking the Zoom Factor
To quickly determine the zoom factor of a zoomed waveform, select it and check
the Zoom readout. It shows the selected waveform by number, along with the
horizontal and vertical expansion factors.
The Zoom readout appears at the top of the display when zoom is on. (See
Figure 3–25 on page 3–52.) Dual-window (preview) mode does not display the
Zoom readout.
3–50
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Zoom a Waveform
To use Zoom, select a waveform, turn Zoom on, and magnify that waveform
using the vertical and horizontal scale knobs:
1. Press any of waveform selection buttons CH 1 through CH 4 on the right
side of the display. Or press MORE and select a math or reference waveform
from the More menu.
2. Press ZOOM.
Press ZOOM ➞ Mode (main) ➞ ON (side). The ZOOM front-panel button
should light up. Toggle Dual Zoom to OFF in the side menu.
3. Adjust the vertical zoom factor for the selected waveform using the vertical
SCALE knob. Adjust the vertical position of the zoomed waveform using
the vertical POSITION knob.
4. Adjust the horizontal zoom factor using the horizontal SCALE knob. Adjust
the horizontal position of the zoomed waveform using the horizontal
POSITION knob.
Depending on the selection for Horizontal Lock in the side menu, Zoom
affects the displayed waveforms as follows:
None — only the waveform currently selected can be magnified and
positioned horizontally (Figure 3–25).
Live — all “live” (as opposed to reference) waveforms can be magnified and
positioned horizontally at the same time. If a reference or math waveform is
selected and Horizontal Lock set to Live, only the selected reference or math
waveform is magnified and positioned.
All — all waveforms displayed (live, math, and reference) can be magnified
and positioned horizontally at the same time.
5. Press ZOOM ➞ Lock (main) ➞ All, Live, or None (side).
NOTE. Although Zoom must be turned on to control which waveforms Zoom
affects, the setting for Horizontal Lock affects which waveforms the horizontal
control positions whether Zoom is on or off. The rules for the three settings are
listed in step 4 on page 3–51.
3–51
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Only the selected
waveform (the top one)
changes size.
Figure 3–25: Zoom Mode with Horizontal Lock Set to None
Set Interpolation
Reset Zoom
To change the interpolation method used, press DISPLAY ➞ Settings (main) ➞
Display (pop-up) ➞ Filter (main) ➞ Sin(x)/x Interpolation or Linear
Interpolation (side).
To reset all zoom factors to their defaults, do the following step:
Press ZOOM ➞ Reset (main) ➞ Reset Live Factors or Reset All Factors
(side). Reset Live Factors resets only for live waveforms, as opposed to reference
waveforms; Reset All Factors resets for all waveforms.
Using Dual Window Mode
The oscilloscope can display and control a waveform that is both zoomed and
unzoomed (magnified and unmagnified). To do so, it creates two 1/2 height
graticules, or windows, and displays the magnified waveform in the upper, and
the unmagnified waveform in the lower graticule. To use Dual Window Zoom
(also called zoom preview mode), do the following steps:
1. Press Zoom ➞ Mode (main) ➞ Preview (side). Note that the oscilloscope
displays the box-enclosed area on the waveform as magnified in the top
graticule. (See Figure 3–26.)
3–52
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
2. To scale or position the unmagnified waveform, press Selected Grati-
cule (main) ➞ Lower (side). Use the vertical and horizontal knobs to scale
and position the unmagnified waveform in the box.
Note that as you scale or move the unmagnified waveform relative to the
box, the oscilloscope alters the magnified display accordingly to include
only the waveform portion within the box.
3. To scale or position the magnified waveform, press Selected Grati-
cule (main) ➞ Upper (side). Use the vertical and horizontal knobs to scale
and position the magnified waveform.
Note that as you scale or move the magnified waveform, the oscilloscope
scales or moves the box relative to the unmagnified waveform, so the box
encloses only the waveform portion magnified in the upper graticule.
In Dual Window Zoom mode, the oscilloscope does not display the zoom
magnification factors; however, it does display the scale factors (volts/divi-
sion and time/division) for the zoomed waveform.
Zoomed (Magnified) Waveforms
Nonzoomed Waveforms, with Box
Indicators at Corners Denoting
the Selected Graticule
Figure 3–26: Dual Window (Preview) Mode
3–53
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Dual Zoom a Waveform
To select Dual Zoom, press ZOOM ➞ Mode (main) ➞ Dual Zoom (side) to
toggle it to ON. (See Figure 3–27.)
Dual zoom displays a second zoomed view of the selected unzoomed waveform.
The second zoomed view is offset in time from the first zoomed view. Also,
zoom must be enabled (side menu set to On or Preview) to see the Dual Zoom
displays.
To Set Dual Zoom Offset
To set the offset in time of the second zoomed waveform from the first, press
ZOOM ➞ Mode (main) ➞ Dual Zoom Offset (side). Then turn the general
purpose knob or use the keypad to set the offset.
Dual Zoom offset is always positive. The oscilloscope sets the offset as close to
the requested value as possible. An offset request of 0.0 insures that the zoom
boxes are butted up against each other, regardless of the zoom factor.
The horizontal zoom and scale factors determine the minimum offset time
available. Both zoom boxes always enclose equal amounts of time with the
second box always offset from the first by a time equal to one box. Doubling the
zoom factor halves the time enclosed by either box and, therefore, halves the
minimum offset time.
The oscilloscope retains any value input that is less than the minimum time
available as a “request” if you enter that value using the keypad. Increasing the
zoom factor or decreasing the horizontal scale to a setting that allows the
requested value sets offset time to that value. You cannot set offset to less than
the minimum offset time available when using the general purpose knob.
NOTE. To make setting up Dual Zoom easier, turn on Preview in the side menu.
In this dual-window mode, the zoomed display appears in the top graticule,
while the lower graticule shows the two zoomed portions enclosed in two boxes
on the unzoomed waveform. Adjusting offset moves the right box relative to the
left box, which remains stationary. The associated zoomed waveform in the
upper graticule moves to track the offset changes. You can also adjust the
waveform relative to the zoom boxes by selecting the lower graticule and
adjusting the vertical and horizontal control knobs. See Using Dual Window
Mode on page 3–52.
3–54
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Selected Graticule
Zoomed Waveform Edges
Zoom Boxes
Unzoomed Waveform
Figure 3–27: Dual Zoom — Shown Dual Window (Preview) Mode
Using InstaVuT Acquisition Mode
The TDS 500C and 700C Oscilloscopes can use InstaVu acquisition mode to
reduce the dead time between waveform updates that normally occur when
digitizing storage oscilloscopes (DSOs) acquire waveforms. InstaVu mode can
capture and display transient deviations, such as glitches or runt pulses, often
missed during longer dead times that accompany normal DSO display. This
section describes how to use InstaVu mode and how it differs from normal
acquisition mode.
Waveform Capture Rate
Figure 3–29 illustrates how InstaVu acquisition mode differs from the normal
acquisition mode used by digital storage oscilloscopes. Note that normal mode
follows a “capture waveform–digitize waveform–update waveform memory–dis-
play waveform” cycle. Normal mode misses short term deviations occurring
during the long dead times. Typical waveform capture rates are 50 waveforms
per second.
3–55
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
InstaVu mode increases the waveform capture rate to up to 400,000 waveforms
per second (maximum waveform rate depends on oscilloscope model), updating
the waveform array many times between displays. This very fast frame rate
greatly increases the probability that runts, glitches, and other short term changes
will accumulate in waveform memory. The oscilloscope then displays the
waveform at the normal display rate using variable or infinite persistence. You
can control how long the waveform persists on screen by selecting variable
persistence and setting a decay constant.
To Use InstaVu Mode
To turn on InstaVu mode, do either of the two following steps:
1. Press the front-panel button InstaVu. (See Figure 3–28.)
2. Press DISPLAY ➞ Mode (main). Push Mode again to toggle to InstaVu
mode. (See Figure 3–28.)
To turn InstaVu off, press InstaVu. Alternatively, press DISPLAY ➞
Mode (main), and then press Mode again to toggle to Normal mode.
Figure 3–28: InstaVu Display
3–56
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
Normal DSO Mode
1st Acquired
Waveform
Record
Next Acquired
Waveform
Record
Next Acquired
Waveform
Record
Dead Time
Dead Time
Dead Time
Waveform
Memory
Waveform
Memory
Waveform
Memory
Display
Updated Display
Updated Display
InstaVu Mode
1st Set of Acquired
Waveform Records
Next Set of Acquired
Waveform Records
Next Set of Acquired
Waveform Records
Waveform
Memory
Bit Map
Waveform
Memory
Bit Map
Waveform
Memory
Bit Map
Variable Persistence
Display
Updated Variable
Persistence Display
Updated Variable
Persistence Display
Figure 3–29: Normal DSO Acquisition and Display Mode Versus InstaVu Mode
3–57
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
To Set the InstaVu Style
To change the InstaVu display style, do the following steps:
1. Press DISPLAY ➞ Mode (main) ➞ InstaVu (pop-up) ➞ Style (main).
2. Select between Vectors and Dots in the side menu. (Dots display is the
factory default setting.)
3. Select between Infinite Persistence and Variable Persistence in the side
menu. (Variable Persistence is the factory default setting.)
4. Use the general purpose knob or keypad to adjust the persistence time (decay
rate) if you have selected Variable Persistence.
To Set the InstaVu
Readout Options
To change the InstaVu readout options, do the following steps:
1. Press DISPLAY ➞ Mode (main) ➞ InstaVu (pop-up) ➞ Readout
Options (main).
2. Toggle Display T Trigger Point, Trigger Bar Style and Display Date/
Time in the side menu to the settings desired.
Incompatible Modes
Several modes/features are unavailable when InstaVu mode is selected:
H
H
FastFrame, Limit Testing, Extended Acquisition, XY display, and Zoom
modes
Envelope, Average, Hi Res, and Single Acquisition Sequence acquisition
modes and Autosave mode
H
H
H
H
Intensified time base
Record lengths longer than 500 samples
Interpolation (equivalent time sampling is used instead)
Vectors when in equivalent time mode (waveforms are displayed as Dots
instead). (To determine under what conditions the oscilloscope normally
interpolates or uses equivalent time, see Selecting Repetitive Sampling on
page 3–34.)
3–58
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
If you select any of these modes before or while InstaVu is on, they will remain
selected in their respective menus, but the oscilloscope will ignore them. It will
put the modes into effect when you turn InstaVu off. If the oscilloscope setup is
not as you expect when you turn InstaVu off, this may be because the oscillo-
scope quit ignoring these InstaVu incompatible modes.
InstaVu mode disallows selection of Math waveforms. If you attempt to select a
math waveform from the MORE menu, the oscilloscope will display an error
message. Either switch InstaVu off and create the math waveform, or select a
channel waveform and continue using InstaVu mode.
InstaVu displays using a persistence display style (see display menu). If you
select Intensified time base, the intensified zone is controlled by Horizontal
Scale and Delay time settings as when InstaVu is off, but the zone is masked by
the persistence display mode and cannot be seen. Turn off InstaVu to display the
intensified zone.
Using FastFrameT
You can define and enable FastFrame (TDS 500C and 700C models only). This
feature lets you capture multiple acquisitions in the acquisition memory of a
single channel. Figure 3–30 shows how FastFrame combines the desired
captured records into one larger record. For example, FastFrame would let you
store 10 records of 500 samples each into one record with a 5000 sample length.
Real Time
Fast Frame
Figure 3–30: Fast Frame
3–59
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
If you are using the FastFrame mode, you can jump to the desired frame. To use
FastFrame, do the following steps:
1. Press HORIZONTAL MENU ➞ FastFrame Setup (main) ➞ FastFrame
(side) to toggle on or off the use of FastFrame (see Figure 3–31).
Extd Acq
Set up
8M
Figure 3–31: Horizontal Menu — FastFrame Setup
2. Press Frame Length or Frame Count (side) and use the general purpose
knob to enter FastFrame parameters.
H
H
Frame Length refers to the number of samples in each acquisition.
Frame count refers to the number of acquisitions to store in the acquisition
memory of the channel. The oscilloscope will set the record length to a value
greater than or equal to the product of the frame count and the frame length.
If the product exceeds the maximum available record length, the oscilloscope
will reduce the frame length or frame count in size such that the product will
fit the record length.
3. Press Horiz Pos (main), then Frame (side), and use the general purpose
knob to enter the number of a specific frame to view. After you press Enter,
that frame should appear on the display.
3–60
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
If you shift the waveform right or left with the front-panel HORIZONTAL
POSITION knob, the window next to the side-menu Frame button will indicate
the frame number of the waveform at the center of the screen.
FastFrame Operating Characteristics. Consider the following operating character-
istics when using FastFrame:
H
Envelope, Average, and Hi Res form the envelope or average following the
last frame of the concatenated record. For example, if Average or Hi Res
acquisition modes are selected and the frame count is 10, segments 1 through
10 will show Sample or Hi Res frames, and frame 11 will show the average
of frames 1 through 10. If there is not room for one additional frame, the
envelope or average of the frames replaces the display of the last acquired
frame. Average and envelope counts have no affect in FastFrame.
H
H
You can press RUN/STOP to terminate a FastFrame sequence. If any frames
were acquired, they are displayed. If no frames were acquired, the previous
FastFrame waveform is displayed.
Because FastFrame waveforms contain many triggers, trigger position
indicators are removed from both the waveform and the record view when
the selected channel, reference, or math waveform is a FastFrame waveform.
H
H
In Equivalent Time, the oscilloscope ignores FastFrame mode.
Because FastFrame introduces additional processing time into the operation
cycle of acquire, process, and display, its best to use Single Sequence
Acquisition (see Acquire menu, Stop After menu). With Single Sequence
selected, you will see the current acquisition sequence; otherwise, the display
lags the current sequence by one sequence. You can also see the current
sequence by pressing the RUN/STOP button to stop the acquisition.
3–61
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms
3–62
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
To use the TDS Oscilloscope to measure or monitor waveforms, you need to
know how to trigger a stable display of those waveforms. Toward that end, this
section first covers the following topics:
H
Trigger Concepts which details some basic principles of triggering and
describes triggering elements: type, source, coupling, holdoff, mode,
and so on
H
Triggering from the Front Panel which describes how to use the front-panel
triggering controls each of which is common to most, if not all, the trigger
types the oscilloscope provides
Once these basics are covered, this section describes how to trigger using the
various trigger types provided by the Main trigger system: edge, logic, and pulse.
H
H
H
H
To use the “general purpose” trigger type, edge, see Triggering on a
Waveform Edge on page 3–72.
To logic trigger based on an input pattern, state, or setup/hold violation, see
Triggering Based on Logic on page 3–76.
To pulse trigger based on various pulse types (glitch, runt) or their parame-
ters (width, slew rate) see Triggering on Pulses on page 3–89.
To trigger on communication signals (optional on TDS 500C and 700C only)
see Communications Triggering on page 3–103.
This section concludes with details about and instructions for using the Delayed
time base and Delayed trigger system to delay the acquisition of a waveform
relative to a trigger event. (See Delayed Triggering on page 3–106.)
Triggering Concepts
Triggers determine when the oscilloscope stops acquiring and displays a
waveform. They help create meaningful waveforms from unstable jumbles or
blank screens. (See Figure 3–32.) The oscilloscope has five types of triggers:
edge, logic, pulse, and with option 2C, comm, and, with option 05, video.
3–63
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Triggered Waveform
Untriggered Waveforms
Figure 3–32: Triggered Versus Untriggered Displays
The Trigger Event
The trigger event establishes the time-zero point in the waveform record. All
points in the record are located in time with respect to that point. The oscillo-
scope continuously acquires and retains enough sample points to fill the
pretrigger portion of the waveform record (that part of the waveform that is
displayed before, or to the left of, the triggering event on screen). When a trigger
event occurs, the oscilloscope starts acquiring samples to build the posttrigger
portion of the waveform record (displayed after, or to the right of, the trigger
event). Once a trigger is recognized, the digitizing oscilloscope will not accept
another trigger until the acquisition is complete.
Trigger Sources
You can derive your trigger from the following sources:
Input channels provide the most commonly used trigger source. You can select
any one of the four input channels. The channel you select as a trigger source
will function whether it is displayed or not.
AC Line Voltage is the trigger source most often used when you are looking at
signals related to the power line frequency. Examples include devices such as
lighting equipment and power supplies. Because the oscilloscope generates the
trigger, you do not have to input a signal to create the trigger.
Auxiliary Trigger is the trigger source most often used in doing digital design
and repair. For example, you might want to trigger with an external clock or with
a signal from another part of the circuit. To use the auxiliary trigger, connect the
external triggering signal to the Auxiliary Trigger input connector on the
oscilloscope rear panel.
3–64
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Trigger Types
The digitizing oscilloscope provides three standard triggers for the main trigger
system: edge, pulse, and logic. Option 05 provides a video trigger. The standard
triggers are described individually starting on page 3–72. A brief definition of
each type follows:
Edge is the “basic” trigger. You can use it with both analog and digital test
circuits. An edge trigger event occurs when the trigger source (the signal the
trigger circuit is monitoring) passes through a specified voltage level in the
specified direction (the trigger slope).
Pulse is a special-purpose trigger primarily used on digital circuits. The five
classes of pulse triggers are glitch, runt, width, slew rate and timeout. Pulse
triggering is available on the main trigger only.
Logic is a special-purpose trigger primarily used on digital logic circuits. Two of
the classes, pattern and state, trigger based on the Boolean operator you select
for the trigger sources. Triggering occurs when the Boolean conditions are
satisfied. A third class, setup/hold, triggers when data in one trigger source
changes state within the setup and hold times that you specify relative to a clock
in another trigger source. Logic triggers are available on the main trigger system
only.
Comm (available as option 2C) is a special trigger used on communication
signals. See tables 3–8 and 3–9, starting on page 3–103, for a list of supported
codes, standards and pulse forms.
Video (available as option 05) is a special trigger used on video circuits. It helps
you investigate events that occur when a video signal generates a horizontal or
vertical sync pulse. Supported classes of video triggers include NTSC, PAL,
SECAM, and high definition TV signals.
Trigger Modes
The trigger mode determines how the oscilloscope behaves in the absence of a
trigger event. The oscilloscope provides two trigger modes, normal and automatic.
Normal trigger mode enables the oscilloscope to acquire a waveform only when
it is triggered. If no trigger occurs, the oscilloscope will not acquire a waveform.
(You can push FORCE TRIGGER to force the oscilloscope to make a single
acquisition.)
3–65
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Automatic trigger mode (auto mode) enables the oscilloscope to acquire a
waveform even if a trigger does not occur. Auto mode uses a timer that starts
after a trigger event occurs. If another trigger event is not detected before the
timer times out, the oscilloscope forces a trigger anyway. The length of time it
waits for a trigger event depends on the time base setting.
Be aware that auto mode, when forcing triggers in the absence of valid triggering
events, does not sync the waveform on the display. In other words, successive
acquisitions will not be triggered at the same point on the waveform; therefore,
the waveform will appear to roll across the screen. Of course, if valid triggers
occur the display will become stable on screen.
Since auto mode will force a trigger in the absence of one, auto mode is useful in
observing signals where you are only concerned with monitoring amplitude
level. Although the unsynced waveform may “roll” across the display, it will not
freeze as it would in normal trigger mode. Monitoring of a power supply output
is an example of such an application.
Trigger Holdoff
When the oscilloscope recognizes a trigger event, it disables the trigger system
until acquisition is complete. In addition, the trigger system remains disabled
during the holdoff period that follows each acquisition. You can set holdoff time
to help ensure a stable display.
For example, the trigger signal can be a complex waveform with many possible
trigger points on it. Though the waveform is repetitive, a simple trigger might
get you a series of patterns on the screen instead of the same pattern each time.
A digital pulse train is a good example of a complex waveform. (See Fig-
ure 3–33.) Each pulse looks like any other, so many possible trigger points exist.
Not all of these will result in the same display. The holdoff period allows the
oscilloscope to trigger on the correct edge, resulting in a stable display.
Holdoff is settable from 250 ns (minimum holdoff available) to 12 seconds
(maximum holdoff available). To see how to set holdoff, see To Set Mode &
Holdoff on page 3–75.
You can also set a default holdoff. The default hold is the “general purpose”
holdoff for most triggering signals and varies with the horizontal scale. It is
equal to 5 divisions times the current time/division settings.
3–66
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Acquisition
Interval
Acquisition
Interval
Trigger Level
Indicates
Trigger Points
Holdoff
Holdoff
Triggers are not recognized during holdoff time.
Holdoff
Figure 3–33: Trigger Holdoff Time Ensures Valid Triggering
Trigger Coupling
Trigger Position
Trigger coupling determines what part of the signal is passed to the trigger
circuit. All trigger types except edge triggering use only DC coupling; edge
triggering can use all available coupling types: AC, DC, Low Frequency
Rejection, High Frequency Rejection, and Noise Rejection: See To Specify
Coupling on page 3–74 for a description of each coupling mode.
The adjustable feature trigger position defines where on the waveform record the
trigger occurs. It lets you properly align and measure data within records. The
part of the record that occurs before the trigger is the pretrigger portion. The part
that occurs after the trigger is the posttrigger portion.
To help you visualize the trigger position setting, the top part of the display has
an icon indicating where the trigger occurs in the waveform record. You select in
the Horizontal menu what percentage of the waveform record will contain
pretrigger information.
Displaying pretrigger information can be valuable when troubleshooting. For
example, if you are trying to find the cause of an unwanted glitch in your test
circuit, it might trigger on the glitch and make the pretrigger period large enough
to capture data before the glitch. By analyzing what happened before the glitch,
you may uncover clues about its source.
3–67
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Slope and Level
The slope control determines whether the oscilloscope finds the trigger point on
the rising or the falling edge of a signal. (See Figure 3–34.)
You set trigger slope by first selecting Slope in the Main Trigger menu and then
selecting between the rising or falling slope icons in the side menu that appears.
The level control determines where on that edge the trigger point occurs. (See
Figure 3–34.) The oscilloscope lets you set the main trigger level with the trigger
MAIN LEVEL knob.
Positive-Going Edge
Negative-Going Edge
Trigger level
can be adjusted
vertically.
Trigger slope can be positive or negative.
Figure 3–34: Slope and Level Controls Help Define the Trigger
Delayed Trigger System
The oscilloscope also has a delayed trigger system that provides an edge trigger
(no pulse or logic triggers). When using the delayed time base, you can also
delay the acquisition of a waveform for a user-specified time or a user-specified
number of delayed trigger events (or both) after a main trigger event. See
Delayed Triggering on page 3–106 to learn how to use delay.
Triggering from the Front Panel
The trigger buttons and knob let you quickly adjust the trigger level or force a
trigger. (See Figure 3–35.) The trigger readout and status screen lets you quickly
determine the state of the trigger system. You use the following trigger controls
and readouts for all trigger types except where noted.
To set MAIN LEVEL
To manually change the trigger level when edge triggering (or certain threshold
levels when logic or pulse triggering), turn the MAIN LEVEL knob. It adjusts
the trigger level (or threshold level) instantaneously no matter what menu, if any,
is displayed.
3–68
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Trigger Status Lights
Figure 3–35: TRIGGER Controls and Status Lights
To Set to 50%
To quickly obtain an edge trigger or a glitch or width pulse trigger, press SET
LEVEL TO 50%. The oscilloscope sets the trigger level to the halfway point
between the peaks of the trigger signal. Set Level to 50% has no effect when
trigger type is logic or video.
You can also set the level to 50% in the Trigger menu under the main menu item
Level if edge trigger or glitch or width pulse trigger is selected.
Note that the MAIN LEVEL knob and menu items apply only to the main trigger
level. To modify the delayed trigger level, use the Level item in the Delayed
Trigger menu.
To Force a Trigger
To force the oscilloscope to immediately start acquiring a waveform record even
without a trigger event, press the FORCE TRIG front panel button.
Forcing a trigger is useful when in normal trigger mode and the input signal is
not supplying a valid trigger. By pressing FORCE TRIG, you can quickly
confirm that there is a signal present for the oscilloscope to acquire. Once that is
established, you can determine how to trigger on it (press SET LEVEL TO
50%, check trigger source setting, and so on).
The oscilloscope recognizes and acts upon FORCE TRIG even when you press it
before the end of pretrigger holdoff. However, the button has no effect if the
acquisition system is stopped.
3–69
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
To Single Trigger
To trigger on the next valid trigger event and then stop, press SHIFT FORCE
TRIG. Now press the RUN/STOP button each time you want to initiate the
single sequence of acquisitions.
To leave Single Trig mode, press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU ➞ Stop Af-
ter (main) ➞ RUN/STOP Button Only (side).
See the description under Stop After on page 3–35 for further discussion of
single sequence acquisitions.
(Single sequence triggering is not available in InstaVu mode; see Incompatible
Modes on page 3–58.)
To Check Trigger Status
To ascertain the state and setup of the triggering circuit, use the trigger status
lights, readout, and screen.
Trigger Status Lights. To quickly determine trigger status, check the three status
lights TRIG’D, READY, and ARM in the Trigger control area. (See Fig-
ure 3–35.)
H
H
H
H
When TRIG’D is lighted, it means the oscilloscope has recognized a valid
trigger and is filling the posttrigger portion of the waveform.
When READY is lighted, it means the oscilloscope can accept a valid trigger
event and the oscilloscope is waiting for that event to occur.
When ARM is lighted, it means the trigger circuitry is filling the pretrigger
portion of the waveform record.
When both TRIG’D and READY are lighted, it means the oscilloscope has
recognized a valid main trigger and is waiting for a delayed trigger. When
the oscilloscope recognizes a delayed trigger, it will fill in the posttrigger
portion of the delayed waveform.
H
H
When ARM, TRIG’D, and READY are all off, the digitizer is stopped.
When ARM, TRIG’D, and READY are all lighted (TDS 500C and
TDS 700C models only), FastFrame or InstaVu modes are in effect. No
trigger status monitoring is taking place.
3–70
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Trigger Readout. To quickly determine the settings of some key trigger parame-
ters, check the Trigger readout at the bottom of the display. (See Figure 3–36.)
The readouts differ for edge, logic, and pulse triggers.
Main Trigger
Slope = Rising Edge
Main Trigger
Source = Ch 1
Main Time Base Time/Div
Main Time Base
Main Trigger
Level
Figure 3–36: Example Trigger Readouts — Edge Trigger Selected
Record View. To determine where the trigger point is located in the waveform
record and with respect to the display, check the record view at the top of the
display. (See Figure 3–37.)
Trigger Position and Level Indicators. To see the trigger point and level on the
waveform display, check the graphic indicators Trigger Position and Trigger Bar.
Figure 3–37 shows the trigger point indicator and trigger level bar.
Both the trigger point indicator and level bar are displayed from the Display
menu. See Set Display Readout Options on page 3–40 for more information.
The trigger point indicator shows position. It can be positioned horizontally off
screen, especially with long record length settings. The trigger level bar shows
only the trigger level. It remains on screen, regardless of the horizontal position,
as long as the channel providing the trigger source is displayed.
Trigger Status Screen. To see a more comprehensive status listing of the settings
for the main and delayed trigger systems, press SHIFT STATUS ➞ STA-
TUS (main) ➞ Trigger (side).
3–71
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Trigger Position Relative to the
Display and Waveform Record
Trigger Point Indicator
Indicating the Trigger Position
on the Waveform Record
Trigger Bar Indicating the Trigger
Level on the Waveform Record
Figure 3–37: Record View, Trigger Position, and Trigger Level Bar Readouts
Trigger Menu
Each trigger type (edge, logic, and pulse) has its own main trigger menu, which
is described as each type is discussed in this section. To select the trigger type,
press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Edge, Logic, or Pulse (pop-up).
Triggering on a Waveform Edge
The TDS Oscilloscope can trigger on an edge of a waveform. An edge trigger
event occurs when the trigger source passes through a specified voltage level in a
specified direction (the trigger slope). You will likely use edge triggering for
most of your measurements. This subsection describes how use edge trigger-
ing — how to select edge type, source, coupling, slope, and level. It also details
how to select trigger mode, auto or normal, for all trigger types.
To Check Edge
Trigger Status
To quickly check if edge triggers are selected, check the Trigger readout. When
edge triggers are selected, the trigger readout displays the trigger source, as well
as the trigger slope and level. (See Figure 3–38.)
3–72
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Main Trigger
Slope = Rising Edge
Main Trigger
Source = Ch 1
Main Time Base Time/Div
Main Time Base
Main Trigger
Level
Figure 3–38: Edge Trigger Readouts
To Select Edge Triggering
Use the edge trigger menu to select edge triggering and to perform the proce-
dures for source, coupling, slope, trigger level, mode, and holdoff that follow.
To bring up the Edge Trigger menu, press TRIGGER MENU ➞
Type (main) ➞ Edge (pop-up). (See Figure 3–39.)
Figure 3–39: Main Trigger Menu — Edge Type
3–73
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
To Select a Source
To select which source you want for the trigger:
Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Edge (pop-up) ➞
Source (main) ➞ Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, Ch4, AC Line, or DC Aux (side).
To Specify Coupling
To select the coupling you want, press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞
Edge (pop-up) ➞ Coupling (main) ➞ DC, AC, HF Rej, LF Rej, or Noise Rej
(side).
DC passes all of the input signal. In other words, it passes both AC and DC
components to the trigger circuit.
AC passes only the alternating components of an input signal. It removes the DC
component from the trigger signal.
HF Rej removes the high frequency portion of the triggering signal. That allows
only the low frequency components to pass on to the triggering system to start an
acquisition. High frequency rejection attenuates signals above 30 kHz.
LF Rej removes the low frequency portion of the triggering signal. Low
frequency rejection attenuates signals below 80 kHz.
Noise Rej provides lower sensitivity. Noise Rej requires additional signal
amplitude for stable triggering, reducing the chance of falsely triggering on
noise.
NOTE. When you select Line as the trigger source, the oscilloscope uses AC
coupling to couple a sample of the AC line voltage to the trigger circuits.
Although trigger coupling can be set to other than AC when in Line, the
oscilloscope ignores the setting until another source (one of Ch1 through Ch4) is
selected.
In similar fashion, when you select DC Aux (Rear Panel) as the trigger source,
the oscilloscope uses DC coupling to couple an auxiliary signal to the trigger
circuits. Although trigger coupling can be set to other than DC when in DC Aux,
the oscilloscope ignores the setting until one of Ch1 through Ch4 is selected.
3–74
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
To Set Mode & Holdoff
You can change the holdoff time and select the trigger mode using this menu
item. See Trigger Modes and Trigger Holdoff beginning on page 3–65 for a
description of these features. To set mode and holdoff, do the following steps:
1. Press the TRIGGER MENU ➞ Mode & Holdoff (main) ➞ Auto or
Normal (side). The modes operate as follows:
H
In Auto mode the oscilloscope acquires a waveform after a specific time has
elapsed even if a trigger does not occur. The amount of time the oscilloscope
waits depends on the time base setting.
H
In Normal mode the oscilloscope acquires a waveform only if there is a valid
trigger.
2. To change the holdoff time, press Holdoff (side). Enter the value in time
using the general purpose knob or the keypad.
If you want to enter a large number using the general purpose knob, press the
SHIFT button before turning the knob. When the light above the SHIFT button
is on and the display says Coarse Knobs in the upper right corner, the general
purpose knob speeds up significantly.
You can set holdoff from 250 ns (minimum holdoff available) to 12 seconds
(maximum available). See Holdoff, Variable, Main Trigger in the TDS 500C,
TDS 600B, & TDS 700C Oscilloscopes Performance Verification and Specifica-
tions manual for typical minimum and maximum values.
3. To change to the factory default holdoff setting for the current horizontal
scale setting, press Default Holdoff (side).
NOTE. If you select Default Holdoff, the default holdoff time will vary with the
horizontal scale setting to maintain a good value for general purpose triggering
at that scale. However, if you select Holdoff (as opposed to Default Holdoff), the
time set in the Holdoff menu item is used at all horizontal scale settings.
To Set Slope
To select the slope that the edge trigger will occur on:
1. Press the TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Edge (pop-up) ➞
Slope (main).
3–75
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
2. Select the rising or falling edge from the side menu.
To Set Level
Press the TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Edge (pop-up) ➞
Level (main) ➞ Level, Set to TTL, Set to ECL, or Set to 50% (side).
Level lets you enter the trigger level using the general purpose knob or the
keypad.
Set to TTL fixes the trigger level at +1.4 V.
Set to ECL fixes the trigger level at –1.3 V.
NOTE. When you set the volts/div smaller than 200 mV, the oscilloscope reduces
the Set to TTL or Set to ECL trigger levels below standard TTL and ECL levels.
This reduction occurs because the trigger level range is fixed at ±12 divisions
from the center. At 100 mV (the next smaller setting after 200 mV) the trigger
range is ±1.2 V, which is smaller than the typical TTL (+1.4 V) or ECL (–1.3 V)
level.
Set to 50% fixes the trigger level to approximately 50% of the peak-to-peak
value of the trigger source signal.
Triggering Based on Logic
The TDS Oscilloscope can trigger on a logic or binary pattern and on the state of
a logic pattern at the time it is clocked. It can also trigger on data that violates
setup and hold times relative to a clock. This subsection describes how to use
these three classes of logic triggering: pattern, state, and setup/hold.
A pattern trigger occurs when the logic inputs to the logic function you select
cause the function to become TRUE (or at your option FALSE). When you use a
pattern trigger, you define:
H
The precondition for each logic input — logic high, low, or do not care (the
logic inputs are channels 1, 2, 3, and 4)
3–76
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
H
H
The Boolean logic function — select from AND, NAND, OR, and NOR
The condition for triggering — whether the trigger occurs when the Boolean
function becomes TRUE (logic high) or FALSE (logic low), and whether the
TRUE condition is time qualified
A state trigger occurs when the logic inputs to the logic function cause the
function to be TRUE (or at your option FALSE) at the time the clock input
changes state. When you use a state trigger, you define:
H
H
H
The precondition for each logic input, channels 1, 2, and 3
The direction of the state change for the clock input, channel 4
The Boolean logic function — select from clocked AND, NAND, OR, and
NOR
H
The condition for triggering — whether the trigger occurs when the Boolean
function becomes TRUE (logic high) or FALSE (logic low)
A setup/hold trigger occurs when a logic input changes state inside of the setup and
hold times relative to the clock. When you use setup/hold triggering, you define:
H
The channel containing the logic input (the data source) and the channel
containing the clock (the clock source)
H
H
The direction of the clock edge to use
The clocking level and data level that the oscilloscope uses to determine if a
clock or data transition has occurred
H
The setup and hold times that together define a time range relative to the clock
Pattern and State Classes
Pattern and state triggers apply boolean logic functions to the logic inputs.
Table 3–6 defines these four logic functions.
For pattern triggering, the oscilloscope waits until the end of trigger holdoff and
then samples the inputs from all the channels. The oscilloscope then triggers if
the conditions defined in Table 3–6 are met. (Goes TRUE or Goes FALSE must
be set in the Trigger When menu. The other settings in that menu are described
in To Define a Time Qualified Pattern Trigger on page 3–83.)
3–77
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
For state triggering, the oscilloscope waits until the end of trigger holdoff and
then waits until the edge of channel 4 transitions in the specified direction. At
that point, the oscilloscope samples the inputs from the other channels and
triggers if the conditions defined in Table 3–6 are met.
Table 3–6: Pattern and State Logic
1, 2
Pattern
State
Definition
AND
NAND
OR
Clocked AND
Clocked NAND
Clocked OR
If all the preconditions selected for the
logic inputs are TRUE, then the
oscilloscope triggers.
3
If not all of the preconditions selected
3
for the logic inputs are TRUE, then the
oscilloscope triggers.
If any of the preconditions selected for
3
the logic inputs are TRUE, then the
oscilloscope triggers.
NOR
Clocked NOR
If none of the preconditions selected for
the logic inputs are TRUE, then the
3
oscilloscope triggers.
1
Note that for state class triggers, the definition must be met at the time the clock
input changes state.
2
3
The definitions given here are correct for the Goes TRUE setting in the Trigger When
menu. If that menu is set to Goes False, swap the definition for AND with that for
NAND and for OR with NOR for both pattern and state classes.
The logic inputs are channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 when using pattern logic triggers. For
State Logic Triggers, channel 4 becomes the clock input, leaving the remaining
channels as logic inputs.
Setup and Hold Class
Setup/hold triggering uses the setup and hold times to define a “setup/hold
violation zone” relative to the clock. Data that changes state within this zone
triggers the oscilloscope. Figure 3–40 shows how the setup and hold times you
choose positions this zone relative to the clock.
3–78
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Setup/hold triggering uses the setup/hold violation zone to detect when data is
unstable too near the time it is clocked. Each time trigger holdoff ends, the
oscilloscope monitors the data and clock sources. When a clock edge occurs, the
oscilloscope checks the data stream it is processing (from the data source) for
transitions occurring within the setup/hold violation zone. If any occur, the
oscilloscope triggers with the trigger point located at the clock edge.
Positive settings for both setup and hold times (the most common application)
locate the setup/hold violation zone so it spans the clocking edge. (See the top
waveform in Figure 3–40.) The oscilloscope detects and triggers on data that
does not become stable long enough before the clock (setup time violation) or
that does not stay stable long enough after the clock (hold time violation).
Negative settings for setup or hold times skew the setup/hold violation zone to
locate it before or after the clocking edge. (See the bottom and center waveforms
of Figure 3–40.) The oscilloscope can then detect and trigger on violations of a
time range that occurs before or one that occurs after the clock.
NOTE. Keep hold time to at least 2 ns less than the clock period or the oscillo-
scope cannot trigger.
To Check Logic
Trigger Status
To quickly check if logic triggers are selected and if so, what class, check the
Trigger readout. When logic triggers are selected, the trigger readout displays the
selected logic trigger class: Pattern, State, or StlHld (Setup/Hold). (See
Figure 3–41.)
3–79
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Setup/Hold
Violation
Zone
T = Setup Time
T = Hold Time
H
S
Setup/Hold Violation Zone = T + T
S
H
+T
+T
H
S
T + T must be w +2 ns
S
H
Clock Level
Clock Signal
Setup/Hold
Violation
Zone
–T
S
+T
H
Clock Level
Clock Signal
Setup/Hold
Violation
Zone
–T
H
+T
S
Clock Level
Clock Signal
Positive T ; Negative T Negative T Positive T
H
S
H
S;
Figure 3–40: Violation Zones for Setup/Hold Triggering
3–80
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Ch 1, 2, 3 Inputs = High, Don’t Care, Don’t Care
Ch 4 Input = Rising Edge
Logic = OR
Trigger Class = State
Figure 3–41: Logic Trigger Readouts — State Class Selected
NOTE. When the trigger type Logic is selected, the trigger levels must be set for
each channel individually in the Set Thresholds menu (pattern and state classes)
or the Levels (setup/hold class) menu. Therefore, the Trigger Level readout will
disappear on the display and the Trigger Level knob can be used to set the
selected level while the Main Trigger menu is set to Logic.
To Trigger on a Pattern
When you select the logic class Pattern, the oscilloscope will trigger on a
specified logic combination of the four input channels. (Pages 3–76 through
3–78 describe how pattern triggers work.) To use pattern triggering, do the
procedures that follow:
Select Pattern Triggering. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Logic
(pop-up) ➞ Class (main) ➞ Pattern (pop-up).
3–81
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Figure 3–42: Logic Trigger Menu
To Define Pattern Inputs. To set the logic state for each of the input channels
(Ch1, Ch2, ...):
1. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Logic (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ Pattern (pop-up) ➞ Define Inputs (main) ➞ Ch1, Ch2,
Ch3, or Ch4 (side).
2. Repeatedly press each input selected in step 1 to choose either High (H),
Low (L), or Don’t Care (X) for each channel (see Figure 3–42).
To Set Thresholds. To set the logic threshold for each channel:
1. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Logic (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ Pattern (pop-up) ➞ Set Thresholds (main) ➞ Ch1, Ch2,
Ch3, or Ch4 (side).
2. Use the MAIN TRIGGER LEVEL knob, the general purpose knob, or the
keypad to set each threshold.
3–82
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
To Define the Logic. To choose the logic function you want applied to the input
channels (see page 3–77 for definitions of the logic functions for both pattern
and state triggers):
Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Logic (pop-up) ➞ Class (main) ➞
Pattern (pop-up) ➞ Define Logic (main) ➞ AND, OR, NAND, or NOR (side).
Set Trigger When. To choose to trigger when the logic condition is met (Goes
TRUE) or when the logic condition is not met (Goes FALSE), do the following
step:
Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Logic (pop-up) ➞ Class (main) ➞
Pattern (pop-up) ➞ Trigger When (main) ➞ Goes TRUE or Goes FALSE
(side).
The side menu items TRUE for less than and TRUE for greater than are used to
time qualify a pattern trigger. See the procedure Define a Time Qualified Pattern
Trigger that follows for instructions.
To Set Mode and Holdoff. Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger
types and classes. To set mode and holdoff, refer to To Set Mode & Holdoff on
page 3–75. To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff, see the descriptions
Trigger Modes and Trigger Holdoff on page 3–65.
To Define a Time Qualified
Pattern Trigger
You can also time qualify a pattern logic trigger. That is, you specify a time that
the boolean logic function (AND, NAND, OR, or NOR) must be TRUE (logic
high). To specify the time limit as well as the type of time qualification (greater
or less than the time limit specified) for a pattern trigger, do the following steps:
1. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Logic (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ Pattern (pop-up) ➞ Trigger When (main) ➞ TRUE for
less than or TRUE for more than (side).
2. Use the knob and keypad to set the time in the side menu.
When you select TRUE for less than and specify a time, the input conditions you
specify must drive the logic function high (TRUE) for less than the time you
specify. Conversely, the TRUE for more than menu item requires the boolean
function to be TRUE for longer than the time you specify.
3–83
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Note the position of the trigger indicator in Figure 3–43. Triggering occurs at the
point that the oscilloscope determines that the logic function you specify is
TRUE within the time you specify. The oscilloscope determines the trigger point
in the following manner:
H
H
H
It waits for the logic condition to become TRUE.
It starts timing and waits for the logic function to become FALSE.
It compares the times and, if the time TRUE is longer (for TRUE for more
than) or shorter (for TRUE for less than), then it triggers a waveform display
at the point the logic condition became FALSE. This time can be, and usually
is, different from the time set for TRUE for more than or TRUE for less
than.
In Figure 3–43, the delay between the vertical bar cursors is the time the logic
function is TRUE. Since this time is more (216 ms) than that set in the TRUE for
more than menu item (150 ms), the oscilloscope issues the trigger at that point,
not at the point at which it has been TRUE for 150 ms.
Time Logic Function is TRUE
Logic Function (AND) Becomes TRUE
Logic Function Becomes FALSE and
Triggers Acquisition
Time Logic Function Must be TRUE
Figure 3–43: Logic Trigger Menu — Time Qualified TRUE
3–84
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
To State Trigger
When you select the logic class State, the oscilloscope uses channel 4 as a clock
and triggers on a logic circuit made from the rest of the channels (pages 3–76
through 3–78 describe how state triggers work). To use state triggering, do the
following procedures.
Select State Triggering. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Logic
(pop-up) ➞ Class (main) ➞ State (pop-up).
Define Inputs. To set the logic state for each of the input channels (Ch1, Ch2, ...):
1. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Logic (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ State (pop-up) ➞ Define Inputs (main).
2. Choose either High (H), Low (L), or Don’t Care (X) (side) for the first three
channels. The choices for Ch4 are rising edge and falling edge.
Set Thresholds. To set the logic threshold for each channel:
1. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Logic (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ State (pop-up) ➞ Set Thresholds (main) ➞ Ch1, Ch2,
Ch3, or Ch4 (side).
2. Use the MAIN TRIGGER LEVEL knob, the general purpose knob, or the
keypad to set each threshold.
Define Logic. To choose the type of logic function you want applied to the input
channels:
Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Logic (pop-up) ➞ Class (main) ➞
State (pop-up) ➞ Define Logic (main) ➞ AND, OR, NAND, or NOR (side).
Set Trigger When. To choose to trigger when the logic condition is met (Goes
TRUE) or when the logic condition is not met (Goes FALSE):
Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Logic (pop-up) ➞ Class (main) ➞
State (pop-up) ➞ Trigger When (main) ➞ Goes TRUE or Goes FALSE (side).
3–85
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
To Set Mode and Holdoff. Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger
types and classes. To set mode and holdoff, refer to To Set Mode & Holdoff on
page 3–75. To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff, see the descriptions
Trigger Modes and Trigger Holdoff on page 3–65.
To Trigger on Setup/
Hold Time Violations
When you select the logic class Setup/Hold, the oscilloscope uses one channel as
a data channel (the factory default setting is Ch1), another channel as a clock
channel (default is Ch2), and triggers if the data transitions within the setup or
hold time of the clock. (Pages 3–77 and 3–78 describe how setup/hold triggers
work). To use setup and hold triggering, do the following procedures.
Select Setup/Hold Triggering. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Logic
(pop-up) ➞ Class (main) ➞ Setup/Hold (pop-up).
Define the Data Source. To select the channel that is to contain the data signal:
1. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Logic (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ Setup/Hold (pop-up) ➞ Data Source (main).
2. Press any one of Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, or Ch4 (side). Do not select the same
channel for both the data and clock sources.
Define the Clock Source and Edge. To select the channel that is to contain the
clock signal and the edge to use to clock:
1. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Logic (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ Setup/Hold (pop-up) ➞ Clock Source (main) ➞ Ch1,
Ch2, Ch3, or Ch4 (side).
2. Press any one of Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, or Ch4 (side). Do not select the same
channel that you selected for the clock source.
3. Press Clock Edge (side) to toggle between the rising and falling edges.
3–86
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Set the Data and Clock Levels. To set the transition levels that the clock and data
must cross to be recognized by the oscilloscope:
1. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Logic (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ Setup/Hold (pop-up) ➞ Levels (main) ➞ Clock Level or
Data Level (side).
2. Turn the general purpose knob or use the keypad to set values for the clock
level and for the data level you select.
If you prefer, you can set both clock levels to a value appropriate to either of two
logic families. To do so:
3. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Logic (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ Setup/Hold (pop-up) ➞ Levels (main) ➞ Set Both to TTL
or Set Both to ECL (side).
The oscilloscope uses the clock level you set to determine when a clock edge
(rising or falling, depending on which you select) occurs. The oscilloscope uses
the point the clock crosses the clock level as the reference point from which it
measures setup and hold time settings.
Set the Setup and Hold Times. To set the setup time and the hold time relative to
the clock:
1. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Logic (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ Setup/Hold (pop-up) ➞ Set/Hold Times (main) ➞ Setup
Time or Hold Time (side). See Figure 3–44.
2. Turn the general purpose knob or use the keypad to set values for the setup
and for the hold times.
NOTE. See Setup/Hold Time Violation Trigger Minimum Clock Pulse Widths
specification in the Performance Verification and Specifications manual for valid
setup and hold times.
Positive setup time always leads the clock edge; positive hold time always
follows the clocking edge. Setup time always leads the hold time by at least 2 ns
(TS + TH ≥ 2 ns). Attempting to set either time to reduce the 2 ns limit adjusts the
other time to maintain the limit.
3–87
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Cursors measure the setup/hold
violation zone which equals setup
time + hold time (30 ns).
Data (Ch1) transition occurs
within ] 10 ns after the clock
violating hold time limit.
The oscilloscope recognizes the
violation and triggers at the clock edge.
Figure 3–44: Triggering on a Setup/Hold Time Violation
In most cases, you will enter positive values for both setup and hold time.
Positive values set the oscilloscope to trigger if the data source is still settling
inside the setup time before the clock or if it switches inside the hold time after
the clock. You can skew this “setup/hold violation zone” that the setup and hold
times form by entering negative values. See Figure 3–40 on page 3–80.
To Set Mode and Holdoff. Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger
types and classes. To set mode and holdoff, refer to To Set Mode & Holdoff on
page 3–75. To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff, see the descriptions
Trigger Modes and Trigger Holdoff on page 3–65.
3–88
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Triggering on Pulses
The TDS Oscilloscope can trigger on glitch or runt pulses, or it can trigger based
on the width, slew rate, or timeout period of a pulse. These capabilities make the
oscilloscope suitable for such tasks as unattended monitoring for, and capturing
of, a power supply glitch or GO/NO GO slew rate testing of operational
amplifiers. This subsection describes how to use each of the five classes of pulse
triggers: glitch, runt, width, and slew rate, and timeout triggering.
A glitch trigger occurs when the trigger source detects a pulse narrower (or
wider) in width than some specified time. It can trigger on glitches of either
polarity. Or you can set the glitch trigger to reject glitches of either polarity.
A runt trigger occurs when the trigger source detects a short pulse that crosses
one threshold but fails to cross a second threshold before recrossing the first. You
can set the oscilloscope to detect positive or negative runt pulses.
A width trigger occurs when the trigger source detects a pulse that is inside or,
optionally, outside some specified time range (defined by the upper limit and
lower limit). The oscilloscope can trigger on positive or negative width pulses.
A slew rate trigger occurs when the trigger source detects a pulse edge that
traverses (slews) between two amplitude levels at a rate faster than or slower
than you specify. The oscilloscope can trigger on positive or negative slew rates.
You can also think of slew rate triggering as triggering based on the slope
(change in voltage/change in time) of a pulse edge.
A timeout trigger occurs when the trigger source does not detect a pulse edge
when it expected to.
Figure 3–45 shows the pulse trigger readout. Table 3–7, on page 3–90, describes
the choices for pulse triggers.
3–89
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Trigger Class = Runt
Figure 3–45: Pulse Trigger Readouts
Table 3–7: Pulse trigger definitions
Name
Definition
Glitch positive
Glitch negative
Glitch either
Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects positive spike
widths less than the specified glitch time.
Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects negative spike
widths less than the specified glitch time.
Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects positive or
negative widths less than the specified glitch time.
Runt positive
Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects a positive pulse
that crosses one threshold going positive but fails to cross a
second threshold before recrossing the first going negative.
Runt negative
Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects a negative
going pulse that crosses one threshold going negative but
fails to cross a second threshold before recrossing the first
going positive.
Runt either
Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects a positive or
negative going pulse that crosses one threshold but fails to
cross a second threshold before recrossing the first.
Width positive
Width negative
Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope finds a positive pulse
with a width between, or optionally outside, the user-speci-
fied lower and upper time limits.
Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope finds a negative pulse
with a width between, or optionally outside, the user-speci-
fied lower and upper time limits.
3–90
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Table 3–7: Pulse trigger definitions (cont.)
Name
Definition
Slew positive
Slew negative
Slew either
Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects a positive
pulse edge that after first crossing the lower threshold then
crosses the upper threshold. The pulse must travel
between the two levels at a rate faster or slower than (user
specifies) the user-specified slew rate for triggering to
occur.
Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects a negative
pulse edge that after first crossing the upper threshold then
crosses the lower threshold. The pulse must travel between
the two levels at a rate faster or slower than (user
specifies) the user-specified slew rate for triggering to
occur.
Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects a positive or
negative pulse edge that first crosses one threshold and
then crosses the other threshold. The pulse must travel
between the two levels at a rate faster or slower than (user
specifies) the user-specified slew rate for triggering to
occur.
Timeout stays high
Timeout stays low
Timeout either
Triggering occurs if the signal stays higher than the trigger
level for longer than the timeout value.
Triggering occurs if the signal stays lower than the trigger
level for longer than the timeout value.
Triggering occurs if the signal stays higher or stays lower
than the trigger level for the timeout value.
To Trigger on a Glitch
When you select the pulse class Glitch, the oscilloscope will trigger on a pulse
narrower (or wider) in width than some specified time. To set up for glitch
triggering, do the following procedures.
Select Glitch Triggering. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse
(pop-up) ➞ Class (main) ➞ Glitch (pop-up).
3–91
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Figure 3–46: Main Trigger Menu — Glitch Class
Select the Source. To specify which channel becomes the pulse trigger source:
Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse (pop-up) ➞
Source (main) ➞ Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, or Ch4 (side). The source selected becomes
the trigger source for all four trigger classes.
Select the Polarity & Width. To specify polarity (positive, negative, or either) and
width of the glitch, do the following steps:
1. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse (pop-up) ➞ Polarity &
Width (main) ➞ Positive, Negative, or Either (side).
Positive looks at positive-going pulses.
Negative looks at negative-going pulses.
Either looks at both positive and negative pulses.
2. Press Width (side), and set the glitch width using the general purpose knob
or keypad.
3–92
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Set to Accept or Reject Glitch. To specify whether to trigger on glitches or ignore
glitches, press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ Glitch (pop-up) ➞ Glitch (main) ➞ Accept Glitch or Reject
Glitch (side).
If you choose Accept Glitch, the oscilloscope will trigger only on pulses
narrower than the width you specified. If you select Reject Glitch, it will trigger
only on pulses wider than the specified width.
Set the Level. To set the trigger level with the Level main menu (or the front
panel trigger LEVEL knob), press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse
(pop-up) ➞ Level (main) ➞ Level, Set to TTL, Set to ECL, or Set to 50%
(side).
H
H
H
H
If you select Level, you set the trigger level by entering a value with the
general purpose knob or the keypad.
If you select Set to TTL, the oscilloscope sets the trigger level to the TTL
switching threshold.
If you select Set to ECL, the oscilloscope sets the trigger level to the ECL
switching threshold.
If you select Set to 50%, the oscilloscope searches for the point halfway
between the peaks of the trigger source signal and sets the trigger level to
that point.
To Set Mode and Holdoff. Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger
types and classes. To set mode and holdoff, refer to To Set Mode & Holdoff on
page 3–75. To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff, see the descriptions
Trigger Modes and Trigger Holdoff on page 3–65.
To Trigger on a Runt Pulse
When you select the pulse class Runt, the oscilloscope will trigger on a short
pulse that crosses one threshold but fails to cross a second threshold before
recrossing the first. To set up for runt triggering, do the following procedures.
Select Runt Triggering. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse
(pop-up) ➞ Class (main) ➞ Runt (pop-up). (See Figure 3–47.)
3–93
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Select the Source. To specify which channel becomes the pulse trigger source:
Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse (pop-up) ➞
Source (main) ➞ Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, or Ch4 (side). The source selected becomes
the trigger source for all four trigger classes.
Select the Polarity. To specify the direction of the runt pulse:
Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse (pop-up) ➞ Class (main) ➞
Runt (pop-up) ➞ Polarity (main) ➞ Positive, Negative, or Either (side).
Positive looks for positive-going runt pulses.
Negative looks for negative-going runt pulses.
Either looks for both positive and negative runt pulses.
Set to Trig When. To determine how wide a runt pulse the oscilloscope will
trigger on:
1. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ Runt (pop-up) ➞ Trig When (main).
2. Press Occurs to trigger on all runt pulses regardless of width.
3. Press Runt is Wider Than (side) to trigger only on runt pulses that exceed
the width you set. Enter the width using the general purpose knob or keypad.
Set the Thresholds. To set the two threshold levels used in detecting a runt pulse:
1. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ Runt (pop-up) ➞ Thresholds (main).
2. Use the general purpose knob or keypad to set the values for the high and
low thresholds.
Hint: To use the Trigger Bar feature to set the threshold levels on the pulse
train, press DISPLAY ➞ Readout Options (main) ➞ Trigger Bar Style
(side) until Long appears in that menu item.
3–94
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Selected trigger bar at
upper threshold.
Unselected trigger bar at lower
threshold.
Runt Pulse Crosses First Threshold
Only, Recrosses First Threshold
Level, and Triggers Acquisition
Figure 3–47: Main Trigger Menu — Runt Class
Note the position of the trigger indicator in Figure 3–47. Triggering occurs at the
point the pulse returns over the first (lower) threshold going negative without
crossing the second threshold level (upper). The polarity selected in the Polarity
side menu determines the order that the threshold must be crossed for a runt
trigger to occur:
Positive requires that the lower threshold must be first crossed going positive,
then recrossed going negative without the upper threshold being crossed at all.
Negative requires that the upper threshold must be first crossed going negative,
then recrossed going positive without the lower threshold being crossed at all.
Either requires only that either one of the thresholds must be first crossed going
in either direction, then recrossed going in the opposite direction without the
other threshold being crossed at all.
For all three polarity settings, triggering occurs at the point the runt pulse
recrosses its first threshold.
3–95
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Set the Mode and Holdoff. Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger
types and classes. To set mode and holdoff, refer to Set Mode & Holdoff on
page 3–75. To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff, see Trigger Modes
and Trigger Holdoff on page 3–65.
Trigger Based on
Pulse Width
When you select the pulse class Width, the oscilloscope will trigger on a pulse
narrower (or wider) than some specified range of time (defined by the upper
limit and lower limit). To set up for width triggering, do the following proce-
dures.
Select Width Triggering. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse
(pop-up) ➞ Class (main) ➞ Width (pop-up).
Select the Source. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse
(pop-up) ➞ Source (main) ➞ Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, or Ch4 (side). The source
selected becomes the trigger source for all four trigger classes.
Select the Polarity. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse
(pop-up) ➞ Class (main) ➞ Width (pop-up) ➞ Polarity (main) ➞ Positive or
Negative (side).
Set to Trig When. To set the range of widths (in units of time) the trigger source
will search for and to specify whether to trigger on pulses that are outside this
range or within this range, do the following steps:
1. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ Width (pop-up) ➞ Trig When (main).
2. Press Within Limits (side) if you want the oscilloscope to trigger on pulses
that fall within the specified range. If you want it to trigger on pulses that are
outside the range, then press Out of Limits (side).
3–96
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
3. To set the range of pulse widths in units of time, press Upper Limit (side)
and Lower Limit (side). Enter the values with the general purpose knob or
keypad. The Upper Limit is the maximum valid pulse width the trigger
source will look for. The Lower Limit is the minimum valid pulse width.
The oscilloscope will always force the Lower Limit to be less than or equal
to the Upper Limit.
Set the Level . Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ Width (pop-up) ➞ Level (main) ➞ Level, Set to TTL, Set to
ECL, or Set to 50% (side).
Set the Mode and Holdoff. Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger
types and classes. To set mode and holdoff, refer to Set Mode & Holdoff on
page 3–75. To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff, see Trigger Modes
and Trigger Holdoff on page 3–65.
To Trigger Based
on Slew Rate
When you select the pulse class Slew Rate, the oscilloscope will trigger on a
pulse edge that traverses between an upper and lower threshold faster or slower
than a slew rate you specify. To set up for slew rate triggering, do the following
procedures.
Select Slew Rate Triggering. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse
(pop-up) ➞ Class (main) ➞ Slew Rate (pop-up). (See Figure 3–48 on
page 3–100.)
Select the Source. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse
(pop-up) ➞ Source (main) ➞ Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, or Ch4 (side). The source
selected becomes the trigger source for all four trigger classes.
Select Polarity. To specify the direction of the pulse edge, press TRIGGER
MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse (pop-up) ➞ Class (main) ➞ Slew Rate
(pop-up) ➞ Polarity (main) ➞ Positive, Negative, or Either (side).
Positive monitors the slew rate of the positive-going edges of pulses. The edge
must first cross the lower threshold and then cross the upper threshold.
3–97
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Negative monitors the slew rate of the negative-going edges of pulses. The edge
must first cross the upper threshold and then cross the lower threshold.
Either monitors positive- and negative-going edges of pulses. The edge may
first cross either threshold and then cross the other.
Set the Slew Rate. The threshold levels and the delta time setting determine the
slew rate setting. To set these parameters:
1. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ Slew Rate (pop-up) ➞ Thresholds (main).
2. Press Set to TTL or Set to ECL (side) to set the upper and lower thresholds
to levels appropriate for those to logic families. ...OR...
3. Press the upper threshold button and, in turn, lower threshold button (side)
Use the general purpose knob or keypad to set the values for the high and
low thresholds.
Hint: To use the Trigger Bar feature to set the threshold levels on the pulse
edge, press DISPLAY ➞ Readout Options (main) ➞ Trigger Bar Style
(side) until Long appears in that menu item.
The threshold settings determine the voltage component of slew rate (Volts/Se-
cond). To finish specifying the slew rate, set the time component by doing the
following steps:
4. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ Slew Rate (pop-up) ➞ Trigger When (main) ➞ Delta
Time (side).
5. Use the general purpose knob or keypad to set the delta time value for slew
rate.
NOTE. The menu item Slew Rate in the side menu is not a button label; rather it
is a readout of the slew rate setting. This readout varies as you vary the Delta
Time setting this side menu and as you vary either of the threshold settings from
the Thresholds menu. You adjust those parameters to adjust slew rate; you can’t
adjust slew rate directly.
3–98
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Set to Trig When. The oscilloscope compares the pulse edge of the trigger source
against the slew rate setting read out in the Trigger When menu. To select
whether to trigger on edges with slew rates faster than or slower than that
indicated in readout, do the following step:
Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse (pop-up) ➞ Class (main) ➞
Slew Rate (pop-up) ➞ Trigger When (main) ➞ Trigger if Faster Than or
Trigger if Slower Than (side). (See Figure 3–48.)
NOTE. If you select Trigger if Faster Than and the oscilloscope does not trigger,
it may be because the pulse edge is too fast rather than too slow. To check the
edge speed, switch to edge triggering. Then trigger on the pulse edge and
determine the time the edge takes to travel between the levels set in the slew rate
Thresholds menu. The oscilloscope cannot slew rate trigger on pulse edges that
traverse between threshold levels in 600 ps or less.
Also, to reliably slew rate trigger, a pulse must have a width of 7.5 ns or more. A
pulse of less width may trigger on the wrong slope or not trigger at all. Switch to
edge triggering and check the pulse width if you can’t slew rate trigger as
expected.
To understand what happens when you slew rate trigger, study Figure 3–48 as
you consider the following points:
H
The main menu shows the oscilloscope is set to trigger based on the slew
rate of a pulse input to the trigger source, Ch 1. It is set to monitor the
positive-polarity pulse edges of the trigger source and to trigger on any edge
with a slew rate faster than the slew rate setting.
3–99
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Cursors Measure Slew Rate
Components of Pulse Edge—dv and dt
Trigger Bar at Upper Threshold
Trigger Point at Second Crossing
Trigger Bar at Lower Threshold
Figure 3–48: Main Trigger Menu — Slew Rate Class
H
The Trigger When side menu displays the readout Slew Rate that indicates
the slew rate setting. The slew rate setting is not the slew rate of the pulse;
instead, it is the slew rate against which the oscilloscope compares the slew
rate of pulse (see above). You set the slew rate setting indirectly by setting
the ratio of delta voltage to delta time as:
UpperĂ ThresholdĂ SettingĂ ćĂ LowerĂ ThresholdĂ Setting
SlewĂ RateĂ Setting +
DeltaĂ TimeĂ Setting
Substituting the threshold and delta time settings for the setup in Fig-
ure 3–48:
4.5Ă VĂ ćĂ 0.5Ă V
250Ă ns
SlewĂ RateĂ Setting +
+Ă 16.0Ă mVńns
H
The trigger bar indicators (long horizontal bars) point to the upper and lower
thresholds. The pair cursors, which are aligned to threshold levels, read out a
delta voltage of approximately 4 V and a delta time of 200 ns between the
threshold levels. Therefore, the slew rate of the pulse edge triggered on is:
dv
dt
4Ă Volts
200Ă ns
SlewĂ RateĂ Measured +
+
+ 20Ă mVńns
3–100
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
H
H
The Trigger When side menu indicates the oscilloscope will trigger on pulses
with slew rates slower than the slew rate setting. Since the pulse edge slews
at 20 mV/ns, which is faster than the slew rate setting of 16 mV/ns, the
oscilloscope triggers.
The trigger point indicator shows where the oscilloscope triggers. For a slew
rate triggered waveform, the trigger point is always at the threshold crossed last
(the upper threshold for positive polarity settings; the lower for negative
settings).
Set the Mode and Holdoff. Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger
types and classes. To set mode and holdoff, refer to Set Mode & Holdoff on
page 3–75. To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff, see Trigger Modes
and Trigger Holdoff on page 3–65.
Trigger Based on
Pulse Timeout
When you select the pulse class Timeout, the TDS oscilloscope will trigger on a
pulse change that does NOT occur within the specified limits. That is, the trigger
will occur when, depending on the polarity you select, the signal stays higher or
stays lower than the trigger level for the timeout value. To set up for timeout
triggering, do the following procedures.
Select Timeout Triggering. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse
(pop-up) ➞ Class (main) ➞ Timeout (pop-up).
Select the Source. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse
(pop-up) ➞ Source (main) ➞ Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, or Ch4 (side). The source
selected becomes the trigger source for all four trigger classes.
Select the Polarity. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse
(pop-up) ➞ Class (main) ➞ Timeout (pop-up) ➞ Polarity (main) ➞ Stays
High, Stays Low, or Either (side).
Stays High causes a trigger to occur if the signal stays higher than the
trigger level for longer than the timeout value.
Stays Low causes a trigger to occur if the signal stays lower than the trigger
level for longer than the timeout value.
3–101
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Either causes a trigger to occur if the signal stays lower or stays higher than
the trigger level for longer than the timeout value.
Time. To set the timeout time:
1. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ Timeout (pop-up) ➞ Time (main)
2. Turn the general purpose knob or use the keypad to set values for the timeout
time.
Set the Level . Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Pulse (pop-up) ➞
Class (main) ➞ Timeout (pop-up) ➞ Level (main) ➞ Level, Set to TTL, Set to
ECL, or Set to 50% (side).
H
H
H
H
If you select Level, you set the trigger level by entering a value with the
general purpose knob or the keypad.
If you select Set to TTL, the oscilloscope sets the trigger level to the TTL
switching threshold.
If you select Set to ECL, the oscilloscope sets the trigger level to the ECL
switching threshold.
If you select Set to 50%, the oscilloscope searches for the point halfway
between the peaks of the trigger source signal and sets the trigger level to
that point.
Set the Mode and Holdoff. Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger
types and classes. To set mode and holdoff, refer to Set Mode & Holdoff on
page 3–75. To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff, see Trigger Modes
and Trigger Holdoff on page 3–65.
3–102
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Communications Triggering
The TDS Oscilloscope can trigger on communication signals (option 2C only).
Table 3–8 lists the available standards, codes, and bit rates. This section
describes how to use Comm triggering — how to select the Source, Code, bit
rate, telecom Standard, Pulse Form, Level or Threshold, and Mode and Holdoff.
NOTE. To function properly, Comm triggers force some oscilloscope modes and
settings to new values. Also, selecting a mask from the MEASURE menu selects
the Comm trigger settings for that mask. However, selecting a Comm trigger
does not select a mask.
Table 3–8: Comm triggers
1
Standard Name
OC1/STM0
OC3/STM1
OC12/STM4
DS0 Sgl
DS0 Dbl
DS0 Data Contra
DS0 Timing
E1
Code
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Masks
Masks
Masks
Masks
AMI
Bit Rate
51.84 Mb/s
155.52 Mb/s
622.08 Mb/s
64 kb/s
2
2
2
2
64 kb/s
64 kb/s
64 kb/s
2.048 Mb/s
8.44 Mb/s
34.368 Mb/s
139.26 Mb/s
565 Mb/s
E2
AMI
E3
AMI
E4
CMI
E5 (CEPT)
STM1E
DS1
NRZ
CMI
155.52 Mb/s
1.544 Mb/s
2.048 Mb/s
3.152 Mb/s
6.312 Mb/s
44.736 Mb/s
139.26 Mb/s
AMI
DS1A
AMI
DS1C
AMI
DS2
AMI
DS3
AMI
DS4NA
CMI
3–103
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Table 3–8: Comm triggers (cont.)
1
Standard Name
STS-1
Code
AMI
Bit Rate
51.84 Mb/s
155.52 Mb/s
132.8 Mb/s
265.6 Mb/s
531.2 Mb/s
1.0625 Mb/s
143.18 Mb/s
270 Mb/s
STS-3
CMI
FC133
FC266
FC531
FC1063
D2
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
D1
FDDI
125 Mb/s
1
AMI = Alternate Mark Inversion. CMI = Code Mark Inversion. NRZ = Non-return to
Zero
2
These Telecom DS0 standards are automatically selected from the Mask Menu. The
trigger uses Pulse/Width trigger.
To Select Comm
Triggering
Use the Comm trigger menu to select communications triggering and to perform
the procedures for source, code, standard, pulse form, trigger level or threshold,
mode, and holdoff that follow.
To bring up the Comm Trigger menu, press TRIGGER MENU ➞
Type (main) ➞ Comm (pop-up). (See Figure 3–49.)
To Select a Source
To select which source you want for the trigger:
Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Comm (pop-up) ➞
Source (main) ➞ Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, or Ch4 (side).
To Specify Code
To select the code, press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Comm
(pop-up) ➞ Code (main) ➞ AMI, CMI, or NRZ (pop-up).
To Set Mode & Holdoff
You can set mode and holdoff for all standard trigger types and classes. To set
mode and holdoff, refer to Set Mode & Holdoff on page 3–75. To learn more
about trigger mode and holdoff, see Trigger Modes and Trigger Holdoff on
page 3–65.
3–104
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Figure 3–49: Main Trigger Menu — Comm Type
To Select a
Communications
Standard
To select the standard and bit rate of the communication signal that triggering
will occur on:
1. Press TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Comm (pop-up) ➞ Stan-
dard (main).
2. Select an standard from the side menu. Only standards for the selected Code
are displayed. See Table 3–8 on page 3–103 for a list of the available
standards and their bit rates.
To Select a Pulse Form
To select the Pulse Form of the communication signal that triggering will occur
on:
1. Press the TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Comm (pop-up) ➞ Pulse
Form (main).
2. Select an Pulse Form from the side menu. Only pulse forms for the selected
Code are displayed. See Table 3–9 for a list of pulse forms.
3–105
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Table 3–9: Communications pulse forms
AMI
CMI
NRZ
Isolated +1
Isolated –1
Eye Diagram
Plus One
Minus One
Zero
Eye Diagram
Rise
Fall
Eye Diagram
Pattern 0-7
To Set Level or Threshold
Press the TRIGGER MENU ➞ Type (main) ➞ Comm (pop-up) ➞ Level or
Threshold (main) ➞ High, Low, Level, Set to TTL, Set to ECL, or Set to
50% (side).Only selections for the selected Code are displayed.
High lets you enter the high threshold using the general purpose knob or the
keypad.
Low lets you enter the low threshold using the general purpose knob or the
keypad.
Level lets you enter the trigger level using the general purpose knob or the
keypad.
Set to TTL fixes the trigger level at +1.4 V.
Set to ECL fixes the trigger level at –1.3 V.
Set to 50% fixes the trigger level to approximately 50% of the peak-to-peak
value of the trigger source signal. When AMI is selected, this selection measures
the peak-to-peak level and sets the upper threshold to 75% and the lower
threshold to 25%. If you select a DS0 mask the trigger level is set correctly, do
not press the front panel button SET LEVEL TO 50%.
Delayed Triggering
The TDS Oscilloscope provides a main time base and a delayed time base. The
delayed time base, like the main time base, requires a trigger signal and an input
source dedicated to that signal. You can only use delay with respect to the main
edge trigger and certain classes of main pulse triggers. This section describes
how to delay the acquisition of waveforms.
3–106
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
There are two different ways to delay the acquisition of waveforms: delayed runs
after main and delayed triggerable. Only delayed triggerable uses the delayed
trigger system. Delayed runs after main looks for a main trigger, then waits a
user-defined time, and then starts acquiring. (See Figure 3–50.)
Wait for
Main
Trigger
Wait User-specified
Time
Acquire
Data
Figure 3–50: Delayed Runs After Main
Delayed triggerable looks for a main trigger and then, depending on the type of
delayed trigger selected, makes one of the three types of delayed triggerable mode
acquisitions: After Time, After Events, or After Events/Time. Study Figure 3–51 to
understand the sequence the oscilloscope goes through for each delayed mode.
Wait for
Wait for
Main
Trigger
Delayed Triggerable
After Time
Wait User-specified
Time
Delayed
Trigger
Event
Acquire
Data
Wait the
User-specified
Number of Delayed
Trigger Events
Delayed Triggerable
After Events
Wait the
Wait
User-specified
Time
Delayed Triggerable
After Events/Time
User-specified
Number of Delayed
Trigger Events
Figure 3–51: Delayed Triggerable
The oscilloscope is always acquiring samples to fill the pretrigger part of the
waveform record. When and if delay criteria are met, it takes enough posttrigger
samples to complete the delayed waveform record and then displays it. Refer to
Figure 3–52 for a more detailed look at how delayed records are placed in time
relative to the main trigger.
3–107
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
NOTE. Due to hardware limitations, the delayed time base cannot be made
triggerable when the main trigger type is Logic, any class, or when the main
trigger type is Pulse with Runt or Slew Rate classes selected. For these settings,
the oscilloscope will force the delayed time base to be in Runs After mode.
To Run After Delay
You use the Horizontal menu to select and define either delayed runs after main
or delayed triggerable. Delayed triggerable, however, requires further selections
in the Delayed Trigger menu. Do the following steps to set the delayed time base
to run immediately after delay:
1. Press HORIZONTAL MENU ➞ Time Base (main) ➞ Delayed Only
(side) ➞ Delayed Runs After Main (side).
2. Use the general purpose knob or the keypad to set the delay time.
If you press Intensified (side), you display an intensified zone on the main
timebase record that shows where the delayed timebase record occurs
relative to the main trigger. For Delayed Runs After Main mode, the start of
the intensified zone corresponds to the start of the delayed timebase record.
The end of the zone corresponds to the end of the delayed record.
NOTE. The intensified zone is not visible when in InstaVu mode (TDS 500C and
TDS 700C models only); see Incompatible Modes on page 3–58.
To Trigger After Delay
To make sure that the Main Trigger menu settings are compatible with Delayed
Triggerable and to select that mode, do the following steps:
1. Press TRIGGER MENU.
2. If Type is set to Logic, press Type (main) to change it to either Edge or
Pulse as fits your application. Logic type is incompatible with Delayed
Triggerable.
3. If Source is set to Auxiliary, press Source (main). Select any source other
than Auxiliary from the side menu according to your application.
3–108
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Posttrigger Record
Pretrigger Record
Delayed Runs After Main
Delayed Trigger Waveform Record
Main Trigger Point
Main
Trigger
Source
Time Delay
(From Horiz Menu)
Start Posttrigger Acquisition
Delayed Triggerable By Events
Delayed Trigger Waveform Record
Main Trigger Point
Main
Trigger
Source
Delayed
Trigger
Source
Start Posttrigger Acquisition (Trigger
on nth Delayed Trigger Event)
Waiting for nth Event
(Where n=5)
Delayed Triggerable By Time
Delayed Trigger Waveform Record
Main Trigger Point
Main
Trigger
Source
Delayed
Trigger
Source
Time Delay
Start Posttrigger Acquisition
(First Trigger After Delay)
(From Delay Trig Menu)
Delayed Triggerable By Events/Time
Delayed Trigger Waveform Record
Main Trigger Point
Main
Trigger
Source
Delayed
Trigger
Source
Time Delay
(From Delay Trig Menu)
Start Posttrigger Acquisition
Waiting for nth Event
(Where n=4)
Figure 3–52: How the Delayed Triggers Work
3–109
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
4. If Type is set to Pulse, press Class (main) and change it to either Glitch or
Width as fits your application. Runt and Slew Rate pulse classes are
incompatible with Delayed Triggerable.
5. Press HORIZONTAL MENU ➞ Time Base (main) ➞ Delayed Only
(side) ➞ Delayed Triggerable (side).
NOTE. The Delayed Triggerable menu item is not selectable unless incompatible
Main Trigger menu settings are eliminated. (See the steps at the beginning of
this procedure.) If such is the case, the Delayed Triggerable menu item is dimmer
than other items in the menu.
By pressing Intensified (side), you can display an intensified zone that shows
where the delayed timebase record may occur (a valid delay trigger event
must be received) relative to the main trigger on the main time base. For
Delayed Triggerable After mode, the start of the intensified zone corresponds
to the possible start point of the delayed time base record. The end of the
zone continues to the end of main time base, since a delayed time base
record may be triggered at any point after the delay time elapses.
To learn how to define the intensity level of the normal and intensified
waveform, see Adjust Intensity on page 3–40.
Now you need to bring up the Delayed Trigger menu so that you can define
the delayed trigger event.
6. Press SHIFT DELAYED TRIG ➞ Delay by (main) ➞ Triggerable After
Time, Events, or Events/Time (side) (See Figure 3–53.)
7. Enter the delay time or events using the general purpose knob or the keypad.
If you selected Events/Time, use Time (side) and Events (side) to switch
between setting the time and the number of events.
Hint: You can go directly to the Delayed Trigger menu. (See step 6.) By
selecting one of Triggerable After Time, Events, or Events/Time, the
oscilloscope automatically switches to Delayed Triggerable in the Horizontal
menu. You will still need to display the Horizontal menu if you want to leave
Delayed Triggerable.
The Source menu lets you select which input will be the delayed trigger
source.
3–110
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
Figure 3–53: Delayed Trigger Menu
8. Press Source (main) ➞ Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, Ch4, or DC Aux (side).
NOTE. Selecting DC Aux as source in BOTH the main and delayed triggering
menus forces main and delayed trigger levels to adjust in tandem. As long as
their source remains DC Aux, adjusting the trigger level for either system adjusts
it for both systems.
9. Press Coupling (main) ➞ Main Trigger, DC, or Noise Rej (side) to define
how the input signal will be coupled to the delayed trigger.
Main Trigger sets delayed trigger coupling to match the main trigger
coupling setting. For descriptions of the DC and Noise Rej coupling types,
see To Specify Coupling on page 3–74.
10. Press Slope (main) to select the slope that the delayed trigger will occur on.
Choose between the rising edge and falling edge slopes.
When using Delayed Triggerable mode to acquire waveforms, two trigger
bars are displayed. One trigger bar indicates the level set by the main trigger
system; the other indicates the level set by the delayed trigger system.
3–111
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Triggering on Waveforms
11. Press Level (main) ➞ Level, Set to TTL, Set to ECL, or Set to 50% (side).
Level lets you enter the delayed trigger level using the general purpose knob
or the keypad.
Set to TTL fixes the trigger level at +1.4 V.
Set to ECL fixes the trigger level at –1.3 V.
Set to 50% fixes the delayed trigger level to 50% of the peak-to-peak value
of the delayed trigger source signal.
NOTE. When you set the Vertical SCALE smaller than 200 mV, the oscilloscope
reduces the Set to TTL or Set to ECL trigger levels below standard TTL and
ECL levels. That happens because the trigger level range is fixed at ±12
divisions from the center. At 100 mV (the next smaller setting after 200 mV) the
trigger range is ±1.2 V which is smaller than the typical TTL (+1.4 V) or ECL
(–1.3 V) level.
3–112
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
To make the best use of the TDS Oscilloscope when taking measurements, you
need to know how to use the five types, or classes, of measurements it can take.
This section describes how to take the following classes of measurements (Fig-
ure 3–54 shows four measurement classes):
H
H
Automated for automatically taking and displaying waveform measurements
Cursor for measuring the difference (either in time or voltage) between two
locations in a waveform record
H
H
H
Graticule for making quick estimates by counting graticule divisions on
screens
Histogram for displaying and automatically measuring how your vertical and
horizontal units vary in the histogram box
Masks for mask counting, selecting a mask, or editing a mask
This section also tells you how to use Probe Cal, Channel/Probe Deskew, and
Signal Path Compensation to optimize the accuracy of your measurements.
Histogram
box
Cursor
Readouts
Automated
Measurements
Histogram
Graticule
D: 64.0 mV
@: 32.0 mV
Ch 1
Frequency
100 MHz
Ch 1 Period
10 ns
Cursors
Figure 3–54: Histogram, Graticule, Cursor and Automated Measurements
3–113
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Taking Automated Measurements
The TDS Oscilloscope provides the feature Measure for automatically taking and
displaying waveform measurements. This section describes how to set up the
oscilloscope to let it do the work of taking measurements for you.
Because automatic measurements use the waveform record points, they are
generally more accurate and quicker than cursor and graticule measurements.
The oscilloscope will continuously update and display these measurements.
Automatic measurements are taken over the entire waveform record or, if you
specify gated measurements (see page 3–118), over the region specified by the
vertical cursors. Automated measurements are not taken just on the displayed
portions of waveforms.
The oscilloscope can also display almost all of the measurements at once — see
Take a Snapshot of Measurements on page 3–123.
Measurement List
The TDS Oscilloscope provides you with automatic measurements. Table 3–10
lists brief definitions of the automated measurements in the oscilloscope (for
more details see Appendix B: Algorithms, page B–1).
Table 3–10: Measurement definitions
Name
Definition
Amplitude
Voltage measurement. The high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or
gated region.
Amplitude = High – Low
Area
Voltage over time measurement. The area over the entire waveform or gated region in
volt-seconds. Area measured above ground is positive; area below ground is negative.
Cycle Area
Voltage over time measurement. The area over the first cycle in the waveform, or the first cycle
in the gated region, in volt-seconds. Area measured above ground is positive; area below
ground is negative.
Burst Width
Cycle Mean
Timing measurement. The duration of a burst. Measured over the entire waveform or gated
region.
Voltage measurement. The arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle
in the gated region.
3–114
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Table 3–10: Measurement definitions (cont.)
Name
Definition
Cycle RMS
Delay
Voltage measurement. The true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle in the waveform
or the first cycle in the gated region.
Timing measurement. The time between the MidRef crossings of two different traces or the
gated region of the traces.
Fall Time
Timing measurement. Time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated
region to fall from a High Ref value (default = 90%) to a Low Ref value (default =10%) of its
final value.
Frequency
High
Timing measurement for the first cycle in the waveform or gated region. The reciprocal of the
period. Measured in Hertz (Hz) where 1 Hz = 1 cycle per second.
The value used as 100% whenever High Ref, Mid Ref, and Low Ref values are needed (as in fall
time and rise time measurements). Calculated using either the min/max or the histogram method.
The min/max method uses the maximum value found. The histogram method uses the most
common value found above the mid point. Measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
Low
The value used as 0% whenever High Ref, Mid Ref, and Low Ref values are needed (as in fall
time and rise time measurements). May be calculated using either the min/max or the histogram
method. With the min/max method it is the minimum value found. With the histogram method, it
refers to the most common value found below the midpoint. Measured over the entire waveform
or gated region.
Maximum
Voltage measurement. The maximum amplitude. Typically the most positive peak voltage.
Measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
Mean
Voltage measurement. The arithmetic mean over the entire waveform or gated region.
Minimum
Voltage measurement. The minimum amplitude. Typically the most negative peak voltage.
Measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
Negative Duty Cycle
Negative Overshoot
Timing measurement of the first cycle in the waveform or gated region. The ratio of the negative
pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage.
NegativeWidth
NegativeDutyCycle +
100%
Period
Voltage measurement. Measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
Low * Min
Amplitude
NegativeOvershoot +
100%
Negative Width
Peak to Peak
Timing measurement of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region. The distance (time)
between MidRef (default 50%) amplitude points of a negative pulse.
Voltage measurement. The absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude
in the entire waveform or gated region.
3–115
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Table 3–10: Measurement definitions (cont.)
Name
Definition
Phase
Timing measurement. The amount one waveform leads or lags another in time. Expressed in
degrees, where 360_ comprise one waveform cycle.
Period
Timing measurement. Time it takes for the first complete signal cycle to happen in the waveform
or gated region. The reciprocal of frequency. Measured in seconds.
Positive Duty Cycle
Timing measurement of the first cycle in the waveform or gated region. The ratio of the positive
pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage.
PositiveWidth
PositiveDutyCycle +
100%
Period
Positive Overshoot
Voltage measurement over the entire waveform or gated region.
Max * High
Amplitude
PositiveOvershoot +
100%
Positive Width
Rise time
Timing measurement of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region. The distance (time)
between MidRef (default 50%) amplitude points of a positive pulse.
Timing measurement. Time taken for the leading edge of the first pulse in the waveform or
gated region to rise from a Low Ref value (default = 10%) to a High Ref value (default = 90%) of
its final value.
RMS
Voltage measurement. The true Root Mean Square voltage over the entire waveform or gated
region.
Extinction Ratio
Extinction %
Extinction dB
Mean dBm
Optical measurement. The value High/Low.
Optical measurement. The value (100/Extinction Ratio).
Optical measurement. The value (10*log10(Extinction Ratio)).
Optical measurement. Average optical power (10*log10(Mean/0.001)).
Measurement Readouts
With no menus displayed, the measurement readouts appear far right of the
display graticule. (See Figure 3–55.) You can display and continuously update as
many as four measurements at any one time. With any menu displayed, the
readouts move to the right side of the graticule area.
Measurement 1 is the top readout. Measurement 2 is below it, and so forth. Once
a measurement readout is displayed in the screen area, it stays in its position
even when you remove any measurement readouts above it.
3–116
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Measurement Readout Area
Figure 3–55: Measurement Readouts with Statistics
Display Measurements
To use the automatic measurements you first need to obtain a stable display of
the waveform to be measured. (Pressing AUTOSET may help.) Once you have a
stable display, perform the following steps (see Figure 3–56):
1. TDS 600B: Press MEASURE ➞ Select Measrmnt (main).
2. TDS 500C and TDS 700C: Press MEASURE ➞ Measure (pop-up) ➞
Select Measrmnt (main).
3. Select a measurement from the side menu. Note the following rules for
taking automatic measurements:
H
H
H
You can only take a maximum of four measurements at a time. To add a
fifth, you must remove one or more of the existing measurements.
To vary the source for measurements, simply select the other channel and
then choose the measurements you want.
Be careful when taking automatic measurements on noisy signals. You might
measure the frequency of the noise and not the desired waveform. Your
oscilloscope helps identify such situations by displaying a low signal
amplitude or low resolution warning message.
3–117
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Figure 3–56: Measure Menu
H
Be careful when taking automatic measurements using Extended Acquisition
mode and high levels of waveform compression. The compression may
remove signal attributes required by some measurements.
Remove Measurements
The Remove Measrmnt selection provides explicit choices for removing
measurements from the display according to their readout position. To remove
measurements, do the following steps:
1. TDS 600B: Press MEASURE ➞ Remove Measrmnt (main).
2. TDS 500C and TDS 700C: Press MEASURE ➞ Measure (pop-up) ➞
Remove Measrmnt (main).
3. Select the measurement to remove from the side menu. If you want to
remove all the measurements at one time, press All Measurements (side).
Gate Measurements
The gating feature lets you limit measurements to a specified portion of the
waveform. When gating is Off, the oscilloscope makes measurements over the
entire waveform record.
3–118
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
When gating is activated, vertical cursors are displayed. Use these cursors to
define the section of the waveform you want the oscilloscope to measure. (This
section is called the gated region.) Do the following steps to gate a measurement:
1. TDS 600B: Press MEASURE ➞ Gating (main) ➞ Gate with V Bar
Cursors (side). (See Figure 3–57.)
2. TDS 500C and TDS 700C: Press MEASURE ➞ Measure (pop-up) ➞
Gating (main) ➞ Gate with V Bar Cursors (side). (See Figure 3–57.)
Figure 3–57: Measure Menu — Gating
3. Using the general purpose knob, move the selected (the active) cursor. Press
SELECT to change which cursor is active.
Displaying the cursor menu and turning V Bar cursors off will not turn
gating off. (Gating arrows remain on screen to indicate the area over which
the measurement is gated.) You must turn gating off in the Gating side menu.
3–119
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
NOTE. Cursors are displayed relative to the selected waveform. If you are making a
measurement using two waveforms, this behavior can be a source of confusion. If
you turn off horizontal locking and adjust the horizontal position of one waveform
independent of the other, the cursors appear at the requested position with respect
to the selected waveform. Gated measurements remain accurate, but the displayed
positions of the cursors change when you change the selected waveform.
Define High-Low Setup
The oscilloscope provides two settings, histogram and min-max, for specifying
how measure determines the High and Low levels of waveforms. To use the
high-low setup do the following step:
TDS 600B: Press MEASURE ➞ Hi-Low Setup (main) ➞ Histogram or
Min-Max (side). If you select Min-Max, you may also want to check and/or
revise reference levels using this side menu.
TDS 500C and TDS 700C: Press MEASURE ➞ Measure (pop-up) ➞ Level
Setup (main) ➞ Histogram or Min-Max (side). If you select Min-Max, you
may also want to check and/or revise reference levels using this side menu.
Histogram sets the values statistically. It selects the most common value either
above or below the midpoint (depending on whether it is defining the high or
low reference level). Since this statistical approach ignores short term aberrations
(overshoot, ringing, etc.), histogram is the best setting for examining pulses.
Min-max uses the highest and lowest values of the waveform record. This setting is
best for examining waveforms that have no large, flat portions at a common value,
such as sine waves and triangle waves — almost any waveform except for pulses.
Define Reference Levels
Once you define the reference levels, the oscilloscope will use them for all
measurements requiring those levels. To set the reference levels, do the
following steps:
1. TDS 600B: Press MEASURE ➞ Reference Levels (main) ➞ Set Levels
(side).
2. TDS 500C and TDS 700C: Press MEASURE ➞ Measure (pop-up) ➞
Level Setup (main) ➞ Set Levels (side).
3–120
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Then choose whether the References are set in % relative to High (100%) and Low
(0%) or set explicitly in the units of the selected waveform (typically volts). See
Figure 3–58. Use the general purpose knob or keypad to enter the values.
% is the default selection. It is useful for general purpose applications.
Units helps you set precise values. For example, if your are measuring
specifications on an RS-232-C circuit, set the levels precisely to RS-232-C
specification voltage values by defining the high and low references in units.
Figure 3–58: Measure Menu — Reference Levels
3. Press High Ref, Mid Ref, Low Ref, or Mid2 Ref (side).
High Ref — Sets the high reference level. The default is 90%.
Mid Ref — Sets the middle reference level. The default is 50%.
Low Ref — Sets the low reference level. The default is 10%.
Mid2 Ref — Sets the middle reference level used on the second waveform
specified in the Delay or Phase Measurements. The default is 50%.
3–121
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Take a Delay
Measurement
The delay measurement lets you measure from an edge on the selected waveform
to an edge on another waveform. To take a delay measurement, do the following
steps:
1. TDS 600B: Press MEASURE ➞ Select Measrmnt (main) ➞ Delay
(side) ➞ Delay To (main) ➞ Measure Delay to.
2. TDS 500C and TDS 700C: Press MEASURE ➞ Measure (pop-up) ➞
Select Measrmnt (main) ➞ Delay (side) ➞ Delay To (main) ➞ Measure
Delay to.
3. Press Measure Delay to (side) repeatedly to choose the delay to waveform.
The choices are Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, Ch4, Math1, Math2, Math3,Ref1, Ref2,
Ref3, and Ref4.
Figure 3–59: Measure Delay Menu — Delay To
The steps just performed select the waveform you want to measure to; note
that the waveform you are measuring delay from is the selected waveform.
(See Figure 3–59.)
3–122
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
4. TDS 600B: Press MEASURE ➞ Select Measrmnt (main) ➞ Delay
(side) ➞ Edges (main).
5. TDS 500C and TDS 700C: Press MEASURE ➞ Measure (pop-up) ➞
Select Measrmnt (main) ➞ Delay (side) ➞ Edges (main).
A side menu of delay edges and directions will appear. Choose from one of the
combinations displayed on the side menu using the following information:
H
H
H
The selection you choose defines which edges you want the delayed
measurement to be made between.
The upper waveform on each icon represents the from waveform and the
lower one represents the to waveform.
The direction arrows on the choices let you specify a forward search on
both waveforms or a forward search on the from waveform and a
backwards search on the to waveform. The latter choice is useful for
isolating a specific pair of edges out of a stream.
6. To take the measurement you just specified, press Delay To (main) ➞ OK
Create Measurement (side).
To exit the Measure Delay menu rather than creating a delay measurement,
press CLEAR MENU, which returns you to the Measure menu.
Take a Snapshot of
Measurements
Sometimes you may want to see all of the automated measurements on screen at
the same time. To do so, use Snapshot. Snapshot executes all of the single
waveform measurements available on the selected waveform once and displays
the results. (The measurements are not continuously updated.) All of the
measurements listed in Table 3–10 on page 3–114 except for Delay and Phase
are displayed. (Delay and Phase are dual waveform measurements and are not
available with Snapshot.)
The readout area for a snapshot of measurements is a pop-up display that covers
about 80% of the graticule area when displayed. (See Figure 3–60.) You can
display a snapshot on any channel or ref memory, but only one snapshot can be
displayed at a time.
3–123
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
To use Snapshot, obtain a stable display of the waveform to be measured
(pressing AUTOSET may help). Then do the following steps:
1. TDS 600B: Press MEASURE ➞ SNAPSHOT (main).
2. TDS 500C and TDS 700C: Press MEASURE ➞ Measure (pop-up) ➞
SNAPSHOT (main).
3. Press either SNAPSHOT (main) or AGAIN (side) to take another snapshot.
NOTE. The Snapshot display tells you the channel that the snapshot is being
made on.
4. Push Remove Measrmnt.
Snapshot Display
Figure 3–60: Snapshot Menu and Readout
3–124
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Consider the following rules when taking a snapshot:
H
Be sure to display the waveform properly before taking a snapshot. Snapshot
does not warn you if a waveform is improperly scaled (clipped, low signal
amplitude, low resolution, etc.).
H
H
To vary the source for taking a snapshot, simply select another channel,
math, or ref memory waveform and then execute snapshot again.
Note that a snapshot is taken on a single waveform acquisition (or acquisi-
tion sequence). The measurements in the snapshot display are not continu-
ously updated.
H
H
Be careful when taking automatic measurements on noisy signals. You might
measure the frequency of the noise and not the desired waveform.
Note that pushing any button in the main menu (except for Snapshot) or any
front panel button that displays a new menu removes the snapshot from
display.
H
Use High-Low Setup (page 3–120), Reference Levels (page 3–120), and
Gated Measurements (page 3–118) with Snapshot exactly as you would
when you display individual measurements from the Select Measrmnt
menu.
Display Measurement
Statistics (TDS 500C and
TDS 700C Only)
Measurement statistics displays information about each measurement (see
Figure 3–55 on page 3–117). As measurements are updated, the displayed value
can change. Measurement statistics displays either the mean and standard
deviation or the minimum and maximum values of measurements. The number
of measurements accumulated is also displayed.
NOTE. Statistics are not displayed for Phase, Delay, and histogram
measurements.
3–125
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
To display measurement statistics, obtain a stable display of the waveform to be
measured. Then do the following steps:
1. Press MEASURE ➞ Measure (pop-up) ➞ Statistics (main) ➞ Statistics
Min/Max or Statistics Mean/StdDev (side).
Statistics Min/Max — Displays the minimum and maximum statistics for
measurements.
Statistics Mean/StdDev — Displays the mean and standard deviation
statistics for measurements.
2. To set the number of measurements included in the measurement statistics,
press MEASURE ➞ Measure (pop-up) ➞ Statistics (main) ➞ Statistics
Weights (side). Then enter the number of measurements to include in the
measurement statistics using the general purpose or the keypad.
3. To turn off measurement statistics, press MEASURE ➞ Measure
(pop-up) ➞ Statistics (main) ➞ Statistics Off (side).
To Find More Information
To perform a tutorial that shows you how to take automatic measurements, see
Example 3: Taking Automated Measurements on page 2–22.
To learn how the oscilloscope calculates each automatic measurement, see
Appendix B: Algorithms on page B–1.
Taking Cursor Measurements
The TDS Oscilloscope provides cursors that measure the difference (either in
time or voltage) between two locations in a waveform record. This section
describes cursors — how to select their type and mode, how to display them, and
how to use them to take measurements.
Cursor measurements are fast and easy-to-take. Cursors are made up of two
markers that you position with the general purpose knob. You move one cursor
independently or both cursors in tandem, depending on the cursor mode. As you
position the cursors, readouts on the display report and update measurement
information.
3–126
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Cursor Types
There are three cursor types: horizontal bar, vertical bar, and paired
(see Figure 3–61).
Horizontal Bar Cursors
Vertical Bar Cursors
Paired Cursors
Figure 3–61: Cursor Types
Horizontal bar cursors measure vertical parameters (typically volts).
Vertical bar cursors measure horizontal parameters (typically time or frequency).
Paired cursors measure both vertical parameters (typically volts) and horizontal
parameters (typically time) simultaneously.
Look at Figure 3–61. Note that each of the two paired cursors has a long vertical
bar paired with an X. The Xs measures vertical parameters (typically volts); the
long vertical bars measure horizontal parameters (typically time or frequency).
(See Cursor Readouts on page 3–128 for more information.)
NOTE. When cursors measure certain math waveforms, the measurement may not
be of time, frequency, or voltage. Cursor measurement of those math waveforms
that are not of time, frequency, or voltage is described in Waveform Math, which
begins on page 3–188.
Cursor Modes
There are two cursor modes: independent and tracking. (See Figure 3–62.)
In independent mode, you move only one cursor at a time using the general
purpose knob. The active, or selected, cursor is a solid line. Press SELECT to
change which cursor is selected.
3–127
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
In tracking mode, you normally move both cursors in tandem using the general
purpose knob. The two cursors remain a fixed distance (time or voltage) from
each other. Press SELECT to temporarily suspend cursor tracking. You can then
use the general purpose knob to adjust the distance of the solid cursor relative to
the dashed cursor. A second push toggles the cursors back to tracking.
Independent Mode
Tracking Mode
Only Selected Cursor Moves
Both Cursors Move
in Tandem
Figure 3–62: Cursor Modes
Cursor Readouts
The cursor readout shows the absolute location of the selected cursor and the
difference between the selected and non-selected cursor. The readouts differ
depending on the cursor type you select, H Bars, V Bars, or Paired.
H Bars. The value after D shows the voltage difference between the cursors. The
value after @ shows the voltage of the selected cursor relative to ground. (See
Figure 3–63.) With the video trigger option, you can also display the voltage in
IRE units.
V Bars. The value after D shows the time (or frequency) difference between the
cursors. The value after @ shows the time (frequency) of the selected cursor
relative to the trigger point. With the video trigger option, you can also display
the line number.
TDS 500C and TDS 700C Models Only: In FastFrame mode, the @ shows the
time position of the selected cursor relative to the trigger point of the frame that
the selected cursor is in. The D shows the time difference between the two
cursors only if both cursors are in the same frame.
3–128
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Paired. The value after one D shows the voltage difference between the two Xs;
the other D shows the time (or frequency) difference between the two long
vertical bars. The value after @ shows the voltage at the X of the selected cursor
relative to ground. (See Figure 3–64.)
TDS 500C and TDS 700C Models Only: In FastFrame mode, the D shows the
time difference between the two cursors only if both cursors are in the same
frame.
Cursor Readout (H Bars)
Non-selected Cursor
(Dashed Line)
Selected Cursor
(Solid Line)
Figure 3–63: H Bars Cursor Menu and Readouts
Paired cursors can only show voltage differences when they remain on screen. If
the paired cursors are moved off screen horizontally, the word Edge will replace
the voltage values in the cursor readout.
Select the
Cursor Function
This procedure and those that follow detail the process for taking a cursor
measurement. To select the type of cursors you want, do the following steps:
1. To display the cursor menu, press CURSOR. (See Figure 3–63.)
2. Press Function (main) ➞ H Bars, V Bars, Paired, or Off (side).
3–129
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Position of Vertical Bar Cursors (Useful for
Locating Cursors Outside the Display)
Cursor Readout (Paired)
Non-selected Cursor
(Dashed Vertical Bar)
Selected Cursor
(Solid Vertical Bar)
Figure 3–64: Paired Cursor Menu and Readouts
Set Mode and Adjust
the Cursors
To select the cursor mode and adjust the cursors in either mode, do the following
steps:
1. Press CURSOR ➞ Mode (main) ➞ Independent or Track (side):
Independent makes each cursor positionable without regard to the position of
the other cursor.
Track makes both cursors positionable in tandem; that is, both cursors move in
unison and maintain a fixed horizontal or vertical distance between each other.
2. Adjust the cursors according to the mode you have selected:
H
To adjust either cursor in independent mode, use the general purpose knob to
move the selected (active) cursor. A solid line indicates the adjustable cursor
and a dashed line the fixed cursor. Press Select to toggle selection between
the two cursors.
3–130
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
H
H
To adjust both cursors in tracking mode, use the general purpose knob to
move both cursors.
To adjust the distance between cursors in tracking mode, press SELECT to
temporarily suspend cursor tracking. Then use the general purpose knob to
adjust the distance of the solid cursor relative to the dashed cursor. Press
SELECT again to resume tracking.
Select Cursor Speed
Select Time Units
To change the cursors speed, press SHIFT before turning the general purpose
knob. The cursor moves faster when the SHIFT button is lighted and the display
reads Coarse Knobs in the upper right corner.
You can choose to display vertical bar cursor results in units of time or fre-
quency. If you have Option 5 Video, you can also display the results in terms of
video line number. To choose vertical bar cursor units, do the following step:
Press CURSOR ➞ Time Units (main) ➞ seconds or 1/seconds (Hz) or, with
Option 5, Video Line Number (side).
Select Amplitude Units
If you are measuring NTSC signals, you can choose to display vertical readings
in IRE units. If you are trying to measure such a signal, you should have
Option 05 Video Trigger installed as it would be difficult to trigger on composite
video waveforms without Option 05. To switch between IRE and base cursor
units, do the following steps:
1. Press CURSOR ➞ Amplitude Units (main) ➞ IRE (NTSC).
2. To return to normal, press CURSOR ➞ Amplitude Units (main) ➞ Base.
To Find More Information
To find instructions for using cursors with math waveforms, see Waveform Math
on page 3–188.
To find instructions on using cursor with FFT waveforms, differentiated
waveforms, and integrated waveforms, see Fast Fourier Transforms on
page 3–191, Waveform Differentiation on page 3–210, and Waveform Integration
on page 3–215.
3–131
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
To find information on cursor units with video waveforms, see the TDS Family
Option 05 Video Trigger Interface, if your oscilloscope is equipped with the
video trigger option.
Taking Graticule Measurements
The TDS Oscilloscope provides a graticule for measuring the difference (either
in time or amplitude) between two points on a waveform record. Graticule
measurements provide you with quick, visual estimates. For example, you might
look at a waveform amplitude and say “it is a little more than 100 mV.” This
section briefly describes how to take graticule measurements.
Measure Waveform
Amplitude
To measure the amplitude of a waveform, do the following steps:
1. Press the channel selection button of the channel you wish to measure. Note
the vertical scale factor for the channel in the channel readout on screen.
2. Count the graticule divisions between two features to be measured and
multiply by the vertical scale factor.
For example, if you count five major vertical graticule divisions between the
minimum and maximum values of a waveform at a scale factor of 100 mV/di-
vision, then you can easily calculate your peak-to-peak voltage as:
5 divisions × 100 mV/division = 500 mV.
NOTE. When you select the NTSC graticule, the volts per division of all selected
channels is set to 143 mV/div (152 mV/div for PAL) where the divisions are those
of the conventional graticule, not the divisions of the video graticules. For
NTSC, the actual grid lines represent 10 IRE, and for PAL the lines are 100 mV
apart.
3–132
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Measure Waveform Time
To measure the time of a waveform, repeat the process just described, but count
the horizontal divisions and multiply by the horizontal scale factor. For example,
if you count five major horizontal graticule divisions for one waveform cycle at a
horizontal scale factor of 50 mS/division, then you can easily calculate the
waveform period as:
5 divisions × 50 mS/division = 250 ms, or 4 kHz.
Displaying Histograms (TDS 500C and TDS 700C Only)
The TDS Oscilloscope can display histograms constructed from the selected
trace waveform data. You can display either a vertical or horizontal histogram.
You can display only one type of histogram at a time. See Figure 3–65.
Vertical histogram
Figure 3–65: Histogram Menu and Vertical Histogram
Start Histogram Counting
To start histogram counting press MEASURE ➞ Histogram (pop-up) ➞
Histogram Options (main) ➞ Histogram Mode (side) ➞ Off, Vertical, or
Horizontal (side).
H
Off turns off histogram counting and display.
3–133
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
H
H
Vertical displays a vertical histogram that shows how your vertical units
vary in the histogram box. A vertical histogram is displayed starting at the
left edge of the graticule. The size of the max bin is controlled by the
Histogram Size side menu.
Horizontal displays a horizontal histogram that shows how time varies in
the histogram box. A horizontal histogram is displayed at the top of the
graticule. The size of the max bin is controlled by the Histogram Size side
menu.
Reset Histogram Counting
Display a Histogram
To reset the count in all histogram bins to zero, press MEASURE ➞ Histogram
(pop-up) ➞ Histogram Options (main) ➞ Reset Histogram Counting (side).
To display a histogram, press MEASURE ➞ Histogram (pop-up) ➞ Histo-
gram Options (main) ➞ Histogram Display (side) ➞ Off, Log, or Linear
(side).
H
H
H
If you select Off, you turn off histogram displays. Histogram counting and
measurements can continue. The histogram box is not turned off.
If you select Log, you display the log of the count in each bin. Log scaling
provides better visual detail for bins with low count.
If you select Linear, you display the count in each bin.
To select which waveform is compared against the histogram box, press
MEASURE ➞ Histogram (pop-up) ➞ Histogram Options (main) ➞
Histogram Source (side) ➞ Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, or Ch4 (side).
To set the size of the histogram display press MEASURE ➞ Histogram
(pop-up) ➞ Histogram Options (main) ➞ Histogram Size (side). Use the
general purpose knob or keypad to set the histogram size.
Setting Histogram Box
Size
The histogram box selects the section of the trace used for histograms. To set the
size of the histogram box, press MEASURE ➞ Histogram (pop-up) ➞
Histogram Box Limits (main) ➞ Top Limit, Bottom Limit, Left Limit, or
Right Limit (side). Use the general purpose knob or keypad to adjust the
selected edge of the histogram box.
3–134
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Histogram Measurement
List
The TDS Oscilloscope provides you with 10 histogram measurements.
Table 3–11 lists brief definitions of the measurements.
Table 3–11: Measurement definitions
Name
Definition
Mean
The average of all acquired points within (or on) the histogram box.
Median
Half of all acquired points within (or on) the histogram box are less than and half are greater
than this value.
StdDev
The standard deviation (Root Mean Square (RMS) deviation) of all acquired points within (or on)
the histogram box.
Hits in Box
Waveform Count
Displays the number of points in the histogram box or on the box boundary.
Displays the number of waveforms that have contributed to the histogram.
Displays the number of points in the largest bin of the histogram.
Peak Hits
Pk-Pk
Displays the peak-to-peak value of the histogram. Vertical histograms display the “voltage” of
the highest nonzero bin minus the “voltage” of the lowest nonzero bin. Horizontal histograms
display the “time” of the rightmost nonzero bin minus the “time” of the leftmost nonzero bin.
Mean " 1 StdDev
Mean " 2 StdDev
Mean " 3 StdDev
The percentage of points in the histogram which are within 1 standard deviation of the
histogram mean.
The percentage of points in the histogram which are within 2 standard deviations of the
histogram mean.
The percentage of points in the histogram which are within 3 standard deviations of the
histogram mean.
Measurement Readouts
Histogram measurements are displayed in the same location as other measure-
ments. (See Figure 3–55 on page 3–117.)
Display Histogram
Measurements
To display histogram measurements you first need to obtain a stable display of
your waveform. (Pressing AUTOSET may help.) Once you have a stable
display, press MEASURE to bring up the Measure menu. (See Figure 3–56.)
1. Turn on histogram counting by pressing MEASURE ➞ Histogram
(pop-up) ➞ Histogram Options (main) ➞ Histogram Mode (side) ➞
Vertical or Horizontal (side).
3–135
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
2. Press MEASURE ➞ Histogram (pop-up) ➞ Histogram Measrmnt (main).
3. Select a measurement from the side menu (see Table 3–11 on page 3–135).
Remove Measurements
The Remove Measrmnt selection provides the same functions as in the Measure
menu. See Remove Measurements on page 3–118.
Mask Testing (Option 2C Only)
The digitizing oscilloscope can perform mask testing. You can select a standard
mask or create and select a user mask.
NOTE. To function properly, masks force some oscilloscope modes and settings to
new values.
Selecting a Mask
To select a mask, do the following steps.
1. Press MEASURE ➞ Measure (main) ➞ Masks (pop-up).
2. Repeatedly press Mask Type (pop-up) until your mask type is selected (see
Table 3–12 on page 3–141).
3. Press Standard Mask (main) and select a mask from the side menu (see
Table 3–12 on page 3–141).
Setting Mask Options
Set mask options to determine which waveform the masks are compared against,
to turn masks on or off, to enable Autoset to a mask, to enable offset adjustment
to masks, and to enable the digital waveform filter (see Figure 3–66).
To select the channel that is compared against the selected mask, press MEA-
SURE ➞ Measure (main) ➞ Masks (pop-up) ➞ Mask Options (main). Then
toggle Mask Source (side) to Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, or Ch4.
To turn defined masks on or off, press MEASURE ➞ Measure (main) ➞
Masks (pop-up) ➞ Mask Options (main). Then toggle Mask Display (side)
ON or OFF.
3–136
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Figure 3–66: Mask menu
NOTE. If you select Manual, some controls are automatically adjusted; if you
select Auto, a complete Autoset is performed.
To control whether an autoset is performed when a standard mask is selected,
press MEASURE ➞ Measure (main) ➞ Masks (pop-up) ➞ Mask Op-
tions (main). Then toggle Std Mask Autoset (side) to Auto or Manual.
NOTE. If you select OFF, offset is not adjusted when the DS–0, E1, E2, E3, or
T1.102 standards are selected.
To control whether a standard-mask autoset can adjust Vertical Offset to match
the waveform to the mask, press MEASURE ➞ Measure (main) ➞ Masks
(pop-up) ➞ Mask Options (main). Then toggle Std Mask Offset Adj (side) to
ON or OFF.
3–137
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
To enable the optical reference receiver (option 3C and 4C) required by some
optical standards that require a Bessel–Thompson response, press MEA-
SURE ➞ Measure (main) ➞ Masks (pop-up) ➞ Mask Options (main). Then
toggle Filter (side) to Enable.
To determine the calibration status of the communication filter, press SHIFT ➞
UTILITY ➞ System (main) ➞ Cal (pop-up). Then read the calibration status
from the Comm Filter menu. If the status is not Pass, refer the oscilloscope to
service personnel for repair or adjustment. The oscilloscope determines the status
at power-up.
Adjusting Time Base
To manually align the waveform to a mask, press MEASURE ➞ Mea-
sure (main) ➞ Masks (pop-up) ➞ Time Base Position (main) ➞ Time Base
Position (side) and adjust the general purpose knob or the key pad.
Position
To reset the time base position to 0 s, press MEASURE ➞ Measure (main) ➞
Masks (pop-up) ➞ Time Base Position (main) ➞ Set to 0 s (side).
Counting Masks
After selecting a mask, setting mask options, and adjusting the time base
position, you can enable mask counting and see counting results. To enable mask
counting, press MEASURE ➞ Measure (main) ➞ Masks (pop-up) ➞ Mask
Counting (main) ➞ Count Masks (side).
If mask counting is enabled, read the results in the side menus:
H
Waveform Count displays the number of waveforms that have contributed
to mask counting.
H
H
Total Hits displays the total of all hits in all masks.
Mask n Hits displays the number of hits for mask n.
To zero the counts for all masks, press MEASURE ➞ Measure (main) ➞
Masks (pop-up) ➞ Mask Counting (main) ➞ Reset Mask Counting (side).
Editing a Mask
You may create or edit user masks. If you edit a standard mask, the edited copy
of the mask becomes a user mask. To edit a mask do the following steps:
1. To start with a standard mask, do Selecting a Mask on page 3–136.
2. To select a mask to edit or create, press MEASURE ➞ Measure (main) ➞
Masks (pop-up) ➞ Mask Type (main) ➞ Edit (pop-up) ➞ User Mask
Editing (main). Then select the mask from the side menu.
3–138
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
3. You create or edit a mask by moving a cross-hair cursor on the display and
adding or deleting points as required. To move the cursor, turn the general
purpose knob. To change the cursor direction, press SELECT.
4. To add a point to the mask, move the cursor to the location and press Add
Point (side).
5. To delete a point from the mask, move the cursor to the point and press
Delete Point (side).
6. To delete all points from the mask, press Delete All Points (side).
7. When you are finished editing the mask, press OK End Edit (side).
Masks are created by connecting the points independent of the order they are
entered. Points are connected by sorting the points in left-to-right order and
grouping them across a diagonal from the left-most point to the right-most point.
If two points share the same horizontal position along either the left or right edge
of the mask, then the diagonal runs from the top left-most point to the bottom
right-most point. Points below the diagonal form the bottom boundary of the
mask; points above it form the top boundary.
When creating masks, remember the following operating characteristics and refer
to Figure 3–67:
H
H
Locate one point along the left edge or right edge of the mask further left or
further right than any other point.
Points are connected left to right.
3–139
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Top/bottom
dividing line
(not displayed)
These points form
the top of the mask
Left-mostpoint
Right-most point
These points form
the bottom of the mask
Figure 3–67: Creating a User Mask
H
H
To create a mask with a concave side, create several masks to cover the same
area.
Masks are saved with setups, so you can save sets of masks by defining
them, and then storing the instrument setup. Displayed masks are overwrit-
ten when you recall a stored setup, select a standard mask, or initialize the
digitizing oscilloscope.
3–140
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Table 3–12: Standard masks
SONET
SDH
ITU-T
T1.102
Fibre channel
Video
Miscellaneous
None
None
None
None
None
None
OC1/STM0
51.84 Mb/s
DS–0 Sgl
Single 64.4 kb/s
DS1
1.544 Mb/s
FC133
Optical 132.8 Mb/s
4fsc NTSC
“D2” 143.18 Mb/s
FDDI Halt 125 Mb/s
OC3/STM1
155.52 Mb/s Double 64 kb/s
DS-0 Dbl
DS1A
2.048 Mb/s
FC266
Optical 265.6 Mb/s
4:2:2
“D1” 270 Mb/s
OC12/STM4 DS-0 Data
622.08 Mb/s Data Contra 64 kb/s
DS1C
3.152 Mb/s
FC531
Optical 531.2 Mb/s
DS-0 Tmg
Timing 64 kb/s
DS2
6.312 Mb/s
FC1063
Optical 1.0625 Gb/s
E1 Sym
Sym Pair 2.048 Mb/s
DS3
44.736 Mb/s
FC133E
Electrical 132.7 Mb/s
E1 Coax
Coax Pair 2.048 Mb/s
DS4NA
139.26 Mb/s
FC266E
Electrical 265.6 Mb/s
E2
DS4NA Mx
FC531E
8.448 Mb/s
Max Output 139.26 Mb/s Electrical 531.2 Mb/s
E3
STS-1 Eye
Eye 51.84 Mb/s
FC1063E
Electrical 1.0625 Gb/s
34.368 Mb/s
E4 0
STS-1
Pulse 51.84 Mb/s
Binary 0 139.26 Mb/s
E4 1
STS-3
155.52 Mb/s
Binary 1 139.26 Mb/s
E5 CEPT 565 Mb/s
STS-3 Mx
Max Output 155.52 Mb/s
STM1E 0
Binary 0 155.52 Mb/s
STM1E 1
Binary 1 155.52 Mb/s
Optimizing Measurement Accuracy: SPC and Probe Cal
The TDS Oscilloscope provides three features that optimize measurement
accuracy. Signal Path Compensation (SPC) lets you compensate the internal
signal path used to acquire the waveforms and measure based on the ambient
temperature. Channel/Probe Deskew lets you compensate for the fact that signals
may come in from cables of different length. Probe Cal lets you compensate the
entire signal path, from probe tip to digitized signal, to improve the gain and
offset accuracy of the probe. This section tells you how to use both features.
3–141
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Signal Path
Compensation
The TDS Oscilloscope lets you compensate the internal signal path used to
acquire the waveforms you measure. SPC optimizes the oscilloscope capability
to make accurate measurements based on the ambient temperature.
Run an SPC anytime you wish to ensure that the measurements you make are
made with the most accuracy possible. You should also run an SPC if the
temperature has changed more than 5_ C since the last SPC was performed.
NOTE. When making measurements at volts/division settings less than or equal to
5 mV, you should run SPC at least once per week. Failure to do so may result in
the oscilloscope not meeting warranted performance levels at those volts/div
settings. (Warranted characteristics are listed in the Performance Verification
and Specifications manual.)
To run an SPC, do the following steps:
1. Power on the digitizing oscilloscope and allow a 20 minute warm-up before
doing this procedure.
2. Disconnect any input signals you may have connected from all four input
channels.
STOP. When doing steps 3 and 4, do not turn off the oscilloscope until signal
path compensation completes. If you interrupt (or lose) power to the instrument
while signal path compensation is running, a message is logged in the oscillo-
scope error log. If such a case occurs, rerun signal path compensation.
3. Press SHIFT UTILITY ➞ System (main) ➞ Cal (pop-up) ➞ Signal
Path (main) ➞ OK Compensate Signal Paths (side).
4. Wait for signal path compensation to complete (up to 15 minutes). While it
progresses, a “clock” icon (shown at left) is displayed on-screen. When
compensation completes, the status message will be updated to Pass or Fail
in the main menu.
5. Verify the word Pass appears under Signal Path in the main menu. (See
Figure 3–68.)
3–142
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Figure 3–68: Performing a Signal Path Compensation
Channel/Probe Deskew
The TDS Oscilloscopes allow you to adjust a relative time delay for each
channel. This feature lets you align the signals to compensate for the fact that
signals may come in from cables of differing lengths.
The oscilloscope applies deskew values after it completes each acquisition;
therefore, the deskew values do not affect logic triggering. Also, deskew has no
affect on XY display format.
To set a channel/probe deskew, do the following steps:
H
H
Press VERTICAL MENU ➞ Deskew (main).
Then use the general purpose knob or the keypad to set the deskew time. You
can also eliminate any deskew setting by pressing Set to 0 S (side).
Probe Cal
The TDS Oscilloscope lets you compensate the probe, based on the channel it is
connected to, to improve the gain and offset accuracy of the probe. By executing
Probe Cal on a channel with its probe installed, you can optimize the oscillo-
scope capability to make accurate measurements using that channel and probe.
3–143
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Run a Probe Cal anytime you wish to ensure that the measurements you make
are made with the most accuracy possible. You should also run a Probe Cal if
you have changed to a different probe since the last Probe Cal was performed.
Some Probes Cannot Be Compensated. Some types of probes can be gain
compensated, some can be offset compensated, and some can be compensated
for both. Some probes cannot be compensated at all. Note the following
restrictions:
H
The oscilloscope cannot compensate probes that have an attenuation factor of
greater than 20X. If you attempt to compensate such a probe you will get an
error message.
H
The oscilloscope cannot compensate probes that have gain and/or offset
errors that are too great (u2% gain and/or u50 mV offset). If these errors
are within specified limits for your probe, you may want to use another
probe. If they are not within specification, have your probe checked by
service personnel.
NOTE. Probe Cal is not recommended with the P6139A passive probe. This
probe typically has little gain and offset error, and therefore, the improvement in
performance after a Probe Cal is not worth the time needed to do the Probe Cal.
Probe Cal makes significant performance improvements when performed with
active probes or older passive probes.
To run a probe cal, follow the instructions regarding prerequisites below and then
do the steps that follow:
H
H
If you are installing an active probe, such as the P6243 or P6245, there are
no prerequisites to performing this procedure. Start at step 1.
If you are compensating for a passive probe with this procedure you must
first compensate the low frequency response of the probe. First, do steps 1
and 2 below, and then compensate the probe by following the instructions
that came with your probe. (Or see To Compensate Passive Probes on
page 3–6.) Then continue with step 3 of this procedure.
1. Install the probe on the input channel on which it is to be used.
3–144
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
2. Power on the digitizing oscilloscope and allow a 20 minute warm-up before
doing this procedure.
3. Press SHIFT UTILITY ➞ System (main) ➞ Cal (pop-up).
4. Look at the status label under Signal Path in the main menu. If the status
does not read Pass, perform a signal path compensation (Signal Path
Compensation, page 3–142), and then continue with this procedure.
5. Press the front-panel button corresponding to the input channel on which you
installed the probe.
6. TDS 600B: Press VERTICAL MENU ➞ Cal Probe (main).
7. TDS 500C and TDS 700C: Press VERTICAL MENU ➞ Probe Func-
tions (main) ➞ Cal Probe (side).
STOP. Your oscilloscope will detect the type of probe you have installed and
display screen messages and menu choices for compensation of probe gain,
offset, or both. (See Figure 3–69.) The following steps will have you run probe
gain, offset, or both depending on the probe the oscilloscope detects.
8. If the message on screen is Probe Offset Compensation rather than Probe
Gain Compensation, skip to step 16.
9. Connect the probe tip to PROBE COMPENSATION SIGNAL; connect
the probe ground lead to PROBE COMPENSATION GND.
10. Press OK Compensate Gain (side).
11. Wait for gain compensation to complete (one to three minutes).
When gain compensation completes, the following actions occur:
H
H
The clock icon will disappear.
If offset compensation is required for the probe installed, the Probe
Offset Compensation message will replace the Probe Gain Compensa-
tion message.
3–145
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Figure 3–69: Probe Cal Menu and Gain Compensation Display
H
H
If gain compensation did not complete successfully, you may get a
“Probe is not connected” message (examine the probe connections to the
digitizing oscilloscope, be sure the probe tip is properly installed in its
retractor, etc., and repeat step 10).
If gain compensation did not complete successfully, you may get the
message “Compensation Error.” This error implies that the probe gain
(2% error) and/or offset (50 mV) is too great to be compensated. You can
substitute another probe and continue. Have your probe checked by
service personnel.
12. If the Probe Offset Compensation message is displayed, continue with step
16; otherwise, continue with step 13.
13. If the Compensation Error message is displayed, continue with step 14;
otherwise continue with step 19.
14. Press SHIFT UTILITY ➞ System (main) ➞ Diag/Err (pop-up) ➞ Error
Log (main). If there are too many error messages to be seen on screen, rotate
the general purpose knob clockwise to scroll to the last message.
3–146
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
15. Note the compensation error amount. Skip to step 20.
16. Disconnect the probe from any signal you may have connected it to. Leave
the probe installed on its channel.
17. Press OK Compensate Offset (side).
18. Wait for offset compensation to complete (one to three minutes).
When offset compensation completes, the following occurs:
H
H
The clock icon will disappear.
If offset compensation did not complete successfully, you may get the
message “Compensation Error.” This error implies that the probe offset
scale (10% error) and/or offset (50 mV) is too great to be compensated.
You can substitute another probe and continue. Have your probe checked
by service personnel. You can also check the error log by doing steps 14
through 15.
19. After the clock icon is removed, verify the word Initialized changed to Pass
under Cal Probe in the main menu. (See Figure 3–69.)
20. If desired, repeat this procedure beginning at step 1 to compensate for other
probe/channel combinations. But before you do so, be sure you take note of
the following requirements:
H
Remember to first low frequency compensate any passive probe you
connect (see the prerequisites listed on page 3–144 at the beginning of
this procedure).
H
Remember to connect all but simple passive probes to the oscilloscope
for a twenty minute warm up before running Probe Cal.
Changing Probes After a Probe Cal. If a Probe Cal has never been performed on
an input channel or if its stored Probe Cal data is erased using the Re-use Probe
Calibration Data menu (discussed later), the oscilloscope displays Initialized
status in its vertical menu. It also displays initialized whenever you remove a
probe from an input.
3–147
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
If you execute a successful Probe Cal on an input channel, the oscilloscope
stores the compensation data it derived in nonvolatile memory. Therefore, this
data is available when you turn the oscilloscope off and back on and when you
change probes.
When you install a probe or power on the oscilloscope with probes installed, the
oscilloscope tests the probe at each input. Depending on the probe it finds on
each input, it takes one of the following actions:
H
If the probe has a TEKPROBE interface (such an interface can convey
additional information, such as a unique identification number), the
oscilloscope determines whether it is the same probe for which data was
stored. If it is, the oscilloscope sets status to pass; if not, it sets the status to
Initialized.
H
If a probe has a simple oscilloscope interface, the oscilloscope can usually
determine if it has a different probe attenuation factor than that stored for the
last Probe Cal. It can also determine if the last Probe Cal was for a probe
with a TEKPROBE interface. If either is the case, the probe installed is
different from that stored for the last Probe Cal. Therefore, the oscilloscope
sets the status to Initialized.
H
If a probe has a simple oscilloscope interface and the probe attenuation factor
is the same as was stored at the last Probe Cal, the oscilloscope cannot
determine whether it is the same probe. Therefore, it displays the Re-use
Probe Calibration data? menu. (See Figure 3–70.)
If the Re-use Probe Calibration data? menu is displayed, you can choose one of
the following options:
H
H
H
Press OK Use Existing Data (side) to use the Probe Cal data last stored to
compensate the probe.
Press OK Erase Probe Cal Data (side) to erase the Probe Cal data last
stored and use the probe uncompensated.
Press CLEAR MENU on the front panel to retain the Probe Cal data last
stored and use the probe uncompensated.
3–148
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Figure 3–70: Re-use Probe Calibration Data Menu
NOTE. If the Re-use Probe Calibration data menu is displayed, do not select OK
Use Existing Data if the probe currently installed is not of the same impedance
stored for the Probe Cal. For example, if the last Probe Cal stored for a channel
was done with a passive 50 W probe installed, do not install a passive 1 MW
probe and select OK Use Existing Data if the menu appears. If you do so, most
of any signal you attempt to measure will not be coupled to the input channel
because of the probe to oscilloscope impedance mismatch.
Table 3–13 shows the action the oscilloscope takes based on the probe connected
and user operation performed.
3–149
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring Waveforms
Table 3–13: Probe cal status
2
Type probe connected
1
3
4
Probe Cal’d?
User action
Doesn’t Matter
Power off
Simple interface
TEKPROBE interface
Initialized
No
Initialized
Yes
Initialized
Initialized
(probe data is retained)
(probe data is retained)
Yes
Power on
Can not detect differ-
ent probe:
Display Re-use Probe Cal’d Probe:
Calibration Data menu
Pass
Different probe:
Initialized
Initialized
Different probe:
Initialized
Initialized
Yes
Yes
Disconnect Probe
Connect Probe
Can not detect differ-
ent probe:
Display Re-use Probe Cal’d Probe:
Calibration Data menu
Pass
Different probe:
Initialized
Different probe:
Initialized
1
Refers to a channel input that was successfully compensated at the time Probe Cal was last executed for the input channel.
2
3
If no probe is connected, the probe status in the vertical main menu is always initialized.
A probe with a simple interface is a probe that can convey very limited information to the oscilloscope. Most passive
probes (such as the P6139A) have simple interfaces.
4
A probe with a TEKPROBE interface is a probe that can convey additional information. For instance, it might automatical-
ly set the oscilloscope input channel impedance to match the probe, send the oscilloscope a unique probe identification
number, and so on. Some optical probes and most active probes (such as the P6205) have TEKPROBE interfaces.
3–150
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
The TDS Oscilloscope can save and recall the waveforms you measure and the
setups you use to measure them. It can also output or save a copy of its display
screen. This section describes how to use the following features to save, recall,
and document your measurements:
H
H
H
Save/Recall Setups, for saving the setups you create to internal memory or to
a disk, so you can recall and reuse those setups
Save/Recall Waveform for saving waveforms to internal memory or to a disk
and for recalling those waveforms to the display
Hardcopy for printing a copy of the oscilloscope display screen or for saving
it to disk (hardcopies can be incorporated into documents using desk top
publishing software)
H
File Utilities for managing (copying, organizing into directories, and so on)
the setups, waveforms, and display screens that you save to disk
This section ends with details on how to connect your oscilloscope into a system
environment, so that it can communicate with remote instruments.
NOTE. TDS oscilloscopes do not come equipped with a hard disk drive unless
you order Option HD or 2M. See Options on page A–1.
Saving and Recalling Setups
The TDS Oscilloscope can store up to ten instrument setups in internal memory
that you may later recall. This section describes how you save and recall a setup,
and how you can recall the factory default setup.
Save a setup when you want to reuse it later. For example, after changing the
setting during the course of an experiment, you may want to quickly return to
your original setup. Save setups are retained even when you turn the oscilloscope
off or unplug it.
3–151
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
To Save a Setup
To save the current setup of the oscilloscope:
1. Press SAVE/RECALL SETUP ➞ Save Current Setup (main).
STOP. Before doing step 2 that follows, note that if you choose a setup location
labeled user, you will overwrite the user setup previously stored there. You can store
setups in setup locations labeled factory without disturbing previously stored setups.
2. To store to a setup internally, choose one of the ten internal storage locations
from the side menu To Setup 1, To Setup 2, ... (see Figure 3–71). Now the
current setup is stored in that location.
Figure 3–71: Save/Recall Setup Menu
3. To store a setup to disk, press To File (side). Then use the general purpose
knob to select the exact file from the resulting scrollbar list. Finally, press
Save To Selected File (side) to complete the operation.
3–152
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
NOTE. Upon power on, the oscilloscope creates the “wild card” file, marked in the
file utilities menu by the name TEK?????.SET and by a wild card icon as shown
on the left of this page, for storing setups. Selecting this file in step 3 stores a setup
in a uniquely named, sequentially numbered file. For instance, the oscilloscope
saves the first setup you save in the file TEK00001.SET, the second
in TEK00002.SET, and so on.
To Recall a Setup
To recall a setup, do the following steps:
1. To recall a setup stored internally, press SAVE/RECALL SETUP ➞ Recall
Saved Setup (main) ➞ Recall Setup 1, Recall Setup 2 ... (side).
2. To recall a setup stored on disk, press From File (side). Then use the general
purpose knob to select the exact file from the resulting scrollbar list. Only
files with .set extensions will be displayed. Finally, press Recall From
Selected File (side) to complete the operation.
Recalling a setup will not change the menu that is currently displayed. If you recall
a setup that is labeled factory in the side menu, you will recall the factory setup.
(The conventional method for recalling the factory setup is described below.)
To Recall the
Factory Setup
To reset your oscilloscope to the factory defaults:
Press SAVE/RECALL SETUP ➞ Recall Factory Setup (main) ➞ OK
Confirm Factory Init (side).
To Delete All Setups and
Waveforms — Tek
Securer
Sometimes you might use the oscilloscope to acquire waveforms that are
confidential. Furthermore, before returning the oscilloscope to general usage,
you might want to remove all such waveforms and any setups used to acquire
them. (Be sure you want to remove all waveforms and setups, because once they
are removed, you cannot retrieve them.) To use Tek Secure to remove all
reference setups and waveforms (does not affect mass storage disks):
Press SHIFT UTILITY ➞ System (main) ➞ Config (pop-up) ➞ Tek Secure
Erase Memory (main) ➞ OK Erase Setup & Ref Memory (side).
3–153
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
Executing Tek Secure accomplishes the following tasks:
H
H
Replaces all waveforms in reference memories with zero sample values.
Replaces the current front panel setup and all setups stored in setup memory
with the factory setup.
H
H
Calculates the checksums of all waveform memory and setup memory
locations to verify successful completion of setup and waveform erasure.
If the checksum calculation is unsuccessful, displays a warning message; if
the checksum calculation is successful, displays a confirmation message.
To Run the File Utilities
To Find More Information
To run file utilities, see the Managing the File System on page 3–160.
See Example 4: Saving Setups, on page 2–28.
Saving and Recalling Waveforms and Acquisitions
TDS Oscilloscope provides four internal reference memories in any of which you
can store a waveform. Waveforms thus stored are retained even when you turn
the oscilloscope off or unplug it. The oscilloscope also can save waveforms and,
with Option 2M, extended record-length acquisitions to disk. This section
describes how to save, delete, and display reference waveforms and acquisitions.
The oscilloscope can display up to 11 waveforms at one time. That includes
waveforms from the four input channels, four reference waveforms, and three
math waveforms. You can save any combination of different size waveform
records.
You will find saving waveforms useful when working with many waveforms and
channels. If you have more waveforms than you can display, you can save one of
the waveforms and then stop acquiring it. By doing so, you free an input channel
to display another waveform without losing the first one.
3–154
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
To Save a Waveform
To save a waveform, do the following steps:
1. Select the channel that has the waveform you want to save.
STOP. Before doing step 2 that follows, note that if you choose a reference
memory location labeled active (see Figure 3–72), you will overwrite the
waveform that was previously stored there. You can store waveforms in reference
locations labeled empty without disturbing previously stored waveforms.
2. TDS 600B: To store a waveform internally, press SAVE/RECALL
WAVEFORM ➞ Save Wfm (main) ➞ To Ref1, To Ref2, To Ref3, or To
Ref4 (side).
3. TDS 500C and TDS 700C: To store a waveform internally, press SAVE/RE-
CALL WAVEFORM ➞ Normal (pop-up) ➞ Save Wfm (main) ➞ To
Ref1, To Ref2, To Ref3, or To Ref4 (side).
Figure 3–72: Save Waveform Menu
3–155
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
NOTE. Using this procedure to save an extended acquisition only saves the
waveform. In this case, if the trigger position is shown at 0% or 100%, the
actual position may be outside the saved waveform.
4. To store a waveform to disk, press To File (side). Then use the general
purpose knob to select the exact file from the resulting scrollbar list. Finally,
press Save To Selected File (side) to complete the operation.
NOTE. Upon power on, the oscilloscope creates the “wild card” file, marked in
the file utilities menu by the name TEK?????.WFM and by a wild-card icon
(shown left), for storing waveforms. Selecting this file in step 3 stores a
waveform in a uniquely named, sequentially numbered file. For instance, the
oscilloscope saves the first waveform you save in the file TEK00001.WFM, the
second in TEK00002.WFM, and so on.
To Save an Acquisition
(Option 2M Only)
To save an acquisition, do the following steps:
1. Select the channel that has the acquisition you want to save.
2. To store a waveform internally, press SAVE/RECALL WAVEFORM ➞
Extended (pop-up) ➞ Save Acq (main).
3. Press To File (side). Then use the general purpose knob and the SELECT
button to select the hard drive (hd0:) and the exact file from the resulting
scrollbar list. Finally, press Save To Selected File (side) to complete the
operation.
NOTE. Upon power on, the oscilloscope creates the “wild card” file, marked in
the file utilities menu by the name TEK?????.WF1 and by a wild-card icon (shown
left), for storing acquisitions. Selecting this file in step 3 stores a acquisition in a
uniquely named, sequentially numbered file. For instance, the oscilloscope saves
the first acquisition you save in the file TEK00001.WF1, the second in
TEK00002.WF1, and so on.
Saving or recalling an acquisition stops acquisitions in process.
3–156
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
To Change Format
To select the format that the oscilloscope uses to save waveforms to a disk:
TDS 600B: Press save/recall WAVEFORM ➞ Save Format (main) ➞
Internal, MathCad, or Spreadsheet (side).
TDS 500C and TDS700C: Press save/recall WAVEFORM ➞ Normal or
Extended (pop-up) ➞ Save Format (main) ➞ Internal, MathCad, or
Spreadsheet (side). MathCad and Spreadsheet are only available in the Normal
waveform menu.
Internal creates files (.WFM or .WF1) in the internal format of the oscilloscope.
MathCad creates files (.DAT) in a format usable by MathCad .
Spreadsheet creates files (.CSV) in a format usable by spreadsheets (Excel ,
Lotus 1-2-3 , and Quattro Pro) .
If you are writing a MathCad program, note that the TDS-MathCad file is an
ASCII files, the first four values of which contain header information:
H
H
H
The first header value holds the TDS record length.
The second header value holds time, in seconds, between samples.
The third header value holds the trigger position
(expressed as an index in the data position).
H
The fourth header value refers to the fractional trigger position.
Also note that the delimiters are carriage returns.
To Delete Waveforms
To delete a reference waveform(s) that you no longer need:
TDS 600B: Press SAVE/RECALL WAVEFORM ➞ Delete Refs (main) ➞
Delete Ref1, Delete Ref2, Delete Ref3, Delete Ref4, or Delete All Refs (side).
TDS 500C and TDS 700C: Press SAVE/RECALL WAVEFORM ➞ Normal
(pop-up) ➞ Delete Refs (main) ➞ Delete Ref1, Delete Ref2, Delete Ref3,
Delete Ref4, or Delete All Refs (side).
3–157
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
To Delete All Waveforms
and Setups
To remove all stored reference waveforms and setups, use the feature called Tek
Secure. See To Delete All Setups and Waveforms on page 3–153.
To Display a
To display a waveform in internal reference memory:
Saved Waveform
Press MORE ➞ Ref1, Ref2, Ref3, or Ref4 (main). (See Figure 3–73.)
Note that in Figure 3–73, the main menu items Ref2, Ref3, and Ref4 appear
shaded while Ref1 does not. References that are empty appear shaded in the
More main menu.
Figure 3–73: More Menu
To Recall a Waveform
From Disk
To recall a waveform from disk to an internal reference memory:
TDS 600B: Press SAVE/RECALL WAVEFORM ➞ Recall Wfm To
Ref (main) ➞ Recall From File (side).
3–158
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
TDS 500C or TDS 700C: Press SAVE/RECALL WAVEFORM ➞ Normal
(pop-up) ➞ Recall Wfm To Ref (main) ➞ Recall From File (side).
Then use the general purpose knob to select the exact file from the resulting
scrollbar list. Only files with .WFM extensions are displayed. Finally, press To
Ref1, To Ref2, To Ref3, or To Ref4 (side) to complete the operation.
To Recall an Acquisition
From Disk (TDS 500C and
TDS700C Only)
To recall an acquisition from disk to an acquisition channel, press SAVE/RE-
CALL WAVEFORM ➞ Extended (pop-up) ➞ Recall Acq To Chan-
nel (main) ➞ Recall From File (side) Then use the general purpose knob to
select the exact file from the resulting scrollbar list. Only files with .WF1
extensions are displayed. Finally, press To Ch1, To Ch2, To Ch3, or To Ch4
(side) to complete the operation. You can only select channels in use. Saving or
recalling an acquisition stops acquisitions in process.
To Enable Autosave
To use autosave:
TDS 600B: Press SAVE/RECALL WAVEFORM ➞ Autosave (main) ➞
Autosave Single Seq ON (side).
TDS 500C and TDS 700C: Press SAVE/RECALL WAVEFORM ➞ Normal
(pop-up) ➞ Autosave (main) ➞ Autosave Single Seq ON (side).
Also turn on Single Acquisition Sequence in the Acquire menu. (See Stop After
on page 3–35.)
To disable this feature, simply press Autosave (main) ➞ Autosave Single Seq
OFF (side).
If you enable both autosave and single sequence, the oscilloscope will save all
live channels to reference waveforms at the completion of each single sequence
event. All previous reference waveform data will be erased.
To rearm the oscilloscope for taking a new autosave single acquisition sequence,
press RUN/STOP.
To avoid loss of reference waveforms, you can save them to disk (use the
SAVE/RECALL WAVEFORM menu), before rearming the oscilloscope.
3–159
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
Consider the following operating characteristics when using autosave.
H
H
H
Autosave saves all “live” waveforms; that is, waveforms displayed in CH 1 –
CH 4. To be saved, the live waveforms must be displayed on screen.
Autosave saves each live waveform into the reference memory that
corresponds to the channel (CH 1 to Ref1, CH 2 to Ref2, and so on).
Autosave, when executing, erases all four reference memories. To avoid loss
of important waveforms, you may want to save them to a disk file before
enabling a single acquisition sequence.
H
Autosave is not available in InstaVu mode or if Extended Acquisition is On.
To Run the File Utilities
To run file utilities, see the Managing the File System on page 3–160.
Managing the File System
The TDS Oscilloscope provides file utilities and a floppy disk drive (and
optional hard disk) for saving hardcopies, setups, and waveforms. This section
describes how to manage (delete, rename, etc.) these files using the file system.
Read the sections listed under To Find More Information on page 3–164 for
information on saving hardcopies, setups, and waveforms.
To Access the File Utilities
The File Utilities menu lets you delete, rename, copy, print files, create a new
directory, operate the confirm delete and overwrite lock, and format disks.
To bring up the File Utilities menu:
1. TDS 600B: Press the SAVE/RECALL SETUP button to bring up the
Save/Recall Setup menu, or press SAVE/RECALL WAVEFORM (pop-up)
to bring up the Save/Recall Waveform menu, or press the SHIFT HARD-
COPY button to bring up the Hardcopy menu.
2. TDS 500C and TDS700C: Press the SAVE/RECALL SETUP button to
bring up the Save/Recall Setup menu, or press SAVE/RECALL WAVE-
FORM ➞ Normal or Extended (pop-up) to bring up the Save/Recall
Waveform menu, or press the SHIFT HARDCOPY button to bring up the
Hardcopy menu.
3–160
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
3. Press File Utilities in the main menu to bring up the File Utilities side menu.
(See Figure 3–74.)
NOTE. The amount of free space on the active disk is shown in the upper right
corner of the display. The oscilloscope shows the amount in Kbytes (or in Mbytes
if the free space is 1 Mbyte or more). To convert the amount to bytes, you simply
multiply the Kbytes amount times 1024. Thus, the 690 Kbytes shown in Figure
3–74 = 690 Kbytes x 1024 bytes/Kbyte = 706,560 bytes.
Figure 3–74: File Utilities
3–161
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
To Delete
To delete a file or directory, turn the general purpose knob until it scrolls the
cursor over the line marked with both the name of the file or directory to delete
and the file icon or directory icon as shown to the left of this page. Then, press
the side menu Delete button.
To delete all files in the file list, set the cursor to the *.* selection.
The oscilloscope deletes directories recursively. That means it deletes both the
directories and all their contents.
To Rename
To rename a file or directory, turn the general purpose knob until it scrolls the
cursor over the name of the file or directory to delete. For example, to rename
the target file whose default name is TEK????? set the cursor over its name.
Then, press the side menu Rename button. (See Figure 3–75).
The labeling menu should appear. Turn the general purpose knob or use the
main-menu arrow keys to select each letter. Press Enter Char from the main
menu to enter each letter. When you have entered the name, press the side menu
OK Accept item.
Figure 3–75: File System — Labeling Menu
3–162
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
To Copy
To copy a file or directory, turn the general purpose knob until it scrolls the
cursor over the name of the file to copy. Then, press the side menu Copy button.
The file menu will reappear with the names of directories to copy to. Select a
disk and directory and press the side-menu button labelled Copy <name> to
Selected Directory.
To copy all files, select the *.* entry.
The oscilloscope copies all directories recursively. That means it copies both the
directories and all their contents.
To Print
To print a file, turn the general purpose knob until it scrolls the cursor over the
name of the file to print. Then, press the side-menu Print button.
The Print-to side menu should appear. Select the port to print to from GPIB,
RS-232, or Centronics. Then the oscilloscope will send the file in its raw form
out the port. The device (printer) receiving the file must be capable or printing
the particular file format.
To Create a Directory
To Set Confirm Delete
To create a new directory, press the side menu Create Directory button.
The labeling menu should appear. Turn the general purpose knob or use the
main-menu arrow keys to select each letter. Press Enter Char from the main
menu to enter each letter. When you have entered the name, press the side menu
OK Accept item. (See Figure 3–75.)
To turn on or off the confirm delete message, toggle the side menu Confirm
Delete button.
When the confirm delete option is OFF, the oscilloscope can immediately delete
files or directories. When the confirm option is ON, the oscilloscope warns you
before it deletes files and gives you a chance to reconsider
3–163
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
To Set Overwrite Lock
To turn on or off the file overwrite lock, toggle the side menu Overwrite Lock
button.
When overwrite lock is on, the oscilloscope will not permit you to write over an
existing file of the same name. An important reason to allow overwriting is to let
you write files using a target file name that contains wild card characters (“?”).
This means the oscilloscope creates sequential files whose names are similar
except for the sequential numbers that go in the real name in the place of the
question marks.
To Select a Drive
To Format
To select the floppy disk or the optional hard disk, turn the general purpose knob
until it scrolls the cursor over the line marked with both the name of the drive to
select (fd0: or hd0:) and the disk drive icon as shown to the left of this page.
Then, press SELECT.
To format a 720 Kbyte or 1.44 Mbyte floppy disk or the optional hard disk, turn
the general purpose knob until it scrolls the cursor over the line marked with
both the name of the drive to format (fd0: or hd0:) and the disk drive icon as
shown to the left of this page. Then, press the side menu Format button.
To Find More Information
See Saving and Recalling Setups, on page 3–151.
See Saving and Recalling Waveforms and Acquisitions, on page 3–154.
See Printing a Hardcopy, on page 3–164.
Printing a Hardcopy
The TDS Oscilloscope can provide you with hardcopies of its display. To obtain
a hardcopy, you need to know how to configure the communication and
hardcopy parameters of the oscilloscope, how to connect it to one of the many
hardcopy devices it supports, and how to print the hardcopy. This subsection
describes how to do these tasks and how to save a hardcopy to a disk.
3–164
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
Supported Formats
The oscilloscope prints hardcopies of its display in many formats, which allows
you to choose from a wide variety of hardcopy devices. It also makes it easier for
you to place oscilloscope screen copies into a desktop publishing system. The
oscilloscope supports the following formats:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
HP Thinkjet inkjet printer
HP Deskjet inkjet printer
HP Color Deskjet inkjet printer
HP Laserjet laser printer
Epson
DPU-411/II portable thermal printer
DPU-412 portable thermal printer
PCXR (PC PaintbrushR)
PCX Color (PC PaintbrushR)
TIFFR (Tag Image File Format)
BMPR Mono (Microsoft Windows file format)
BMPR Color (Microsoft Windows file format)
RLE Color (Microsoft Windows color image file format – compressed)
EPS Mono Image (Encapsulated Postscript, mono-image)
EPS Color Image (Encapsulated Postscript, color-image)
EPS Mono Plot (Encapsulated Postscript, mono-plot)
EPS Color Plot (Encapsulated Postscript, color-plot)
Interleaf
HPGL Color Plot
Depending on the output format selected, the oscilloscope creates either an
image or a plot. Images are direct bit map representations of the oscilloscope
display. Plots are vector (plotted) representations of the display.
3–165
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
Some formats, particularly Interleaf, EPS, TIFF, PCX, BMP, and HPGL, are
compatible with various desktop publishing packages. Such compatibility means
you can paste files created from the oscilloscope directly into a document on any
of those desktop publishing systems.
EPS Mono and Color formats are compatible with Tektronix Phaser Color
Printers, HPGL is compatible with the Tektronix HC100 Plotter, and Epson is
compatible with the Tektronix HC200 Printer.
To Set Up for Making
Hardcopies
Before you make a hardcopy, you need to set up communications and hardcopy
parameters. Do the following procedures to set up for making hardcopies.
Set Communications Parameters. To set up the communication parameters for a
printer attached directly to the oscilloscope GPIB, RS-232 or Centronics port:
Press SHIFT ➞ UTILITY ➞ System (main) ➞ I/O (pop-up) ➞ Confi-
gure (main) ➞ Hardcopy (Talk Only) (side). (See Figure 3–76.)
Figure 3–76: Utility Menu — System I/O
3–166
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
Set Hardcopy Parameters. To specify the hardcopy format, layout, and type of
port using the hardcopy menu, do the following steps:
1. Press SHIFT ➞ HARDCOPY MENU to bring up the Hardcopy menu.
2. Press Format (main) ➞ Thinkjet, Deskjet, DeskjetC, Laserjet, Epson,
DPU-411, DPU-412, PCX, PCX Color, TIFF, BMP Mono, BMP Color,
RLE Color, EPS Mono Img, EPS Color Img, EPS Mono Plt, EPS Color
Plt, Interleaf, or HPGL (side). (Press –more– (side) to page through all of
these format choices.)
NOTE. Some formats, such as DeskJetC, require up to several minutes to process
and print the screen When using these formats, be careful not to inadvertently
abort the print by pressing the Hardcopy button for a second print before the
oscilloscope has finished processing and transmitting the first one.
3. Press SHIFT ➞ HARDCOPY MENU ➞ Layout (main) ➞ Landscape or
Portrait (side). (See Figure 3–77.)
Landscape Format
Portrait Format
Figure 3–77: Hardcopy Formats
4. Press SHIFT ➞ HARDCOPY MENU ➞ Palette (main) ➞ Hardcopy or
Current (side) to specify a hardcopy palette. Current uses the current
palette settings to create the hardcopy, while Hardcopy sets the hardcopy
palette to an optimal setting for hardcopy devices.
5. Press SHIFT ➞ HARDCOPY MENU ➞ Port (main) to specify the output
channel to send your hardcopy through. The choices are GPIB, RS–232,
Centronics, and File.
The menu item File chooses the disk drive as the destination for hardcopies.
See To Save to a Disk on page 3–171.
3–167
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
Date/Time Stamp the Hardcopy. You can display the current date and time on
screen so that they appear on the hardcopies you print. To date and time stamp
your hardcopy, do the following steps:
1. Press DISPLAY ➞ Settings (main) ➞ Display (pop-up) ➞ Readout
Options (main) ➞ Display Date and Time (side) to toggle the setting to
On.
2. If you want to set the date and time, skip steps 3 and 4 and continue with
step 1 of Set the Date and Time below. Then redo this procedure.
3. Press Clear Menu to remove the menu from the display so the date and time
can be displayed. (See Figure 3–78.) (The date and time are removed from
the display when menus are displayed.)
4. Once the oscilloscope is connected to a hardcopy device, press
HARDCOPY to print your date/time stamped hardcopy.
Date and Time Display
Figure 3–78: Date and Time Display
3–168
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
Set the Date and Time. You might need to set the date and time of the oscillo-
scope. To set those parameters, do the following steps:
1. Press SHIFT ➞ UTILITY ➞ Config (pop-up) ➞ Set Date &
Time (main) ➞ Year, Day Month, Hour, or Minute (side).
2. Use the general purpose knob or the keypad to set the parameter you have
chosen to the value desired. (The format when using the keypad is
day.month. For example, use 23.6 for the 23rd of June.)
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to set other parameters as desired.
4. Press OK Enter Date/Time (side) to put the new settings into effect. This
sets the seconds to zero.
NOTE. When setting the clock, you can set to a time slightly later than the
current time and wait for it to catch up. When current time catches up to the time
you have set, pressing Ok Enter Date/Time (side) synchronizes the set time to
the current time.
5. Press CLEAR MENU to see the date/time displayed with the new settings.
To Print Directly to a
Hardcopy Device
To make your hardcopies, use the procedures that follow.
Connect to a Hardcopy Device. To connect the oscilloscope directly to a hardcopy
device, determine which interface and cable the device uses, and connect
accordingly. (See Figure 3–79.)
Hardcopy Device
Digitizing Oscilloscope
GPIB, RS-232,
or Centronics Cable
Figure 3–79: Connecting the Oscilloscope Directly to the Hardcopy Device
3–169
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
Some devices, such as the Tektronix HC100 Plotter, use the GPIB interface.
Many printers, such as the Tektronix HC200, use Centronics interfaces. Many
hardcopy devices, including the HC100 and HC200 with option 03, provide
RS-232 support. (Check the documentation for your hardcopy device.)
Print. To print a single hardcopy or send additional hardcopies to the oscilloscope
spool (queue) while waiting for earlier hardcopies to finish printing, press
HARDCOPY.
While the hardcopy is being sent to the printer, the oscilloscope will display the
message “Hardcopy in process — Press HARDCOPY to abort.”
Abort. To stop and discard the hardcopy being sent, press HARDCOPY again
while the hardcopy in process message is still on screen.
Add to the Spool. To add additional hardcopies to the printer spool, press
HARDCOPY again after the hardcopy in process message is removed from the
screen.
You can add hardcopies to the spool until it is full. When adding a hardcopy fills
the spool, the message “Hardcopy in Process—Press HARDCOPY to abort”
remains displayed. You can abort only the last hardcopy sent by pressing the
button while the message is still displayed. When the printer empties enough of
the spool to finish adding the last hardcopy, it does so and then removes the
message.
Clear the Spool. To remove all hardcopies from the spool, press SHIFT ➞
HARDCOPY MENU ➞ Clear Spool (main) ➞ OK Confirm Clear Spool
(side).
The oscilloscope takes advantage of any unused RAM when spooling hardcopies
to printers. The size of the spool is, therefore, variable. The number of hardco-
pies that can be spooled depends on three variables:
H
H
H
The amount of unused RAM
The hardcopy format chosen
The complexity of the display
3–170
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
Although not guaranteed, usually about 2.5 hardcopies can be spooled before the
oscilloscope must wait to send the rest of the third copy.
To Save to a Disk
To send hardcopies to a disk, do the following steps:
1. Set up the oscilloscope communication and hardware parameters as outlined
in To Set Up for Making Hardcopies on page 3–166.
2. If saving to a floppy disk, insert a formatted 720 Kbyte or 1.44 Mbyte floppy
disk into the slot at the left of the oscilloscope display.
NOTE. To format disks, delete hardcopy files you save to disk, and otherwise
manage the disk storage, see Managing the File System on page 3–160.
3. Press SHIFT ➞ HARDCOPY MENU ➞ Port (main) ➞ File (side) to
specify that any hardcopy be output to a disk file. The file list and its
scrollbar will appear.
4. Turn the general purpose knob to place the scroll bar over the file in which to
store the hardcopy.
NOTE. Upon power on, the oscilloscope creates the “wild card” file
TEK?????.FMT for storing hardcopies, where “.FMT” is replaced by the
hardcopy format you select. Selecting this file and pressing Hardcopy stores a
hardcopy in a uniquely named, sequentially numbered file. For instance, the
oscilloscope saves the first hardcopy you save to the file TEK00001.FMT, the
second to TEK00002.FMT, and so on.
5. Press HARDCOPY to print your hardcopy to the selected file.
Saving files to the disk provides a convenient way to store hardcopies. You can
print hardcopies stored on disk at a site remote from where the hardcopies were
captured. Or you might load stored hardcopies from disk into your desktop
publishing software that runs on a PC-compatible computer.
3–171
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
To Print Using a Controller
To make your hardcopies, use the procedures that follow.
Connect to a Hardcopy Device. To connect a controller with two ports between the
oscilloscope and the hardcopy device, connect from the oscilloscope GPIB
connector (rear panel) to the controller GPIB port and from the controller
RS-232 or Centronics port to the hardcopy device. (See Figure 3–80.) Use the
GPIB port to remotely request and receive a hardcopy from the oscilloscope. Use
the RS-232 or the Centronics port on the controller to print output.
Hardcopy Device
Digitizing Oscilloscope
PC Compatible
Centronics or
RS-232 Cable
GPIB Cable
Figure 3–80: Connecting the Oscilloscope and Hardcopy Device Via a PC
Print. If your controller is PC-compatible and it uses the Tektronix GURUT or
S3FG210 (National Instruments GPIB-PCII/IIA) GPIB package, do the
following steps to print a hardcopy:
1. Use the MS-DOS cd command to move to the directory that holds the
software that came with your GPIB board. For example, if you installed the
software in the GPIB-PC directory, type: cd GPIB–PC.
2. Run the IBIC program that came with your GPIB board. Type: IBIC.
3. Type: IBFIND DEV1 where “DEV1” is the name for the oscilloscope you
defined using the IBCONF.EXE program that came with the GPIB board.
3–172
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
NOTE. If you defined another name, use it instead of “DEV1”. Also, remember
that the device address of the oscilloscope as set with the IBCONF.EXE program
should match the address set in the oscilloscope Utility menu (typically, use
“1”).
4. Type: IBWRT “HARDCOPY START”
NOTE. Be sure the oscilloscope Utility menu is set to Talk/Listen and not
Hardcopy (Talk Only) or you will get an error message at this step. Setting the
oscilloscope Utility menu is described under Set Communication Parameters on
page 3–166.
5. Type: IBRDF <Filename> where <Filename> is a valid DOS file name with
which you want to label your hardcopy file. It should be v8 characters long
and up to a 3 character extension. For example, you could type “ibrdf
screen1”.
6. Exit the IBIC program by typing: EXIT
7. Copy the data from your file to your hardcopy device. Type:
COPY <Filename> <Output port> </B> where:
<Filename> is the name you defined in step 5 and
<Output port> is the PC output port your hardcopy device is connected to
(such as LPT1 or LPT2).
For example, to copy (print) a file called screen1 to a printer attached to the
lpt1 parallel port, type “copy screen1 lpt1: /B”.
Your hardcopy device should now print a picture of the oscilloscope screen.
NOTE. If you transmit hardcopy files across a computer network, use a binary
(8-bit) data path.
3–173
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
Communicating with Remote Instruments
The TDS Oscilloscope can connect into a system environment, so that you can
control it remotely or exchange measurement or waveform data between it and a
computer. This subsection explains how to prepare and setup the oscilloscope for
control and operation over the IEEE Std 488.2-1987 (GPIB) interface.
To Prepare for Remote
Operation
To transfer data between the oscilloscope and other instruments over the GPIB,
do the following tasks to make sure the instruments support GPIB protocols and
observe GPIB Interface requirements.
Check for GPIB Protocols. Make sure the instruments to be connected support the
GPIB protocols. These protocols cover:
H
H
H
H
Remote instrument control
Bidirectional data transfer
Device compatibility
Status and event reporting
To simplify the development of GPIB systems, include instruments that use
Tektronix defined codes and formats for messages that travel over the GPIB.
Each device that follows these codes and formats, such as this oscilloscope,
supports standard commands. Use of instruments that support these commands
can greatly simplify development of GPIB systems.
Know the GPIB Interface Requirements. To prepare to connect the oscilloscope to
GPIB networks, read and follow these rules:
H
H
Connect no more than 15 devices, including the controller, to a single bus.
Connect one device load every two meters (about six feet) of cable length to
maintain bus electrical characteristics. (Generally, each instrument represents
one device load on the bus.)
H
Do not exceed 20 meters (about 65 feet) of the total cumulative cable length.
3–174
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
H
H
Turn on at least two-thirds of the device loads present when you use your
network.
Include only one cable path between devices on your network. (See
Figure 3–81.) Do not create loop configurations.
GPIB Device
GPIB Device
GPIB Device
GPIB Device
GPIB Device
GPIB Device
GPIB Device
Figure 3–81: Typical GPIB Network Configuration
Obtain the Proper Interconnect Cabling. To connect the oscilloscope to a GPIB
network, obtain at least one GPIB cable. Connecting two GPIB devices requires
an IEEE Std 488.1-1987 GPIB cable (available from Tektronix, part number
012-0991-00).
The standard GPIB cable connects to a 24-pin GPIB connector located on the
rear panel of the oscilloscope. The connector has a D-type shell and conforms to
IEEE Std 488.1-1987. You can stack GPIB connectors on top of each other. (See
Figure 3–82.)
3–175
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
Figure 3–82: Stacking GPIB Connectors
To Set Up for Remote
Operation
To set up remote communications, be sure your setup will meet GPIB protocol
and interface requirements just described. Then do the following procedures.
Connect the Oscilloscope to the GPIB. To connect the oscilloscope, plug an IEEE
Std 488.2-1987 GPIB cable into the GPIB connector on the oscilloscope rear
panel and into the GPIB port on your controller. (See Figure 3–83.)
Controller
Digitizing Oscilloscope (Rear Panel)
GPIB Connector
Figure 3–83: Connecting the Oscilloscope to a Controller
Select GPIB Port. To select the GPIB port, press SHIFT ➞ UTILITY ➞
System (main) ➞ I/O (pop-up) ➞ Port (main) ➞ GPIB (pop-up).
3–176
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
Configure the GPIB Port. You must set two important GPIB parameters: mode
and address. To set those parameters:
Press SHIFT ➞ UTILITY ➞ System (main) ➞ I/O (pop-up) ➞ Port (main) ➞
GPIB (pop-up) ➞ Configure (main) ➞ Talk/Listen Address, Hardcopy (Talk
Only), or Off Bus (side). (See Figure 3–84.)
Talk/Listen Address configures the port for controller-based system operation.
Use the general purpose knob or the keypad to define the address.
Hardcopy (Talk Only) configures the port for the hardcopy output without
controller supervision. Once so configured, the oscilloscope will send the
hardcopy data to any listeners on the bus when the HARDCOPY button is
pressed.
Pressing HARDCOPY with the port configured any other way causes an error,
and the oscilloscope responds with a message saying the selected hardcopy port
is currently unavailable.
Off Bus disconnects the oscilloscope from the bus.
GPIB Configuration Menu
Figure 3–84: Utility Menu
3–177
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Waveforms and Setups
To Find More Information
See Printing a Hardcopy, on page 3–164.
See the TDS Programmer Manual disk.
3–178
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Determining Status and Accessing Help
The TDS Oscilloscope can display the status of its internal systems. It also
provides an on-line help system. This section describes how to use the following
two features:
H
H
Status which displays a snapshot of system, display, trigger, waveform, and
I/O settings
Help which displays a screen of brief information about each oscilloscope
control when that control is operated
Displaying Status
To display the status of the internal systems, perform the following steps:
1. Press SHIFT STATUS ➞ Status (main).
2. Select a status snapshot from the side menu:
System displays information about the Horizontal, Zoom, Acquisition, Measure,
and Hardcopy systems. (See Figure 3–85.) This display also tells you the
firmware version.
Display provides parameter information about the display and color systems.
Trigger displays parameter information about the triggers.
Waveforms displays information about waveforms, including live, math, and
reference waveforms.
I/O displays information about the I/O port(s).
Histo/Masks displays information about histograms and masks.
3–179
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Determining Status and Accessing Help
Firmware Version
Figure 3–85: Status Menu — System
3–180
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Determining Status and Accessing Help
Displaying the Banner
To display the banner (lists firmware version, options, copyright, and patents):
Press SHIFT STATUS ➞ Banner (main). (See Figure 3–86.)
Figure 3–86: Banner Display
Displaying Help
To use the on-line help system:
Press HELP to provide on-screen information on any front panel button, knob or
menu item. (See Figure 3–87.)
3–181
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Determining Status and Accessing Help
Figure 3–87: Initial Help Screen
When you press that button, the instrument changes mode to support on-line
help. Press HELP again to return to regular operating mode. Whenever the
oscilloscope is in help mode, pressing any button (except HELP or SHIFT),
turning any knob, or pressing any menu item displays help text on the screen that
discusses that control.
The menu selections that were displayed when HELP was first pressed remain on
the screen. On-line help is available for each menu selection displayed at the
time the HELP button was first pressed. If you are in help mode and want to see
help on selections from menus not displayed, you first exit help mode, display
the menu you want information on, and press HELP again to re-enter help mode.
3–182
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
The TDS Oscilloscope provides powerful features for testing and digitally proces-
sing the waveforms you acquire. This section describes how to use the following
features:
H
H
H
H
H
Limit Testing — for testing the waveforms you acquire against a template
you create (on this page)
Waveform Math — for inverting, adding, subtracting, and multiplying of
waveforms (see page 3–188)
Fast Fourier Transforms — for displaying the frequency content of
waveforms (see page 3–191)
Waveform Differentiation — for displaying the derivative of a waveform
(see page 3–210)
Waveform Integration — for displaying the integral of a waveform (see
page 3–215)
NOTE. If InstaVu, Extended Acquisition, or Masks mode is on, the features listed
above are not available.
Limit Testing
The TDS Oscilloscope provides limit testing, which can automatically compare each
incoming or math waveform against a template waveform. You set an envelope of
limits around a waveform and the oscilloscope finds waveforms that fall outside
those limits. (See Figure 3–88.) When it finds such a waveform, the oscilloscope
can generate a hardcopy, ring a bell, and stop and wait for your input.
To use limit testing, you must do four tasks:
H
H
H
H
Create the limit test template from a waveform.
Specify the channel to compare to the template.
Specify the action to take if incoming waveform data exceeds the set limits.
Turn limit testing on so that the parameters you have specified will take
effect.
3–183
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
Figure 3–88: Comparing a Waveform to a Limit Template
To do the tasks just listed, do the following procedures:
To Create Limit Test
Template
To use an incoming or stored waveform to create the limit test template, first you
select a source and specify a template destination. Then you create the template
envelope by specifying the amount of variation from template you will tolerate.
To do these tasks, perform the following steps:
1. Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU to bring up the Acquire menu.
2. Press Create Limit Test Template (main) ➞ Template Source (side) ➞
Ch1, Ch2, Math1, Math2, Math3, Ref1, Ref2, Ref3, or Ref4 (side). (See
Figure 3–89.)
NOTE. The template will be smoother if you acquire the template waveform using
Average acquisition mode. If you are unsure how to select Average, see Selecting
an Acquisition Mode on page 3–33.
3. Once you have selected a source, select a destination for the template: press
Template Destination (side) ➞ Ref1, Ref2, Ref3, or Ref4.
3–184
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
Figure 3–89: Acquire Menu — Create Limit Test Template
4. Press ±V Limit (side). Enter the vertical (voltage) tolerance value using the
general purpose knob or keypad.
5. Press ±H Limit (side). Enter the horizontal (time) tolerance value using the
general purpose knob or keypad.
Tolerance values are expressed in fractions of a major division. They
represent the amount by which incoming waveform data can deviate without
having exceeded the limits set in the limit test. The range is from 0 (the
incoming waveform must be exactly like the template source) to 5 major
divisions of tolerance.
6. When you have finished specifying the limit test template, press OK Store
Template (side). This action stores the specified waveform in the specified
destination, using the specified tolerances. Until you have done so, the
template waveform has been defined but not created.
To avoid overwriting the template you have just created, store any new
template you create in a different destination from that just stored.
3–185
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
To view the template you have created, press the MORE button. Then press
the button corresponding to the destination reference memory you have used.
The waveform appears on the display.
NOTE. To view the waveform data as well as the template envelope, it might be
useful to select the Dots display style. (See Select the Display Style on
page 3–39.)
To Select a Limit Test
Source
Now specify the channel that will acquire the waveforms to be compared against
the template you have created:
1. Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU ➞ Limit Test Sources (main) ➞
Compare Ch1 to, Compare Ch2 to, Compare Ch3 to, Compare Ch4 to,
Compare Math1 to, Compare Math2 to or Compare Math3 to (side).
2. Once you have selected one of the four channels or a math waveform as a
waveform source from the side menu, press the same side menu button to
select one of the reference memories in which you have stored a template.
Valid selections are any of the four reference waveforms Ref1 through Ref4
or None. Choosing None turns limit testing off for the specified channel or
math waveform.
NOTE. Specify the same reference memory you chose as the template destination
if you want to use the template you just created.
If you have created more than one template, you can compare one channel to
one template and the other channel to another template.
To Specify the Limit Test
Response
Now specify the action to take if waveform data exceeds the limits set by the
limit test template and turn on limit testing:
1. Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU ➞ Limit Test Setup (main) to bring up a
side menu of possible actions.
3–186
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
2. Ensure that the side button corresponding to the desired action reads ON.
H
If you want to send a hardcopy command when waveform data exceeds
the limits set, toggle Hardcopy if Condition Met (side) to ON. You can
set the hardcopy system to send the hardcopy to the file system. (Do not
forget to set up the hardcopy system. See Hardcopy on page 3–164 for
details.)
H
H
If you want the bell to ring when waveform data exceeds the limits set,
toggle Ring Bell if Condition Met (side) to ON.
If you want the oscilloscope to stop when waveform data exceeds the
limits set, toggle Stop After Limit Test Condition Met (side) to ON.
NOTE. The button labeled Stop After Limit Test Condition Met corresponds to the
Limit Test Condition Met menu item in the Stop After main menu. You can turn
this button on in the Limit Test Setup menu, but you cannot turn it off. To turn it
off, press Stop After and specify one of the other choices in the Stop After side
menu.
3. Ensure that Limit Test (side) reads ON. If it reads OFF, press Limit Test
(side) once to toggle it to ON.
When you set Limit Test to ON, the oscilloscope compares incoming
waveforms against the waveform template stored in reference memory
according to the settings in the Limit Test Sources side menu.
Single Waveform
Comparisons
You can compare a single waveform against a single template. When making a
single waveform versus a single template comparison, consider the following
operating characteristics:
H
H
The waveform will be repositioned horizontally to move the first sample in
the waveform record that is outside of template limits to center screen.
The position of the waveform template will track that of the waveform.
3–187
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
Multiple Waveform
Comparisons
You can also compare more than one waveform against a single template, or
more than one waveform with each one compared against its own template or a
common template. When setting up for such comparisons, consider the following
operating characteristics:
H
You should set Horizontal Lock to None in the Zoom side menu (push
ZOOM and press (repeatedly) Horizontal Lock to None). See Zoom a
Waveform, on page 3–51 for more information on horizontal lock.
H
With horizontal lock set as just described, the oscilloscope will reposition
each waveform horizontally to move the first sample in the waveform record
that is outside of template limits to center screen.
H
H
If you are comparing each waveform to its own template, the position of
each waveform template will track that of its waveform.
If you are comparing two or more waveforms to a common template, that
template will track the position of the failed waveform. If more than one
waveform fails during the same acquisition, the template will track the
position of the waveform in the highest numbered channel. For example,
CH 2 is higher than CH 1.
Waveform Math
The TDS Oscilloscope provides a means for you to mathematically manipulate
your waveforms. For example, you might have a waveform clouded by
background noise. You can obtain a cleaner waveform by subtracting the
background noise from your original waveform.
This section describes the invert, add, subtract, divide, and multiply waveform
math features. See Fast Fourier Transforms on page 3–191, Waveform Differ-
entiation on page 3–210, and Waveform Integration on page 3–215 for informa-
tion on Advanced DSP Math features.
3–188
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
To Use Single Wfm Math
To perform waveform math, use the More menu (Figure 3–90). The More menu
allows you to display, define, and manipulate three math waveforms; the
following steps explain how to create a math waveform based on a single source
waveform:
1. Press MORE ➞ Math1, Math2, or Math3 (main) ➞ Change Math
waveform definition (side) ➞ Single Wfm Math (main).
2. To define the source waveform, press Set Single Source to (side) repeatedly
to cycle it to the desired channel or reference waveform.
Figure 3–90: More Menu
3. Press Set Function to (side) repeatedly to cycle it to inv (invert), intg, or
diff. Waveform integration (intg) is described on page 3–215, and waveform
differentiation (diff) is described on page 3–210.
4. To create the math waveform, press OK Create Math Wfm (side).
3–189
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
To Use Dual Wfm Math
To create a math waveform that requires two waveform sources, do the following
steps:
1. Press MORE ➞ Math1, Math2, or Math3 (main) ➞ Change Math
waveform definition (side) ➞ Dual Wfm Math (main).
2. To define the first source waveform, press Set 1st Source to (side) repeated-
ly to cycle it to the desired channel or reference waveform.
3. To define the second source waveform, press Set 2nd Source to (side)
repeatedly to cycle it to the desired channel or reference waveform.
4. To enter the math operator, press Set operator to (side) repeatedly to cycle it
through the choices. Supported operators are +, –, * and /.
NOTE. If you select *, for multiply, in step 4, the cursor feature will measure
amplitude in the units volts squared, VV, rather than in volts, V.
Figure 3–91: Dual Waveform Math Main and Side Menus
5. Press OK Create Math Wfm (side) to perform the function.
3–190
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
To Average a Math
Waveform
You can also select whether or not you wish to average a certain math waveform;
to do so, perform the following steps:
1. Press MORE ➞ Math1, Math2, or Math3 (main) to select the math
waveform to be averaged.
2. Press Average (side) and enter a value with the general purpose knob or the
keypad. Any math operations you select for the waveform are performed on
an average of multiple acquisitions.
3. To turn off math averaging for the selected math waveform, press No
Extended Processing (side). Any math operations you select for the
waveform are performed on only one acquisition.
Fast Fourier Transforms
The Advanced DSP Math capabilities of the TDS Oscilloscope include taking
the Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) of a waveform. This section describes FFTs
and how to set up the oscilloscope to display and measure FFTs.
The FFT allows you to transform a waveform from a display of its amplitude
against time to one that plots the amplitudes of the various discrete frequencies
the waveform contains. Further, you can also display the phase shifts of those
frequencies. Use FFT math waveforms in the following applications:
H
Testing impulse response of filters and systems
Measuring harmonic content and distortion in systems
Characterizing the frequency content of DC power supplies
Analyzing vibration
H
H
H
H
H
Analyzing harmonics in 50 and 60 cycle lines
Identifying noise sources in digital logic circuits
3–191
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
The FFT computes and displays the frequency content of a waveform you
acquire as an FFT math waveform. This frequency domain waveform is based on
the following equation:
N
* 1
2
j2pnk
N
*
1
N
X(k) +
x(n)e
for : k + 0 to N * 1
S
* N
2
n +
Where:
x(n) is a point in the time domain record data array
X(k) is a point in the frequency domain record data array
n is the index to the time domain data array
k is the index to the frequency domain data array
N is the FFT length
j is the square root of −1
The resulting waveform is a display of the magnitude or phase angle of the
various frequencies the waveform contains with respect to those frequencies. For
example, Figure 3–92 shows the untransformed impulse response of a system in
channel 2 at the top of the screen. The FFT-transformed magnitude and phase
appear in the two math waveforms below the impulse. The horizontal scale for
FFT math waveforms is always expressed in frequency per division with the
beginning (left-most point) of the waveform representing zero frequency (DC).
The FFT waveform is based on digital signal processing (DSP) of data, which
allows more versatility in measuring the frequency content of waveforms. For
example, DSP allows the oscilloscope to compute FFTs of source waveforms
that must be acquired based on a single trigger, making it useful for measuring
the frequency content of single events. DSP also allows the phase as well as the
magnitude to be displayed.
3–192
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
Normal Waveform of an
Impulse Response
FFT Waveform of the
Magnitude Response
FFT Waveform of the
Phase Response
Figure 3–92: System Response to an Impulse
To Create an FFT
To obtain an FFT of your waveform, do the following steps:
1. Connect the waveform to the desired channel input and select that channel.
2. Adjust the vertical and horizontal scales and trigger the display (or press
AUTOSET).
The topic Offset, Position, and Scale, on page 3–201, provides in depth
information about optimizing your setup for FFT displays.
3. Press MORE to access the menu for turning on math waveforms.
4. Select a math waveform. Your choices are Math1, Math2, and
Math3 (main).
5. If the selected math waveform is not FFT, press Change Math Definition
(side) ➞ FFT (main). See Figure 3–93.
6. Press Set FFT Source to (side) repeatedly until the channel source selected
in step 1 appears in the menu label.
3–193
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
Figure 3–93: Define FFT Waveform Menu
7. Press Set FFT Vert Scale to (side) repeatedly to choose from the following
vertical scale types:
dBV RMS — Magnitude is displayed using log scale, expressed in dB
relative to 1 VRMS where 0 dB =1 VRMS
.
Linear RMS — Magnitude is displayed using voltage as the scale.
Phase (deg) — Phase is displayed using degrees as the scale, where degrees
wrap from –180_ to +180_.
Phase (rad) — Phase is displayed using radians as the scale, where radians
wrap from –p to +p.
The topic Considerations for Phase Displays, on page 3–204, provides in
depth information on setup for phase displays.
3–194
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
8. Press Set FFT Window to (side) repeatedly to choose from the following
window types:
Rectangular — Best type of window for resolving frequencies that are very
close to the same value but worst for accurately measuring the amplitude of
those frequencies. Best type for measuring the frequency spectrum of
nonrepetitive signals and measuring frequency components near DC.
Hamming — Very good window for resolving frequencies that are very
close to the same value with somewhat improved amplitude accuracy over
the rectangular window.
Hanning — Very good window for measuring amplitude accuracy but
degraded for resolving frequencies.
Blackman-Harris — Best window for measuring the amplitude of
frequencies but worst at resolving frequencies.
The topic Selecting a Window, on page 3–207, provides in depth information
on choosing the right window for your application.
9. If you did not select Phase (deg) or Phase (rad) in step 7, skip to step 12.
Phase suppression is only used to reduce noise in phase FFTs.
10. If you need to reduce the effect of noise in your phase FFT, press Suppress
phase at amplitudes < (side).
11. Use the general purpose knob to adjust the phase suppression level. FFT
magnitudes below this level will have their phase set to zero.
The topic Adjust Phase Suppression, on page 3–205, provides additional
information on phase suppression.
12. Press OK Create Math Wfm (side) to display the FFT of the waveform you
input in step 1. (See Figure 3–94.)
3–195
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
Figure 3–94: FFT Math Waveform in Math1
To Take Cursor
Measurements of an FFT
Once you have displayed an FFT math waveform, use cursors to measure its
frequency amplitude or phase angle.
1. Be sure MORE is selected in the channel selection buttons and that the FFT
math waveform is selected in the More main menu.
2. Press CURSOR ➞ Mode (main) ➞ Independent (side) ➞ Func-
tion (main) ➞ H Bars (side).
3. Use the general purpose knob to align the selected cursor (solid line) to the
top (or to any amplitude on the waveform you choose).
4. Press SELECT to select the other cursor. Use the general purpose knob to
align the selected cursor to the bottom (or to any amplitude on the waveform
you choose).
5. Read the amplitude between the two cursors from the D: readout. Read the
amplitude of the selected cursor relative to either 1 VRMS (0 dB), ground
(0 volts), or the zero phase level (0 degrees or 0 radians) from the @:
readout. (The waveform reference indicator at the left side of the graticule
indicates the level where phase is zero for phase FFTs.)
3–196
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
Figure 3–95 shows the cursor measurement of a frequency magnitude on an
FFT. The @: readout reads 0 dB because it is aligned with the 1 VRMS level.
The D: readout reads 24.4 dB indicating the magnitude of the frequency it is
measuring is –24.4 dB relative to 1 VRMS. The source waveform is turned
off in the display.
The cursor units will be in dB or volts for FFTs measuring magnitude and in
degrees or radians for those FFTs measuring phase. The cursor unit depends
on the selection made for Set FFT Vert Scale to (side). See step 7 on page
3–194 for more information.
Figure 3–95: Cursor Measurement of an FFT Waveform
6. Press V Bars (side). Use the general purpose knob to align one of the two
vertical cursors to a point of interest along the horizontal axis of the
waveform.
7. Press SELECT to select the alternate cursor.
8. Align the selected cursor to another point of interest on the math waveform.
3–197
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
9. Read the frequency difference between the cursors from the D: readout. Read
the frequency of the selected cursor relative to the zero frequency point from
the @: readout.
The cursor units will always be in Hz, regardless of the setting in the Time
Units side menu. The first point of the FFT record is the zero frequency
point for the @: readout.
10. Press Function (main) ➞ Paired (side).
11. Use the technique just outlined to place the vertical bar of each paired cursor
to the points along the horizontal axis you are interested in.
12. Read the amplitude between the X of the two paired cursors from the
top-most D: readout. Read the amplitude of the short horizontal bar of the
selected (solid) cursor relative to either 1 VRMS (0 dB), ground (0 volts), or
zero phase level (0 degrees or 0 radians) from the @: readout. Read the
frequency between the long horizontal bars of both paired cursors from the
bottom D: readout.
To Take Automated
Measurements of an FFT
You can use automated measurements to measure FFT math waveforms. Use the
procedure To Take Automated Measurements found in Waveform Differentiation
on page 3–212.
The FFT Frequency
Domain Record
There are several characteristics of FFTs that affect how they are displayed and
should be interpreted. Read this topic to learn about the FFT frequency domain
record — how the source waveform relates to the record length, frequency
resolution, and frequency range of that record. (The FFT frequency domain
waveform is the FFT math waveform that you display.) Continue reading the
topics that follow to learn how to optimize the oscilloscope setup for good
display of your FFT waveforms.
FFTs May Not Use All of the Waveform Record. The FFT math waveform is a
display of the magnitude or phase data from the FFT frequency domain record. This
frequency domain record is derived from the FFT time domain record, which is
derived from the waveform record. All three records are described below.
3–198
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
Waveform Record — the complete waveform record acquired from an input
channel and displayed from the same channel or a reference memory. The length
of this time domain record is user-specified from the Horizontal menu. The
waveform record is not a DSP Math waveform.
FFT Time Domain Record — that part of the waveform record input to the FFT.
This time domain record waveform becomes the FFT math waveform after it’s
transformed. Its record length depends on the length of the waveform record defined
above.
FFT Frequency Domain Record — the FFT math waveform after digital signal
processing converts data from the FFT time domain record into a frequency
domain record.
Figure 3–96 compares the waveform record to the FFT time domain record. Note
the following relationships:
H
H
H
H
For waveform records ≤10 K points in length, the FFT uses all of the
waveform record as input.
For waveform records >10 K points, the first 10 K points of the waveform
record becomes the FFT time domain record.
Each FFT time domain record starts at the beginning of the acquired
waveform record.
The zero phase reference point for a phase FFT math waveform is in the middle
of the FFT time domain record regardless of the waveform record length.
FFT Time Domain Record =
Waveform Record
Waveform Record ≤ 10 K
Zero Phase
Reference
FFT Time Domain Record = 10k
Waveform Record > 10 K
Zero Phase
Reference
Figure 3–96: Waveform Record vs. FFT Time Domain Record
3–199
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
FFTs Transform Time Records to Frequency Records. The FFT time domain
record just described is input for the FFT. Figure 3–97 shows the transformation
of that time domain data record into an FFT frequency domain record. The
resulting frequency domain record is one half the length of the FFT input
because the FFT computes both positive and negative frequencies. Since the
negative values mirror the positive values, only the positive values are displayed.
FFT Time Domain Record
FFT
FFT Frequency Domain Record
Figure 3–97: FFT Time Domain Record vs. FFT Frequency Domain Record
FFT Frequency Range and Resolution. When you turn on an FFT waveform, the
oscilloscope displays either the magnitude or phase angle of the FFT frequency
domain record. The resolution between the discrete frequencies displayed in this
waveform is determined by the following equation:
Sample Rate
DF +
FFT Length
Where:
DF is the frequency resolution.
Sample Rate is the sample rate of the source waveform.
FFT Length is the length of the FFT Time Domain waveform
record.
The sample rate also determines the range these frequencies span; they span from
1
1
0 to
@
2 the sample rate of the waveform record. (The value of 2@ the sample rate is
often referred to as the Nyquist frequency or point.) For example, a sample rate
of 20 Megasamples per second would yield an FFT with a range of 0 to 10 MHz.
The sample rates available for acquiring data records vary over a range. TDS
oscilloscopes display the sample rate in the acquisition readout at the top of the
oscilloscope screen.
3–200
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
Offset, Position, and Scale
The following topics contain information to help you display your FFT properly.
Adjust for a Non-Clipped Display. To properly display your FFT waveform, scale
the source waveform so it is not clipped.
H
You should scale and position the source waveform so it is contained on
screen. (Off-screen waveforms may be clipped, resulting in errors in the FFT
waveform).
Alternately, to get maximum vertical resolution, you can display source
waveforms with amplitudes up to two divisions greater than that of the
screen. If you do, turn on Pk-Pk in the measurement menu and monitor the
source waveform for clipping.
H
Use vertical position and vertical offset to position your source waveform.
As long as the source waveform is not clipped, its vertical position and
vertical offset will not affect your FFT waveform except at DC. (DC
correction is discussed below.)
Adjust Offset and Position to Zero for DC Correction. Normally, the output of a
standard FFT computation yields a DC value that is twice as large as it should be
with respect to the other frequencies. Also, the selection of window type
introduces errors in the DC value of an FFT.
The displayed output of the FFT on TDS oscilloscopes is corrected for these
errors to show the true value for the DC component of the input signal. The
Position and Offset must be set to zero for the source waveform in the Vertical
menu. When measuring the amplitude at DC, remember that 1 VDC equals
1 VRMS and the display is in dB.
Record Length
Most often, you will want to use a short record length because more of the FFT
waveform can be seen on screen and long record lengths can slow oscilloscope
response. However, long record lengths lower the noise relative to the signal and
increase the frequency resolution for the FFT. More important, they might be
needed to capture the waveform feature you want to include in the FFT.
3–201
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
To speed up oscilloscope response when using long record lengths, you can save
your source waveform in a reference memory and perform an FFT on the saved
waveform. That way the DSP will compute the FFT based on saved, static data
and will only update if you save a new waveform.
Acquisition Mode
Selecting the right acquisition mode can produce less noisy FFTs.
Set up in Sample. Use sample mode until you have set up and turned on your
FFT. Sample mode can acquire repetitive and nonrepetitive waveforms and does
not affect the frequency response of the source waveform.
Hi Res and Average Reduce Noise. If the pulse is repetitive, Average mode may be
used to reduce noise in the signal at a cost of slower display response. Average
operates on repetitive waveforms only, and averaging does affect the frequency
response of the source waveform.
For TDS 500C and TDS 700C models only, after the FFT is set up and dis-
played, you can to turn on Hi Res mode to reduce the effect of noise in the
signal. Hi Res operates on both repetitive and nonrepetitive waveforms;
however, it does affect the frequency response of the source waveform.
Peak Detect and Envelope Add Distortion. Peak Detect and Envelope mode can
add significant distortion to the FFT results and are not recommended for use
with FFTs.
Zoom and Interpolation
Once you have your waveform displayed optimally, you may magnify (or
reduce) it vertically and horizontally to inspect any feature you desire. Just be
sure the FFT waveform is the selected waveform. (Press MORE, then select the
FFT waveform in the More main menu. Then use the Vertical and Horizontal
SCALE knobs to adjust the math waveform size.)
If you wish to see the zoom factor (2X, 5X, etc.) you need to turn Zoom on:
press ZOOM ➞ On (side). The vertical and horizontal zoom factors appear on
screen.
3–202
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
Whether Zoom is on or off, you can press Reset (main) ➞ Reset Live Factors
or Reset All Factors (side) to return the zoomed FFT waveform to no magnifi-
cation.
Zoom always uses either sin(x)/x or linear interpolation when expanding
displayed waveforms. To select the interpolation method: press DISPLAY ➞
Setting (main) ➞ Display (pop-up) ➞ Filter (main) ➞ Sin(x)/x or Linear
(side).
If the source waveform record length is 500 points, the FFT will use 2X Zoom to
increase the 250 point FFT frequency domain record to 500 points. Therefore,
FFT math waveforms of 500 point waveforms are always zoomed 2X or more
with interpolation. Waveforms with other record lengths can be zoomed or not
and can have minimum Zooms of 1X or less.
Sin(x)/x interpolation may distort the magnitude and phase displays of the FFT
depending on which window was used. You can easily check the effects of the
interpolation by switching between sin(x)/x and linear interpolation and
observing the difference in measurement results on the display. If significant
differences occur, use linear interpolation.
Undersampling (Aliasing)
Aliasing occurs when the oscilloscope acquires a source waveform with
frequency components outside of the frequency range for the current sample rate.
In the FFT waveform, the actual higher frequency components are under-
sampled, and therefore, they appear as lower frequency aliases that “fold back”
around the Nyquist point. (See Figure 3–98.)
1
The greatest frequency that can be input into any sampler without aliasing is
the sample frequency. Since source waveforms often have a fundamental
@
2
frequency that does not alias but have harmonic frequencies that do, you should
have methods for recognizing and dealing with aliases:
H
Be aware that a source waveform with fast edge transition times creates
many high frequency harmonics. These harmonics typically decrease in
amplitude as their frequency increases.
H
Sample the source signal at rates that are at least 2X that of the highest
frequency component having significant amplitude.
3–203
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
H
H
Filter the input to bandwidth limit it to frequencies below that of the Nyquist
frequency.
Recognize and ignore the aliased frequencies.
If you think you have aliased frequencies in your FFT, select the source channel
and adjust the horizontal scale to increase the sample rate. Since you increase the
Nyquist frequency as you increase the sample rate, the alias signals should
appear at their proper frequency.
Nyquist Frequency
Point
Frequency
Aliased Frequencies
Actual Frequencies
Figure 3–98: How Aliased Frequencies Appear in an FFT
Considerations for Phase
Displays
When you set up an FFT math waveform to display the phase angle of the
frequencies contained in a waveform, you should take into account the reference
point the phase is measured against. You may also need to use phase suppression
to reduce noise in your FFTs.
Establish a Zero Phase Reference Point. The phase of each frequency is measured
with respect to the zero phase reference point. The zero reference point is the
point at the center of the FFT math waveform but corresponds to various points
on the source (time domain) record. (See Figure 3–96 on page 3–199.)
3–204
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
To measure the phase relative to most source waveforms, you need only to center
the positive peak around the zero phase point. (For instance, center the positive
half cycle for a sine or square wave around the zero phase point.) Use the
following method:
H
First be sure the FFT math waveform is selected in the More menu, then set
horizontal position to 50% in the Horizontal menu. This positions the zero
phase reference point to the horizontal center of the screen.
H
In the Horizontal menu, vary the trigger position to center the positive peak
of the source waveform at the horizontal center of screen. Alternately, you
can adjust the trigger level (knob) to bring the positive peak to center screen
if the phase reference waveform has slow enough edges.
When impulse testing and measuring phase, align the impulse input into the
system to the zero reference point of the FFT time domain waveform:
H
H
Set the trigger position to 50% and horizontal position to 50% for all record
lengths less than 15 K.
For records with a 100 K length, set the trigger position to 5%. Use the
horizontal position knob to move the trigger T on screen to the center
horizontal graticule line.
H
Do not use the 15 K length, nor, if your oscilloscope model is so equipped,
and of the record lengths 30 K, 75 K, or 130 K to impulse test using FFTs.
These record lengths do not allow easy alignment of the zero reference point
for phase measurements.
H
Trigger on the input impulse.
Adjust Phase Suppression. Your source waveform record may have a noise
component with phase angles that randomly vary from −pi to pi. This noise
could make the phase display unusable. In such a case, use phase suppression to
control the noise.
3–205
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
You specify the phase suppression level in dB with respect to 1 VRMS. If the
magnitude of the frequency is greater than this threshold, then its phase angle
will be displayed. However, if it is less than this threshold, then the phase angle
will be set to zero and be displayed as zero degrees or radians. (The waveform
reference indicator at the left side of the graticule indicates the level where phase
is zero for phase FFTs.)
It is easier to determine the level of phase suppression you need if you first
create a frequency FFT math waveform of the source and then create a phase
FFT waveform of the same source. Do the following steps to use a cursor
measurement to determine the suppression level:
1. Do steps 1 through 7 of To Create an FFT that begins on page 3–193. Select
dBV RMS (side) for the Set FFT Vert Scale to (side).
2. Press CURSOR ➞ Mode (main) ➞ Independent (side) ➞ Func-
tion (main) ➞ H Bars (side). Use the general purpose knob to align the
selected cursor to a level that places the tops of the magnitudes of frequen-
cies of interest above the cursor but places other magnitudes completely
below the cursor.
3. Read the level in dB from the @: readout. Note the level for use in step 5.
4. Press MORE (main) ➞ Change Waveform Definition menu (side). Press
Set FFT Vert Scale to (side) repeatedly to choose either Phase (rad) or
Phase (deg).
5. Press Suppress Phase at Amplitudes (side). Use the general purpose knob
to set phase suppression to the value obtained using the H Bar cursor. Do not
change the window selection or you will invalidate the results obtained using
the cursor.
FFT Windows
To learn how to optimize your display of FFT data, read about how the FFT
windows data before computing the FFT math waveform. Understanding FFT
windowing can help you get more useful displays.
Windowing Process. The oscilloscope multiplies the FFT time domain record by
one of four FFT windows before it inputs the record to the FFT function. Figure
3–99 shows how the time domain record is processed.
3–206
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
The FFT windowing acts like a bandpass filter between the FFT time domain
record and the FFT frequency domain record. The shape of the window controls
the ability of the FFT to resolve (separate) the frequencies and to accurately
measure the amplitude of those frequencies.
FFT Time Domain Record
Xs
FFT Window
FFT Time Domain Record After
Windowing
FFT
FFT Frequency Domain Record
Figure 3–99: Windowing the FFT Time Domain Record
Selecting a Window. You can select your window to provide better frequency
resolution at the expense of better amplitude measurement accuracy in your FFT,
better amplitude accuracy over frequency resolution, or to provide a compromise
between both. You can choose from these four windows: Rectangular, Hamming,
Hanning, and Blackman-Harris.
3–207
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
In step 8 (page 3–195) in To Create an FFT, the four windows are listed in order
according to their ability to resolve frequencies versus their ability to accurately
measure the amplitude of those frequencies. The list indicates that the ability of a
given window to resolve a frequency is inversely proportional to its ability to
accurately measure the amplitude of that frequency. In general, then, choose a
window that can just resolve between the frequencies you want to measure. That
way, you will have the best amplitude accuracy and leakage elimination while
still separating the frequencies.
You can often determine the best window empirically by first using the window
with the most frequency resolution (rectangular), then proceeding toward that
window with the least (Blackman-Harris) until the frequencies merge. Use the
window just before the window that lets the frequencies merge for best compro-
mise between resolution and amplitude accuracy.
NOTE. If the Hanning window merges the frequencies, try the Hamming window
before settling on the rectangular window. Depending on the distance of the
frequencies you are trying to measure from the fundamental, the Hamming
window sometimes resolves frequencies better than the Hanning.
Window Characteristics. When evaluating a window for use, you may want to
examine how it modifies the FFT time domain data. Figure 3–100 shows each
window, its bandpass characteristic, bandwidth, and highest side lobe. Consider
the following characteristics:
H
H
The narrower the central lobe for a given window, the better it can resolve a
frequency.
The lower the lobes on the side of each central lobe are, the better the
amplitude accuracy of the frequency measured in the FFT using that
window.
H
Narrow lobes increase frequency resolution because they are more selective.
Lower side lobe amplitudes increase accuracy because they reduce leakage.
3–208
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
Leakage results when the time domain waveform delivered to the FFT function
contains a non-integer number of waveform cycles. Since there are fractions of
cycles in such records, there are discontinuities at the ends of the record. These
discontinuities cause energy from each discrete frequency to “leak” over on to
adjacent frequencies. The result is amplitude error when measuring those
frequencies.
The rectangular window does not modify the waveform record points; it
generally gives the best frequency resolution because it results in the most
narrow lobe width in the FFT output record. If the time domain records you
measured always had an integer number of cycles, you would only need this
window.
Hamming, Hanning, and Blackman-Harris are all somewhat bell-shaped widows
that taper the waveform record at the record ends. The Hanning and Blackman/
Harris windows taper the data at the end of the record to zero; therefore, they are
generally better choices to eliminate leakage.
Care should be taken when using bell shaped windows to be sure that the most
interesting parts of the signal in the time domain record are positioned in the
center region of the window so that the tapering does not cause severe errors.
3–209
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
FFT Window Type
Bandpass Filter
–3 dB Bandwidth Highest Side Lobe
0 dB
-20
0.89
1.28
1.28
1.28
–13 dB
–43 dB
–32 dB
–94 dB
-40
-50
Rectangular Window
Hamming Window
0 dB
-20
-40
-60
0 dB
-20
-40
-60
-80
Hanning Window
0 dB
-20
-40
-60
-80
Blackman-Harris Window
-100
-101
Figure 3–100: FFT Windows and Bandpass Characteristics
Waveform Differentiation
The Advanced DSP Math capabilities of the TDS Oscilloscope include
waveform differentiation. This capability allows you to display a derivative math
waveform that indicates the instantaneous rate of change of the waveform
acquired. This section describes how to setup the oscilloscope to display and
measure derivative math waveforms.
Derivative waveforms are used in the measurement of slew rate of amplifiers and
in educational applications. You can store and display a derivative math
waveform in a reference memory, then use it as a source for another derivative
waveform. The result is the second derivative of the waveform that was first
differentiated.
3–210
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
The math waveform, derived from the sampled waveform, is computed based on
the following equation:
1
Yn + (X(n)1) * Xn)
T
Where:
X is the source waveform
Y is the derivative math waveform
T is the time between samples
Since the resultant math waveform is a derivative waveform, its vertical scale is
in volts/second (its horizontal scale is in seconds). The source signal is differen-
tiated over its entire record length; therefore, the math waveform record length
equals that of the source waveform.
To Create a Derivative of a
Waveform
To obtain a derivative math waveform:
1. Connect the waveform to the desired channel input and select that channel.
2. Adjust the vertical and horizontal scales and trigger the display (or press
AUTOSET).
3. Press MORE ➞ Math1, Math2, or Math3 (main) ➞ Change Math
Definition (side) ➞ Single Wfm Math (main). (See Figure 3–101).
4. Press Set Single Source to (side). Repeatedly press the same button (or use
the general purpose knob) until the channel source selected in step 1 appears
in the menu label.
5. Press Set Function to (side). Repeatedly press the same button (or use the
general purpose knob) until diff appears in the menu label.
6. Press OK Create Math Wfm (side) to display the derivative of the
waveform you input in step 1.
You should now have your derivative math waveform on screen. Use the
Vertical SCALE and POSITION knobs to size and position your waveform
as you require.
3–211
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
Derivative Math Waveform
Source Waveform
Figure 3–101: Derivative Math Waveform
To Take Automated
Measurements
Once you have displayed your derivative math waveform, you can use automated
measurements to make various parameter measurements. Do the following steps
to display automated measurements of the waveform:
1. Be sure MORE is selected in the channel selection buttons and that the
differentiated math waveform is selected in the More main menu.
2. TDS 600B: Press MEASURE ➞ Select Measrmnt (main).
3. TDS 500C and TDS 700C: Press MEASURE ➞ Measure (pop-up) ➞
Select Measrmnt (main).
4. Select up to four measurements in the side menu. (See Figure 3–102.)
To Take Cursor
Measurements
You can also use cursors to measure derivative waveforms. Use the same
procedure as is found under To Take Cursor Measurements on page 3–217. When
using that procedure, note that the amplitude measurements on a derivative
waveform will be in volts per second rather than in volt-seconds as is indicated
for the integral waveform measured in the procedure.
3–212
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
Figure 3–102: Peak-Peak Amplitude Measurement of a Derivative Waveform
Offset, Position, and Scale
The settings you make for offset, scale, and position affect the math waveform
you obtain. Note the following tips for obtaining a good display:
H
You should scale and position the source waveform so it is contained on
screen. (Off screen waveforms may be clipped, resulting in errors in the
derivative waveform).
H
You can use vertical position and vertical offset to position your source
waveform. The vertical position and vertical offset will not affect your
derivative waveform unless you position the source waveform off screen so
it is clipped.
H
When using the vertical scale knob to scale the source waveform, note that it
also scales your derivative waveform.
3–213
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
Because of the method the oscilloscope uses to scale the source waveform before
differentiating that waveform, the derivative math waveform may be too large
vertically to fit on screen — even if the source waveform is only a few divisions
on screen. You can use Zoom to reduce the size of the waveform on screen (see
Using Zoom that follows), but if your waveform is clipped before zooming, it
will still be clipped after it is zoomed.
If your math waveform is a narrow differentiated pulse, it may not appear to be
clipped when viewed on screen. You can detect if your derivative math wave-
form is clipped by expanding it horizontally using Zoom so you can see the
clipped portion. Also, the automated measurement Pk-Pk will display a clipping
error message if turned on (see To Take Automated Measurements on
page 3–212).
If your derivative waveform is clipped, try either of the following methods to
eliminate clipping:
H
H
Reduce the size of the source waveform on screen. (Select the source channel
and use the vertical SCALE knob.)
Expand the waveform horizontally on screen. (Select the source channel and
increase the horizontal scale using the horizontal SCALE knob.) For
instance, if you display the source waveform illustrated in Figure 3–101 on
page 3–212 so its rising and falling edges are displayed over more horizontal
divisions, the amplitude of the corresponding derivative pulse will decrease.
Whichever method you use, be sure Zoom is off and the zoom factors are reset
(see Using Zoom below).
Using Zoom
Once you have your waveform optimally displayed, you can also magnify (or
contract) it vertically and horizontally to inspect any feature. Just be sure the
differentiated waveform is the selected waveform. (Press MORE, then select the
differentiated waveform in the More main menu. Then use the Vertical and
Horizontal SCALE knob to adjust the math waveform size.)
If you wish to see the zoom factor (2X, 5X, etc.), you need to turn zoom on:
press ZOOM ➞ ON (side). The vertical and horizontal zoom factors appear on
screen.
3–214
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
Whether zoom is on or off, you can press Reset (main) ➞ Reset Live Factors or
Reset All Factors (side) to return the zoomed derivative waveform to no
magnification.
Waveform Integration
The Advanced DSP Math capabilities of the TDS Oscilloscope include
waveform integration. This capability allows you to display an integral math
waveform that is an integrated version of the acquired waveform. This section
describes how to setup the oscilloscope to display and measure integral math
waveforms.
Integral waveforms find use in the following applications:
H
H
Measuring of power and energy, such as in switching power supplies
Characterizing mechanical transducers, as when integrating the output of an
accelerometer to obtain velocity
The integral math waveform, derived from the sampled waveform, is computed
based on the following equation:
n
x(i) ) x(i * 1)
y(n) + scale
T
S
2
i + 1
Where:
x(i) is the source waveform
y(n) is a point in the integral math waveform
scale is the output scale factor
T is the time between samples
Since the resultant math waveform is an integral waveform, its vertical scale is in
volt-seconds (its horizontal scale is in seconds). The source signal is integrated
over its entire record length; therefore, the math waveform record length equals
that of the source waveform.
3–215
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
To Create a Integral Math
Waveform
To obtain an integral math waveform, do the following steps:
1. Connect the waveform to the desired channel input and select that channel.
2. Adjust the vertical and horizontal scales and trigger the display (or press
AUTOSET).
3. Press MORE ➞ Math1, Math2, or Math3 (main) ➞ Change Math
waveform definition (side) ➞ Single Wfm Math (main).
4. Press Set Single Source to (side). Repeatedly press the same button until the
channel source selected in step 1 appears in the menu label.
5. Press Set Function to (side). Repeatedly press the same button until intg
appears in the menu label.
6. Press OK Create Math Waveform (side) to turn on the integral math
waveform.
You should now have your integral math waveform on screen. See Fig-
ure 3–103. Use the Vertical SCALE and POSITION knobs to size and
position your waveform as you require.
3–216
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
Integral Math Waveform
Source Waveform
Figure 3–103: Integral Math Waveform
To Take Cursor
Measurements
Once you have displayed your integrated math waveform, use cursors to measure
its voltage over time.
1. Be sure MORE is selected (lighted) in the channel selection buttons and that
the integrated math waveform is selected in the More main menu.
2. Press CURSOR ➞ Mode (main) ➞ Independent (side) ➞ Func-
tion (main) ➞ H Bars (side).
3. Use the general purpose knob to align the selected cursor (solid) to the top
(or to any amplitude level you choose).
4. Press SELECT to select the other cursor.
5. Use the general purpose knob to align the selected cursor (to the bottom (or
to any amplitude level you choose).
6. Read the integrated voltage over time between the cursors in volt-seconds
from the D: readout. Read the integrated voltage over time between the
selected cursor and the reference indicator of the math waveform from the
@: readout. (See Figure 3–104.)
3–217
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
Integral Math Waveform
Source Waveform
Figure 3–104: H Bars Cursors Measure an Integral Math Waveform
7. Press Function (main) ➞ V Bars (side). Use the general purpose knob to
align one of the two vertical cursors to a point of interest along the horizon-
tal axis of the waveform.
8. Press SELECT to select the alternate cursor.
9. Align the alternate cursor to another point of interest on the math waveform.
10. Read the time difference between the cursors from the D: readout. Read the
time difference between the selected cursor and the trigger point for the
source waveform from the @: readout.
11. Press Function (main) ➞ Paired (side).
12. Use the technique just outlined to place the long vertical bar of each paired
cursor to the points along the horizontal axis you are interested in.
3–218
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
13. Read the following values from the cursor readouts:
H
H
Read the integrated voltage over time between the Xs of both paired
cursors in volt-seconds from the D: readout.
Read the integrated voltage over time between the X of the selected
cursor and the reference indicator of the math waveform from the @:
readout.
H
Read the time difference between the long vertical bars of the paired
cursors from the D: readout.
To Take Automated
Measurements
You can also use automated measurements to measure integral math waveforms.
Use the same procedure as is found under To Take Automated Measurements on
page 3–212. When using that procedure, note that your measurements on an
integral waveform will be in volt-seconds rather than in volts per second as is
indicated for the differential waveform measured in the procedure.
Offset, Position, and Scale
When creating integrated math waveforms from live channel waveforms,
consider the following topics. Note the following requirements for obtaining a
good display:
H
You should scale and position the source waveform so it is contained on
screen. (Off screen waveforms may be clipped, which will result in errors in
the integral waveform).
H
You can use vertical position and vertical offset to position your source
waveform. The vertical position and vertical offset will not affect your
integral waveform unless you position the source waveform off screen so it
is clipped.
H
When using the vertical scale knob to scale the source waveform, note that it
also scales your integral waveform.
DC Offset
The source waveforms that you connect to the oscilloscope often have a DC
offset component. The oscilloscope integrates this offset along with the time
varying portions of your waveform. Even a few divisions of offset in the source
waveform may be enough to ensure that the integral waveform saturates (clips),
especially with long record lengths.
3–219
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Features for Advanced Applications
You may be able to avoid saturating your integral waveform if you choose a
shorter record length. (Press HORIZONTAL MENU ➞ Record
Length (main).) Reducing the sample rate (use the HORIZONTAL SCALE
knob) with the source channel selected might also prevent clipping. You can also
select AC coupling in the vertical menu of the source waveform or otherwise DC
filter it before applying it to the oscilloscope input.
Using Zoom
Once you have your waveform optimally displayed, you may magnify (or
reduce) it vertically and horizontally to inspect any feature you desire. Just be
sure the integrated waveform is the selected waveform. (Press MORE, then
select the integrated waveform in the More main menu. Then use the Vertical and
Horizontal SCALE knobs to adjust the math waveform size.)
If you want to see the zoom factor (2X, 5X, etc.), you need to turn Zoom on:
press ZOOM ➞ On (side). The vertical and horizontal zoom factors appear on
screen.
Whether Zoom is on or off, you can press Reset (main) ➞ Reset Live Factors
or Reset All Factors (side) to return the zoomed integral waveform to no
magnification.
3–220
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Options and Accessories
This appendix describes the various options as well as the standard and optional
accessories that are available for the TDS Oscilloscope.
Options
Tektronix will ship the options shown in Table A–1:
Table A–1: Options
Option #
Label
Description
A1
Universal European
power cord
220 V, 50 Hz power cord
A2
A3
A4
UK power cord
240 V, 50 Hz power cord
240 V, 50 Hz power cord
240 V, 60 Hz power cord
Australian power cord
North American power
cord
A5
Switzerland power cord
Hard disk
220 V, 50 Hz power cord
HD
Add a hard disk.
(Option applies to TDS 500C & TDS 700C only.)
05
Video trigger
Oscilloscope comes with tools for investigating events that occur when a video signal
generates a horizontal or vertical sync pulse. These tools allow investigation of a range of
NTSC, PAL, SECAM, and high definition TV signals.
13
1K
RS-232/Centronics Hard- Add RS-232-C and Centronics interface ports.
(Option applies to TDS 500C only.)
copy Interface Ports
Scope cart
K420 scope cart. This cart can help transport the oscilloscope around many lab environ-
ments.
A–1
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Options and Accessories
Table A–1: Options (cont.)
Option #
Label
Description
1M
Extend record length from 50,000 samples standard as follows:
130,000 record length
TDS 520C and TDS 724C: To 250,000 samples on one channel and 130,000 on two
channels
TDS 540C, TDS 754C, & TDS 784C: To 500,000 samples on one channel, 250,000 on two
channels, and 130,000 samples on three or four channels
(Option is only available for the models listed above.)
2M
Extend acquisition length from 50,000 samples standard as follows:
8 M acquisition length
TDS 520C and TDS 724C: To 2 M samples on two channels and 4 M on one channel
TDS 540C, TDS 754C, & TDS 784C: To 2 M samples on three or four channels, 4 M on two
channels, and 8 M samples on one channel
(Option is only available for the models listed above.)
1R
2C
3C
4C
22
Rackmount
Oscilloscope comes configured for installation in a 19 inch
wide instrument rack. For later field conversions, order kit # 016-1136-00.
Communication Signal
Analyzer
Oscilloscope comes configured for communications signal triggering and mask testing.
(Option applies to TDS 500C & TDS 700C only.)
P6701B with system
calibration
Oscilloscope comes with a P6701B and calibrated short-wavelength optical reference
receiver on channel 1. (Option applies to TDS 500C & TDS 700C only.)
P6703B with system
calibration
Oscilloscope comes with a P6703B and calibrated long-wavelength optical reference
receiver on channel 1. (Option applies to TDS 500C & TDS 700C only.)
Two passive probes
Add two 500 MHz P6139A passive probes
(Option applies only to TDS 520C and TDS 724C models.)
23
24
Four active probes
Four passive probes
Add four 1 GHz P6243 active probes
(Option applies only to TDS 540C and TDS 754C models.)
Add four 500 MHz P6139A passive probes
(Option applies only to TDS 600B and TDS 784C models.)
26
27
Four active probes
Two active probes
Add four 1.5 GHz (probe only) P6245 active probes
(Option applies only to TDS 684B and TDS 784C models.)
Add two 1.5 GHz (probe only) P6245 active probes
(Option applies only to TDS 680B.)
A–2
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Options and Accessories
Table A–1: Options (cont.)
Option #
Label
Description
2D
Two probes
Delete two standard probes normally shipped with the oscilloscope
(Option applies only to TDS 520C, TDS 620B, and TDS 724C models.)
2F
Advanced DSP math
Color printer
Add advanced DSP math features such as FFT, integration, and differentiation.
(Option applies only to TDS 520C and TDS 540C models.)
3I and 3P
4D
Tektronix Phaser 140, 360 dpi, inkjet, color printer.
Order option 3I for 220V use or option 3P for 110 V use.
Four probes
Delete the four standard probes shipped with the model.
(Option applies only to TDS 540C, TDS 644B, and TDS 754C models.)
B2
Printed programmer
manual
Provides a printed programmer manual. (A Windows Help version of this manual is included
in the User Manual.)
L1
L3
L5
L9
Manuals in French
Manuals in German
Manuals in Japanese
Manuals in Korean
Provides Language versions of User Manual, according to option number chosen.
Standard Accessories
The oscilloscope comes standard with the accessories listed in Table A–2.
Table A–2: Standard Accessories
Accessory
Part Number
070-9869-XX
020-2204-XX
070-9874-XX
User Manual
Reference
Technical Reference: Performance Verification and Specifications
A–3
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Options and Accessories
Table A–2: Standard Accessories (Cont.)
Accessory
Part Number
Probes:
TDS 754C: Four P6139A 10X, 500 MHz Passive probes
TDS 724C: Two P6139A 10X, 500 MHz Passive probes
TDS 644B: Four P6243 probes
P6139A
P6139A
P6243
TDS 620B: Two P6139A probes
P6139A
P6139A
P6139A
TDS 540C: Four P6139A 10X, 500 MHz Passive probes
TDS 520C, Two P6139A 10X, 500 MHz Passive probes
TDS 680B, TDS 684B, TDS 784C: No probes standard
Front Cover
200-3696-01
016-1268-00
161-0230-01
Accessory Pouch (TDS 644B, TDS 684B, TDS 700C)
U.S. Power Cord
Optional Accessories
You can also order the optional accessories listed in Table A–3.
Table A–3: Optional Accessories
Accessory
Part Number
Service Manual
070-9875-XX
K420
Oscilloscope Cart
Rack Mount Kit (for field conversion)
Accessory Pouch (TDS 500C, TDS 620B, TDS 680B)
Soft-Sided Carrying Case
Transit Case
016-1236-00
016-1268-00
016-0909-01
016-1135-00
012-0991-01
012-0991-00
012-1214-00
012-1298-00
GPIB Cable (1 meter)
GPIB Cable (2 meter)
Centronics Cable
RS-232 Cable
A–4
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Options and Accessories
Accessory Probes
The following optional accessory probes are recommended for use with your
oscilloscope:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
P6701B Optical-to-Electrical Analog Converter: 500 to 950 nm (DC to 1 GHz, 1 V/mW)
P6703B Optical-to-Electrical Analog Converter: 1100 to 1700 nm (DC to 1 GHz, 1 V/mW)
P6723 Optical Logic Probe: 1310 to 1550 nm (20 to 650 Mb/s, –8 to –28 dBm
AFTDS Differential Signal Adapter
AMT75 75 W to 50 W Adapter
P6243 Active, high speed digital voltage probe. FET. DC to 1.0 GHz
P6245 Active, high speed digital voltage probe. FET. DC to 1.5 GHz
P6246 Active, high bandwidth differential probe. FET. DC to 400 MHz
P6247 Active, high bandwidth differential probe. FET. DC to 1 GHz
P6101B 1X, 15 MHz, Passive probe
P6156 10X, 3.5 GHz, Passive, low capacitance, (low impedance ZO) probe.
Provides 100X, when ordered as P6156 Option 25
H
H
P6139A 10X, 500 MHz Passive probe
P6217 Active, high speed digital voltage probe. FET. DC to 4 GHz. DC
offset
H
H
P6204 Active, high speed digital voltage probe. FET. DC to 1 GHz. DC
offset
P6563A Passive, SMD probe, 20X, 500 MHz
A–5
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Options and Accessories
H
H
H
H
P5100 High Voltage Passive probe, 2.5 kV, DC to 250 MHz
P5205 High Voltage differential probe, 1.3 kV (differential), DC to 100 MHz
ADA 400A differential preamp, switchable gain
AM 503S — DC/AC 50 MHz Current measurement system, AC/DC.
Supplied with A6302 Current Probe
H
H
AM503S Option 05: DC/AC 100 MHz Current measurement system.
Supplied with A6312 Current Probe
AM 503S Option 03: DC/AC 100 A Current measurement system, AC/DC.
Supplied with A6303 Current Probe
H
H
H
H
TCP 202 Current Probe, DC to 50 Mhz, 15 A DC
P6021 AC Current probe. 120 Hz to 60 MHz
P6022 AC Current probe. 935 kHz to 120 MHz
CT-1 Current probe — designed for permanent or semi-permanent in-circuit
installation. 25 kHz to 1 GHz, 50 W input
H
H
H
CT-2 Current probe — designed for permanent or semi-permanent in-circuit
installation. 1.2 kHz to 200 MHz, 50 W input
CT-4 Current Transformer — for use with the AM 503S (A6302, A6312)
and P6021. Peak pulse 2.0 kA. 0.5 Hz to 20 MHz with AM 503S (A6302)
P5210 Differential, high voltage probe, 5.6 kV (DC + peak AC) 50 MHz
A–6
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Options and Accessories
Accessory Software
The optional accessories listed in Table A–4 are Tektronix software products
recommended for use with your oscilloscope.
Table A–4: Accessory software
Software
Part number
S3FT400
WSTR31
TTiP
Wavewriter: AWG and waveform creation
WaveStarT: Waveform capture and documentation
Telecommunication Package and i–Pattern Software
Warranty Information
Service Assurance
Check for the full warranty statements for this product and the products listed
above on the first page after the title page of each product manual.
Tektronix offers the following services that you can purchase any time during the
warranty period of this product:
H
H
REPXXXX provides one year of post-warranty repair support. It is available
in one year increments up to three years.
CALXXXX provides one year of calibration support. It is available in one
year increments up to five years.
A–7
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Options and Accessories
A–8
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Algorithms
The TDS Oscilloscope can take 25 automatic measurements. By knowing how it
makes these calculations, you may better understand how to use your oscillo-
scope and how to interpret your results.
Measurement Variables
The oscilloscope uses a variety of variables in its calculations. These include:
High, Low
High is the value used as the 100% level in measurements such as fall time and
rise time. For example, if you request the 10% to 90% rise time, then the
oscilloscope will calculate 10% and 90% as percentages with High representing
100%.
Low is the value used as the 0% level in measurements such as fall time and rise
time.
The exact meaning of High and Low depends on which of two calculation
methods you choose from the High-Low Setup item of the Measure menu.
These are Min-max and Histogram.
Min-Max Method — defines the 0% and the 100% waveform levels as the lowest
amplitude (most negative) and the highest amplitude (most positive) samples.
The min-max method is useful for measuring frequency, width, and period for
many types of signals. Min-max is sensitive to waveform ringing and spikes,
however, and does not always measure accurately rise time, fall time, overshoot,
and undershoot.
The min-max method calculates the High and Low values as follows:
High = Max
and
Low = Min
B–1
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Algorithms
Histogram Method — attempts to find the highest density of points above and
below the waveform midpoint. It attempts to ignore ringing and spikes when
determining the 0% and 100% levels. This method works well when measuring
square waves and pulse waveforms.
The oscilloscope calculates the histogram-based High and Low values as
follows:
1. It makes a histogram of the record with one bin for each digitizing level (256
total).
2. It splits the histogram into two sections at the halfway point between Min
and Max (also called Mid).
3. The level with the most points in the upper histogram is the High value, and
the level with the most points in the lower histogram is the Low value.
(Choose the levels where the histograms peak for High and Low.)
If Mid gives the largest peak value within the upper or lower histogram, then
return the Mid value for both High and Low (this is probably a very low
amplitude waveform).
If more than one histogram level (bin) has the maximum value, choose the
bin farthest from Mid.
This algorithm does not work well for two-level waveforms with greater than
about 100% overshoot.
HighRef, MidRef, LowRef,
Mid2Ref
The user sets the various reference levels, through the Reference Level selection
of the Measure menu. They include:
HighRef — the waveform high reference level. Used in fall time and rise time
calculations. Typically set to 90%. You can set it from 0% to 100% or to a
voltage level.
MidRef — the waveform middle reference level. Typically set to 50%. You can
set it from 0% to 100% or to a voltage level.
B–2
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Algorithms
LowRef — the waveform low reference level. Used in fall and rise time
calculations. Typically set to 10%. You can set it from 0% to 100% or to a
voltage level.
Mid2Ref — the middle reference level for a second waveform (or the second
middle reference of the same waveform). Used in delay time calculations.
Typically set to 50%. You can set it from 0% to 100% or to a voltage level.
Other Variables
The oscilloscope also measures several values itself that it uses to help calculate
measurements.
RecordLength — is the number of data points in the time base. You set it with
the Horizontal menu Record Length item.
Start — is the location of the start of the measurement zone (X-value). It is 0.0
samples unless you are making a gated measurement. When you use gated
measurements, it is the location of the left vertical cursor.
End — is the location of the end of the measurement zone (X-value). It is
(RecordLength – 1.0) samples unless you are making a gated measurement.
When you use gated measurements, it is the location of the right vertical cursor.
Hysteresis — The hysteresis band is 10% of the waveform amplitude. It is used
in MCross1, MCross2, and MCross3 calculations.
For example, once a crossing has been measured in a negative direction, the
waveform data must fall below 10% of the amplitude from the MidRef point
before the measurement system is armed and ready for a positive crossing.
Similarly, after a positive MidRef crossing, waveform data must go above 10%
of the amplitude before a negative crossing can be measured. Hysteresis is useful
when you are measuring noisy signals, because it allows the oscilloscope to
ignore minor fluctuations in the signal.
B–3
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Algorithms
MCross Calculations
MCross1, MCross2, and MCross3 — refer to the first, second, and third MidRef
cross times, respectively. (See Figure B–1.)
The polarity of the crossings does not matter for these variables, but the
crossings alternate in polarity; that is, MCross1 could be a positive or negative
crossing, but if MCross1 is a positive crossing, MCross2 will be a negative
crossing.
MCross1
(StartCycle)
MCross3
(EndCycle)
MCross2
MidRef + (Hysteresis x Amplitude)
MidRef
MidRef – (Hysteresis x Amplitude)
Figure B–1: MCross Calculations
The oscilloscope calculates these values as follows:
1. Find the first MidRefCrossing in the waveform record or the gated region.
This is MCross1.
2. Continuing from MCross1, find the next MidRefCrossing in the waveform
record (or the gated region) of the opposite polarity of MCross1. This is
MCross2.
3. Continuing from MCross2, find the next MidRefCrossing in the waveform
record (or the gated region) of the same polarity as MCross1. This is
MCross3.
MCross1Polarity — is the polarity of first crossing (no default). It can be rising or
falling.
B–4
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Algorithms
StartCycle — is the starting time for cycle measurements. It is a floating-point
number with values between 0.0 and (RecordLength – 1.0), inclusive.
StartCycle = MCross1
EndCycle — is the ending time for cycle measurements. It is a floating-point
number with values between 0.0 and (RecordLength – 1.0), inclusive.
EndCycle = MCross3
Waveform[<0.0 ... RecordLength–1.0>] — holds the acquired data.
TPOS — is the location of the sample just before the trigger point (the time
reference zero sample). In other terms, it contains the domain reference location.
This location is where time = 0.
TSOFF — is the offset between TPOS and the actual trigger point. In other
words, it is the trigger sample offset. Values range between 0.0 and 1.0 samples.
This value is determined by the instrument when it receives a trigger. The actual
zero reference (trigger) location in the measurement record is at
(TPOS+TSOFF).
B–5
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Algorithms
Measurement Algorithms
The automated measurements are defined and calculated as follows:
Amplitude
Area
Amplitude = High – Low
The arithmetic area for one waveform. Remember that one waveform is not
necessarily equal to one cycle. For cyclical data you may prefer to use the cycle
area rather than the arithmetic area.
if Start = End then return the (interpolated) value at Start.
Otherwise,
End
Area= ŕ
Waveform(t)dt
Start
For details of the integration algorithm, see page B–15.
Cycle Area
Amplitude (voltage) measurement. The area over one waveform cycle. For data
not cyclical, you might prefer to use the Area measurement.
If StartCycle = EndCycle then return the (interpolated) value at StartCycle.
EndCycle
ŕ
Waveform(t)dt
CycleMean=
StartCycle
For details of the integration algorithm, see page B–15.
B–6
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Algorithms
Burst Width
Timing measurement. The duration of a burst.
1. Find MCross1 on the waveform. This is MCrossStart.
2. Find the last MCross (begin the search at EndCycle and search toward
StartCycle). This is MCrossStop. This could be a different value from
MCross1.
3. Compute BurstWidth = MCrossStop – MCrossStart
Cycle Mean
Amplitude (voltage) measurement. The mean over one waveform cycle. For
non-cyclical data, you might prefer to use the Mean measurement.
If StartCycle = EndCycle then return the (interpolated) value at StartCycle.
EndCycle
ŕ
Waveform(t)dt
StartCycle
CycleMean=
(EndCycle * StartCycle) SampleInterval
For details of the integration algorithm, see page B–15.
Cycle RMS
The true Root Mean Square voltage over one cycle.
If StartCycle = EndCycle then CycleRMS = Waveform[Start].
Otherwise,
EndCycle
(Waveform(t))2dt
ŕ
Ǹ
StartCycle
CycleRMS =
(EndCycle * StartCycle) SampleInterval
For details of the integration algorithm, see page B–15.
B–7
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Algorithms
Delay
Timing measurement. The amount of time between the MidRef and Mid2Ref
crossings of two different traces, or two different places on the same trace.
Delay measurements are actually a group of measurements. To get a specific
delay measurement, you must specify the target and reference crossing polarities
and the reference search direction.
Delay = the time from one MidRef crossing on the source waveform to the
Mid2Ref crossing on the second waveform.
Delay is not available in the Snapshot display.
Extinction Ratio
Extinction %
Extinction dB
Fall Time
Optical measurement.
Extinction Ratio = (High/Low)
Optical measurement.
Extinction % = 100.0 / Extinction Ratio
Optical measurement.
Extinction dB = 10.0 (log10(Extinction Ratio))
Timing measurement. The time taken for the falling edge of a pulse to drop from
a HighRef value (default = 90%) to a LowRef value (default = 10%).
Figure B–2 shows a falling edge with the two crossings necessary to calculate a
Fall measurement.
1. Searching from Start to End, find the first sample in the measurement zone
greater than HighRef.
2. From this sample, continue the search to find the first (negative) crossing of
HighRef. The time of this crossing is THF. (Use linear interpolation if
necessary.)
B–8
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Algorithms
Fall Time
THF TLF
High
HighRef
LowRef
Low
Figure B–2: Fall Time
3. From THF, continue the search, looking for a crossing of LowRef. Update
THF if subsequent HighRef crossings are found. When a LowRef crossing is
found, it becomes TLF. (Use linear interpolation if necessary.)
4. FallTime = TLF – THF
Frequency
Timing measurement. The reciprocal of the period. Measured in Hertz (Hz)
where 1 Hz = 1 cycle per second.
If Period = 0 or is otherwise bad, return an error.
Frequency = 1/Period
High
100% (highest) voltage reference value. (See High, Low on page B–1.)
Using the min-max measurement technique:
High = Max
B–9
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Algorithms
Low
0% (lowest) voltage reference value calculated. (See High, Low on page B–1.)
Using the min-max measurement technique:
Low = Min
Maximum
Mean
Amplitude (voltage) measurement. The maximum voltage. Typically the most
positive peak voltage.
Examine all Waveform[ ] samples from Start to End inclusive, and set Max
equal to the greatest magnitude Waveform[ ] value found.
The arithmetic mean for one waveform. Remember that one waveform is not
necessarily equal to one cycle. For cyclical data you may prefer to use the cycle
mean rather than the arithmetic mean.
If Start = End then return the (interpolated) value at Start.
Otherwise,
End
ŕ
Waveform(t)dt
Mean=
Start
(End * Start) SampleInterval
For details of the integration algorithm, see page B–15.
Mean dBm
Minimum
The normalized mean. If the waveform source is from an optical probe, this can
give average optical power.
Mean dBm = 10.0(log10(Mean / 0.001))
Amplitude (voltage) measurement. The minimum amplitude. Typically the most
negative peak voltage.
Examine all Waveform[ ] samples from Start to End inclusive, and set Min
equal to the smallest magnitude Waveform[ ] value found.
B–10
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Algorithms
Negative Duty Cycle
Timing measurement. The ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period
expressed as a percentage.
NegativeWidth is defined in Negative Width, below.
If Period = 0 or undefined then return an error.
NegativeWidth
NegativeDutyCycle =
100%
Period
Negative Overshoot
Amplitude (voltage) measurement.
Low * Min
Amplitude
NegativeOvershoot =
100%
Note that this value should never be negative (unless High or Low are set
out-of-range).
Negative Width
Timing measurement. The distance (time) between MidRef (default = 50%)
amplitude points of a negative pulse.
If MCross1Polarity = ‘–’
then
NegativeWidth = (MCross2 – MCross1)
else
NegativeWidth = (MCross3 – MCross2)
Waveform[Start]
Optical Power
Peak to Peak
See Mean dBm on page B–10.
Amplitude measurement. The absolute difference between the maximum and
minimum amplitude.
PeaktoPeak = Max – Min
B–11
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Algorithms
Period
Timing measurement. Time taken for one complete signal cycle. The reciprocal
of frequency. Measured in seconds.
Period = MCross3 – MCross1
Phase
Timing measurement. The amount of phase shift, expressed in degrees of the
target waveform cycle, between the MidRef crossings of two different wave-
forms. Waveforms measured should be of the same frequency or one waveform
should be a harmonic of the other.
Phase is a dual waveform measurement; that is, it is measured from a target
waveform to a reference waveform. To get a specific phase measurement, you
must specify the target and reference sources.
Phase is determined in the following manner:
1. The first MidRefCrossing (MCross1Target) and third (MCross3) in the
source (target) waveform are found.
2. The period of the target waveform is calculated (see Period above).
3. The first MidRefCrossing (MCross1Ref) in the reference waveform crossing
in the same direction (polarity) as that found MCross1Target for the target
waveform is found.
4. The phase is determined by the following:
MCross1Ref * MCross1Target
Phase =
360
Period
If the target waveform leads the reference waveform, phase is positive; if it lags,
negative.
Phase is not available in the Snapshot display.
B–12
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Algorithms
Positive Duty Cycle
Timing measurement. The ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period,
expressed as a percentage.
PositiveWidth is defined in Positive Width, following.
If Period = 0 or undefined then return an error.
PositiveWidth
Period
PositiveDutyCycle =
100%
Positive Overshoot
Positive Width
Amplitude (voltage) measurement.
Max * High
PositiveOvershoot =
Amplitude
100%
Note that this value should never be negative.
Timing measurement. The distance (time) between MidRef (default = 50%)
amplitude points of a positive pulse.
If MCross1Polarity = ‘+’
then
PositiveWidth = (MCross2 – MCross1)
else
PositiveWidth = (MCross3 – MCross2)
Rise Time
Timing measurement. Time taken for the leading edge of a pulse to rise from a
LowRef value (default = 10%) to a HighRef value (default = 90%).
Figure B–3 shows a rising edge with the two crossings necessary to calculate a
Rise Time measurement.
1. Searching from Start to End, find the first sample in the measurement zone
less than LowRef.
2. From this sample, continue the search to find the first (positive) crossing of
LowRef. The time of this crossing is the low rise time or TLR. (Use linear
interpolation if necessary.)
B–13
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Algorithms
3. From TLR, continue the search, looking for a crossing of HighRef. Update
TLR if subsequent LowRef crossings are found. If a HighRef crossing is
found, it becomes the high rise time or THR. (Use linear interpolation if
necessary.)
4. RiseTime = THR – TLR
Rise Time
TLR THR
High
HighRef
LowRef
Low
Figure B–3: Rise Time
RMS:
Amplitude (voltage) measurement. The true Root Mean Square voltage.
If Start = End then RMS = the (interpolated) value at Waveform[Start].
Otherwise,
End
Ă (Waveform(t))2dt
ŕ
Ǹ
Start
RMS =
(End * Start) SampleInterval
For details of the integration algorithm, see below.
B–14
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Algorithms
Integration Algorithm
The integration algorithm used by the oscilloscope is as follows:
B
B
is approximated by
where:
^
ŕ W(t)dt
ŕ
W(t)dt
A
A
W(t) is the sampled waveform
^
W(t)
is the continuous function obtained by linear interpolation of W(t)
A and B are numbers between 0.0 and RecordLength–1.0
If A and B are integers, then:
B
^
B*1 W(i) ) W(i ) 1)
ȍ
ŕ W(t)dt + s
2
i+A
A
where s is the sample interval.
Similarly,
B
B
is approximated by
where:
2
^
2
ǒ Ǔ
ŕ (
ŕ
)
W(t) dt
W(t) dt
A
A
W(t) is the sampled waveform
^
W(t)
is the continuous function obtained by linear interpolation of W(t)
A and B are numbers between 0.0 and RecordLength–1.0
If A and B are integers, then:
B
2
2
B*1
ȍ
i+A
2
(
)
(
)
^
W(i) ) W(i) W(i ) 1) ) W(i ) 1)
ǒ Ǔ
ŕ
W(t) dt + s
3
A
where s is the sample interval.
B–15
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Algorithms
Measurements on Envelope Waveforms
Time measurements on envelope waveforms must be treated differently from
time measurements on other waveforms, because envelope waveforms contain so
many apparent crossings. Unless otherwise noted, envelope waveforms use either
the minima or the maxima (but not both), determined in the following manner:
1. Step through the waveform from Start to End until the sample min and max
pair DO NOT straddle MidRef.
MidRef
Both min and max
samples are above
MidRef, so use minima.
Both min and max
samples are below
MidRef, so use maxima.
MidRef
Figure B–4: Choosing Minima or Maxima to Use for Envelope Measurements
B–16
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Algorithms
2. If the pair > MidRef, use the minima, else use maxima.
If all pairs straddle MidRef, use maxima. See Figure B–4.
The Burst Width measurement always uses both maxima and minima to
determine crossings.
Missing or Out-of-Range Samples
If some samples in the waveform are missing or off-scale, the measurements will
linearly interpolate between known samples to make an “appropriate” guess as to
the sample value. Missing samples at the ends of the measurement record will be
assumed to have the value of the nearest known sample.
When samples are out of range, the measurement will give a warning to that
effect (for example, “CLIPPING”) if the measurement could change by
extending the measurement range slightly. The algorithms assume the samples
recover from an overdrive condition instantaneously.
For example, if MidRef is set directly, then MidRef would not change even if
samples were out of range. However, if MidRef was chosen using the % choice
from the Set Levels in % Units selection of the Measure menu, then MidRef
could give a “CLIPPING” warning.
NOTE. When measurements are displayed using Snapshot, out of range warnings
are NOT available. However, if you question the validity of any measurement in
the snapshot display, you can select and display the measurement individually
and then check for a warning message.
B–17
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Algorithms
B–18
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C: Packaging for Shipment
If you ship the TDS Oscilloscope, pack it in the original shipping carton and
packing material. If the original packing material is not available, package the
instrument as follows:
1. Obtain a corrugated cardboard shipping carton with inside dimensions at
least 15 cm (6 in) taller, wider, and deeper than the oscilloscope. The
shipping carton must be constructed of cardboard with 170 kg (375 pound)
test strength.
2. If you are shipping the oscilloscope to a Tektronix field office for repair,
attach a tag to the oscilloscope showing the instrument owner and address,
the name of the person to contact about the instrument, the instrument type,
and the serial number.
3. Wrap the oscilloscope with polyethylene sheeting or equivalent material to
protect the finish.
4. Cushion the oscilloscope in the shipping carton by tightly packing dunnage
or urethane foam on all sides between the carton and the oscilloscope. Allow
7.5 cm (3 in) on all sides, top, and bottom.
5. Seal the shipping carton with shipping tape or an industrial stapler.
NOTE. Do not ship the oscilloscope with a disk inside the disk drive. When the
disk is inside the drive, the disk release button sticks out. This makes the button
more prone to damage than otherwise.
C–1
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C: Packaging for Shipment
C–2
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D: Probe Selection
The TDS Oscilloscope can use a variety of Tektronix probes for taking different
kinds of measurements. To help you decide what type of probe you need, this
section introduces the five major types of probes: passive, active, current,
optical, and time-to-voltage probes. See Appendix A: Options and Accessories
for a list of the optional probes available; see your Tektronix Products Catalog
for more information about a given probe.
NOTE. With some TDS models, Tektronix ships the recommended general-pur-
pose probes as standard accessories. (The model probe and number shipped
depends on the model — see Probes in Table A–2 on page A–3.) The TDS 680B,
TDS 684B, and TDS 784C oscilloscopes come without probes, but for general-
purpose measurements and to take advantage of the 1-GHz bandwidth of these
oscilloscopes, the P6245 Active Probe is recommended. This manual lists the
P6245 optional-accessory probe in Appendix A: Options and Accessories.
Passive Voltage Probes
Passive voltage probes measure voltage. They employ passive circuit compo-
nents such as resistors, capacitors, and inductors. There are three common
classes of passive voltage probes:
H
H
H
General purpose (high input resistance)
Low impedance (ZO)
High voltage
General Purpose (High
Input Resistance) Probes
High input resistance probes are considered “typical” oscilloscope probes. The
high input resistance of passive probes (typically 10 MW) provides negligible
DC loading and makes them a good choice for accurate DC amplitude measure-
ments.
D–1
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E: Probe Selection
However, their 8 pF to 12 pF (over 60 pF for 1X) capacitive loading can distort
timing and phase measurements. Use high input resistance passive probes for
measurements involving:
H
H
H
H
Device characterization (above 15 V, thermal drift applications)
Maximum amplitude sensitivity using 1X high impedance
Large voltage range (between 15 and 500 V)
Qualitative or go/no-go measurements
Low Impedance (ZO)
Probes
Low impedance probes measure frequency more accurately than general purpose
probes, but they make less accurate amplitude measurements. They offer a higher
bandwidth to cost ratio.
These probes must be terminated in a 50 W scope input. Input capacitance is
much lower than high Z passive probes, typically 1 pF, but input resistance is
also lower (500 to 5000 W typically). Although that DC loading degrades
amplitude accuracy, the lower input capacitance reduces high frequency loading
to the circuit under test. That makes ZO probes ideal for timing and phase
measurements when amplitude accuracy is not a major concern.
ZO probes are useful for measurements up to 40 V.
High Voltage Probes
High voltage probes have attenuation factors in the 100X to 1000X range. The
considerations that apply to other passive probes apply to high voltage probes
with a few exceptions. Since the voltage range on high voltage probes varies
from 1 kV to 20 kV (DC + peak AC), the probe head design is mechanically
much larger than for a passive probe. High voltage probes have the added
advantage of lower input capacitance (typically 2-3 pF).
D–2
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E: Probe Selection
Figure D–1: Typical High Voltage Probes
Active Voltage Probes
Active voltage probes, sometimes called “FET” probes, use active circuit
elements such as transistors. There are three classes of active probes:
H
H
H
High speed active
Differential active
Fixtured active
Active voltage measuring probes use active circuit elements in the probe design
to process signals from the circuit under test. All active probes require a source
of power for their operation. Power is obtained either from an external power
supply or from the oscilloscope itself.
NOTE. When you connect an active probe to the oscilloscope (such as the
P6245), the input impedance of the oscilloscope automatically becomes 50 W. If
you then connect a passive probe, you need to set the input impedance back to
1 MW. The procedure To Change Vertical Scale and Position on page 3–15
explains how to change the input impedance. Also, please read Input Impedance
Considerations on page 3–7 for more information.
D–3
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E: Probe Selection
High Speed Active Probes
Active probes offer low input capacitance (1 to 2 pF typical) while maintaining
the higher input resistance of passive probes (10 kW to 10 MW). Like ZO probes,
active probes are useful for making accurate timing and phase measurements.
However, they do not degrade the amplitude accuracy. Active probes typically
have a dynamic range of ±8 to ±15 V.
Differential Probes
Fixtured Active Probes
Current Probes
Differential probes determine the voltage drop between two points in a circuit
under test. Differential probes let you simultaneously measure two points and to
display the difference between the two voltages.
Active differential probes are stand-alone products designed to be used with
50 W inputs. The same characteristics that apply to active probes apply to active
differential probes.
In some small-geometry or dense circuitry applications, such as surface mounted
devices (SMD), a hand-held probe is too big to be practical. You can instead use
fixtured (or probe card mounted) active probes (or buffered amplifiers) to
precisely connect your instrument to your device-under-test. These probes have
the same electrical characteristics as high speed, active probes but use a smaller
mechanical design.
Current probes enable you to directly observe and measure current waveforms,
which can be very different from voltage signals. Tektronix current probes are
unique in that they can measure from DC to 1 GHz.
Two types of current probes are available: one that measures AC current only
and AC/DC probes that utilize the Hall effect to accurately measure the AC and
DC components of a signal. AC-only current probes use a transformer to convert
AC current flux into a voltage signal to the oscilloscope and have a frequency
response from a few hundred hertz up to 1 GHz. AC/DC current probes include
Hall effect semiconductor devices and provide frequency response from DC to
50 MHz.
D–4
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E: Probe Selection
Use a current probe by clipping its jaws around the wire carrying the current that
you want to measure. (Unlike an ammeter which you must connect in series with
the circuit.) Because current probes are noninvasive, with loading typically in the
milliohm to low W range, they are especially useful where low loading of the
circuit is important. Current probes can also make differential measurements by
measuring the results of two opposing currents in two conductors in the jaws of
the probe.
Figure D–2: A6303 Current Probe Used in the AM 503S Opt. 03
NOTE. Attempting to measure more than 40 amperes of total, in-phase current
(DC + peak AC) using three or more current probes installed on the input
channels can result in measurement or display errors.
Optical Probes
Optical probes let you blend the functions of an optical power meter with the
high-speed analog waveform analysis capability of an oscilloscope. You have the
capability of acquiring, displaying, and analyzing optical and electrical signals
simultaneously.
D–5
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E: Probe Selection
Applications include measuring the transient optical properties of lasers, LEDs,
electro-optic modulators, and flashlamps. You can also use these probes in the
development, manufacturing, and maintenance of fiber optic control networks,
local area networks (LANs), fiber-based systems based on the FDDI, SONET,
and Fiber Channel standards, optical disk devices, digital video, and high-speed
fiber optic communications systems.
NOTE. When you connect any probe with a TEKPROBE (level 2) interface to the
oscilloscope, the input impedance of the oscilloscope automatically becomes
50 W. If you then connect a high input impedance passive probe, you need to set
the input impedance back to 1 MW. The procedure To Change Vertical Parame-
ters, on page 3–17, explains how to change the input impedance.
D–6
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E: Inspection and Cleaning
Inspect for dirt and damage on and clean the exterior of the TDS Oscilloscope.
When done regularly, this preventive maintenance may prevent oscilloscope
malfunction and enhance its reliability.
How often to do this preventive maintenance depends on the severity of the
environment in which the oscilloscope is used. A proper time to perform
preventive maintenance is just before oscilloscope adjustment.
General Care
The cabinet helps keep dust out of the oscilloscope and must be in place when
operating the oscilloscope. The oscilloscope front cover protects the front panel
and display from dust and damage. Install it when storing or transporting the
oscilloscope.
Inspection and Cleaning
Procedures
Inspect and clean the oscilloscope exterior as often as operating conditions
require.
Send the oscilloscope in for service if it requires an interior cleaning. The
collection of dirt on components inside can cause them to overheat and
breakdown. Dirt acts as an insulating blanket, preventing efficient heat dissipa-
tion. Dirt also provides an electrical conduction path that could cause an
oscilloscope failure, especially under high-humidity conditions.
CAUTION. Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents which might damage the
plastics used in this oscilloscope. Use only deionized water when cleaning the
menu buttons or front-panel buttons. Use a 75% isopropyl alcohol solution as a
cleaner and rinse with deionized water. Before using any other type of cleaner,
consult your Tektronix Service Center or representative.
E–1
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E: Cleaning
Inspection. Inspect the outside of the oscilloscope for damage, wear, and missing
parts, using Table E–1 as a guide. Oscilloscopes that appear to have been
dropped or otherwise abused should be checked thoroughly to verify correct
operation and performance. Immediately repair defects that could cause personal
injury or lead to further damage to the oscilloscope.
Table E–1: External inspection check list
Item
Inspect for
Repair action
Cabinet, front panel,
and cover
Cracks, scratches, deformations, Send in for service
damaged hardware or gaskets
Front-panel knobs
Missing, damaged, or loose
knobs
Send in for service
Carrying handle, bail,
cabinet feet.
Correct operation
Send in for service
Cleaning Procedure — Exterior.
To clean the oscilloscope exterior, do the following steps:
1. Remove loose dust on the outside of the oscilloscope with a lint free cloth.
2. Remove remaining dirt with a lint free cloth dampened in a general purpose
detergent-and-water solution. Do not use abrasive cleaners.
3. Clean the light filter protecting the monitor screen with a lint-free cloth
dampened with either isopropyl alcohol or, preferably, a gentle, general
purpose detergent-and-water solution.
CAUTION. To prevent getting moisture inside the oscilloscope during external
cleaning, use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator.
Lubrication. There is no periodic lubrication required for this oscilloscope.
E–2
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix F: Programmer Disk
The TDS Family Programmer disk is a Microsoft Windows help file that covers
operating your oscilloscope using the General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB)
(optional on some oscilloscopes). The disk also includes some example
programs.
The program runs on a PC-compatible system with Microsoft Windows or
Windows 95. (See Figure F–1).
PC Compatible with
Microsoft Windows
TDS Family
Programmer
Figure F–1: Equipment Needed to Run the Example Programs
Loading the Programs
For instructions on installing the programmer manual and the other software on
the TDS Family Programmer Manual disk, read the readme file on the disk.
Running the Help Program
To run the programmer manual help file using Windows 3.1, perform the
following:
1. Double click on the TDS Family Programmer program group.
2. Double click on the TDS Family Programmer icon.
If you have not created a program group or a Windows 95 shortcut, use the File
Manager (Windows 3.1) or Explorer (Windows 95) to select and run the
tds–pgm.hlp program.
F–1
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix F: Programmer Disk
F–2
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
2 + 2 channel operation
Two-plus-two channel operation limits the simultaneous display of channels
to two of the four channels provided. Channels not displayed can be used to
couple a triggering signal to the oscilloscope.
AC coupling
A type of signal transmission that blocks the DC component of a signal but
uses the dynamic (AC) component. Useful for observing an AC signal that is
normally riding on a DC signal.
Accuracy
The closeness of the indicated value to the true value.
Acquisition
The process of sampling signals from input channels, digitizing the samples
into data points, and assembling the data points into a waveform record. The
waveform record is stored in memory. The trigger marks time zero in that
process.
Acquisition interval
The time duration of the waveform record divided by the record length. The
oscilloscope displays one data point for every acquisition interval.
Active cursor
The cursor that moves when you turn the general purpose knob. It is
represented in the display by a solid line. The @ readout on the display
shows the absolute value of the active cursor.
Aliasing
A false representation of a signal due to insufficient sampling of high
frequencies or fast transitions. A condition that occurs when a oscilloscope
digitizes at an effective sampling rate that is too slow to reproduce the input
signal. The waveform displayed on the oscilloscope may have a lower
frequency than the actual input signal.
Amplitude
The High waveform value less the Low waveform value.
Glossary–1
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
AND
A logic (Boolean) function in which the output is true when and only when
all the inputs are true. On the oscilloscope, that is a trigger logic pattern and
state function.
Area
Measurement of the waveform area taken over the entire waveform or the
gated region. Expressed in volt-seconds. Area above ground is positive; area
below ground is negative.
Attenuation
The degree the amplitude of a signal is reduced when it passes through an
attenuating device such as a probe or attenuator. That is, the ratio of the input
measure to the output measure. For example, a 10X probe will attenuate, or
reduce, the input voltage of a signal by a factor of 10.
Automatic trigger mode
A trigger mode that causes the oscilloscope to automatically acquire if
triggerable events are not detected within a specified time period.
Autoset
A function of the oscilloscope that automatically produces a stable waveform of
usable size. Autoset sets up front-panel controls based on the characteristics of
the active waveform. A successful autoset will set the volts/div, time/div, and
trigger level to produce a coherent and stable waveform display.
Average acquisition mode
In this mode, the oscilloscope acquires and displays a waveform that is the
averaged result of several acquisitions. Averaging reduces the apparent noise.
The oscilloscope acquires data as in the sample mode and then averages it
according to a specified number of averages.
Bandwidth
The highest frequency signal the oscilloscope can acquire with no more than
3 dB (× .707) attenuation of the original (reference) signal.
Burst width
A timing measurement of the duration of a burst.
Channel
One type of input used for signal acquisition. The oscilloscope has four
channels.
Glossary–2
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Channel/probe deskew
A relative time delay for each channel. This lets you align signals to
compensate for the fact that signals may come in from cables of differing
length.
Channel Reference Indicator
The indicator on the left side of the display that points to the position around
which the waveform contracts or expands when vertical scale is changed. This
position is ground when offset is set to 0 V; otherwise, it is ground plus offset.
Coupling
The association of two or more circuits or systems in such a way that power
or information can be transferred from one to the other. You can couple the
input signal to the trigger and vertical systems several different ways.
Cursors
Paired markers that you can use to make measurements between two waveform
locations. The oscilloscope displays the values (expressed in volts or time) of
the position of the active cursor and the distance between the two cursors.
Cycle area
A measurement of waveform area taken over one cycle. Expressed in
volt-seconds. Area above ground is positive; area below ground is negative.
Cycle mean
An amplitude (voltage) measurement of the arithmetic mean over one cycle.
Cycle RMS
The true Root Mean Square voltage over one cycle.
DC coupling
A mode that passes both AC and DC signal components to the circuit.
Available for both the trigger system and the vertical system.
Delay measurement
A measurement of the time between the middle reference crossings of two
different waveforms.
Delay time
The time between the trigger event and the acquisition of data.
Glossary–3
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Digitizing
The process of converting a continuous analog signal such as a waveform to a
set of discrete numbers representing the amplitude of the signal at specific
points in time. Digitizing is composed of two steps: sampling and quantizing.
Display system
The part of the oscilloscope that shows waveforms, measurements, menu
items, status, and other parameters.
Edge Trigger
Triggering occurs when the oscilloscope detects the source passing through a
specified voltage level in a specified direction (the trigger slope).
Envelope acquisition mode
A mode in which the oscilloscope acquires and displays a waveform that
shows the variation extremes of several acquisitions.
Equivalent-time sampling (ET)
TDS 500C and TDS 700C Models Only: A sampling mode in which the
oscilloscope acquires signals over many repetitions of the event. These
oscilloscopes use a type of equivalent-time sampling called random
equivalent-time sampling, which uses an internal clock that runs asynchro-
nously with respect to the input signal and the signal trigger. The oscillo-
scope takes samples continuously, independent of the trigger position, and
displays them based on the time difference between the sample and the
trigger. Although the samples are taken sequentially in time, they are random
with respect to the trigger.
Extinction Ratio
The ratio of High optical power to Low optical power.
Fall time
A measurement of the time it takes for the trailing edge of a pulse to fall
from a HighRef value (typically 90%) to a LowRef value (typically 10%) of
its amplitude.
Frequency
A timing measurement that is the reciprocal of the period. Measured in Hertz
(Hz) where 1 Hz = 1 cycle per second.
Gated Measurements
A feature that lets you limit automated measurements to a specified portion
of the waveform. You define the area of interest using the vertical cursors.
Glossary–4
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
General purpose knob
The large front-panel knob with an indentation. You can use it to change the
value of the assigned parameter.
Glitch positive trigger
Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects positive spike widths less than
the specified glitch time.
Glitch negative trigger
Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects negative spike widths less than
the specified glitch time.
Glitch either trigger
Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects either positive or negative spike
widths less than the specified glitch time.
GPIB (General Purpose Interface Bus)
An interconnection bus and protocol that allows you to connect multiple
instruments in a network under the control of a controller. Also known as
IEEE 488 bus. It transfers data with eight parallel data lines, five control
lines, and three handshake lines.
Graticule
A grid on the display screen that creates the horizontal and vertical axes. You
can use it to visually measure waveform parameters.
Ground (GND) coupling
Coupling option that disconnects the input signal from the vertical system.
Hardcopy
An electronic copy of the display in a format useable by a printer or plotter.
Hi Res acquisition mode
TDS 500C and TDS 700C Models Only: An acquisition mode in which the
oscilloscope averages all samples taken during an acquisition interval to
create a record point. That average results in a higher-resolution, lower-band-
width waveform. That mode only works with real-time, non-interpolated
sampling.
Glossary–5
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
High
The value used as 100% in automated measurements (whenever high ref,
mid ref, and low ref values are needed as in fall time and rise time measure-
ments). May be calculated using either the min/max or the histogram
method. With the min/max method (most useful for general waveforms), it is
the maximum value found. With the histogram method (most useful for
pulses), it refers to the most common value found above the mid point. See
Appendix B: Algorithms for details.
Holdoff, trigger
A specified amount of time after a trigger signal that elapses before the
trigger circuit will accept another trigger signal. Trigger holdoff helps ensure
a stable display.
Horizontal bar cursors
The two horizontal bars that you position to measure the voltage parameters
of a waveform. The oscilloscope displays the value of the active (moveable)
cursor with respect to ground and the voltage value between the bars.
Interpolation
The way the oscilloscope calculates values for record points when the
oscilloscope cannot acquire all the points for a complete record with a single
trigger event. That condition occurs when the oscilloscope is limited to real
time sampling and the time base is set to a value that exceeds the effective
sample rate of the oscilloscope. The oscilloscope has two interpolation
options: linear or sin(x)/x interpolation.
Linear interpolation calculates record points in a straight-line fit between the
actual values acquired. Sin(x)/x computes record points in a curve fit
between the actual values acquired. It assumes all the interpolated points fall
in their appropriate point in time on that curve.
Intensity
Display brightness.
InstaVu acquisition mode
A mode that increases the waveform capture rate to up to 400,000 wave-
forms per second. This very fast capture rate greatly increases the probability
that runts, glitches, and other short term changes will accumulate in
waveform memory. The oscilloscope then displays the waveform at the
normal display rate using variable or infinite persistence.
Glossary–6
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Interleaving
TDS 500B and TDS 700A Models Only: A method by which these
oscilloscopes attain higher digitizing speeds. The oscilloscope applies the
digitizing resources of unused channels (that is, channels that are turned off)
to sample those that are in use (turned on). Table 3–2 on page 3–29 lists
acquisition rates vs. number of channels that are on.
Knob
A rotary control.
Logic state trigger
The oscilloscope checks for defined combinatorial logic conditions on
channels 1, 2, and 3 on a transition of channel 4 that meets the set slope and
threshold conditions. If the conditions of channels 1, 2, and 3 are met then
the oscilloscope triggers.
Logic pattern trigger
The oscilloscope triggers depending on the combinatorial logic condition of
channels 1, 2, 3, and 4. Allowable conditions are AND, OR, NAND, and NOR.
Low
The value used as 0% in automated measurements (whenever high ref, mid
ref, and low ref values are needed as in fall time and rise time measure-
ments). May be calculated using either the min/max or the histogram
method. With the min/max method (most useful for general waveforms), it is
the minimum value found. With the histogram method (most useful for
pulses), it refers to the most common value found below the mid point. See
Appendix B: Algorithms for details.
Main menu
A group of related controls for a major oscilloscope function that the
oscilloscope displays across the bottom of the screen.
Main menu buttons
Bezel buttons under the main menu display. They allow you to select items
in the main menu.
Maximum
Amplitude (voltage) measurement of the maximum amplitude. Typically the
most positive peak voltage.
Glossary–7
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Mean
Amplitude (voltage) measurement of the arithmetic mean over the entire
waveform.
Minimum
Amplitude (voltage) measurement of the minimum amplitude. Typically the
most negative peak voltage.
NAND
A logic (Boolean) function in which the output of the AND function is
complemented (true becomes false, and false becomes true). On the
oscilloscope, that is a trigger logic pattern and state function.
Negative duty cycle
A timing measurement representing the ratio of the negative pulse width to
the signal period, expressed as a percentage.
Negative overshoot measurement
Amplitude (voltage) measurement.
Low * Min
Amplitude
NegativeOvershoot +
100%
Negative width
A timing measurement of the distance (time) between two amplitude
points — falling-edge MidRef (default 50%) and rising-edge MidRef (default
50%) — on a negative pulse.
Normal trigger mode
A mode on which the oscilloscope does not acquire a waveform record
unless a valid trigger event occurs. It waits for a valid trigger event before
acquiring waveform data.
NOR
A logic (Boolean) function in which the output of the OR function is
complemented (true becomes false, and false becomes true). On the
oscilloscope, that is a trigger logic pattern and state function.
OR
A logic (Boolean) function in which the output is true if any of the inputs are
true. Otherwise the output is false. On the oscilloscope, that is a trigger logic
pattern and state function.
Glossary–8
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Oscilloscope
An instrument for making a graph of two factors. These are typically voltage
versus time.
Peak Detect acquisition mode
A mode in which the oscilloscope saves the minimum and maximum
samples over two adjacent acquisition intervals. For many glitch-free signals,
that mode is indistinguishable from the sample mode. (Peak detect mode works
with real-time, non-interpolation sampling only.)
Peak-to-Peak
Amplitude (voltage) measurement of the absolute difference between the
maximum and minimum amplitude.
Period
A timing measurement of the time covered by one complete signal cycle. It
is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds.
Phase
A timing measurement between two waveforms of the amount one leads or
lags the other in time. Phase is expressed in degrees, where 360_ comprise
one complete cycle of one of the waveforms. Waveforms measured should be
of the same frequency or one waveform should be a harmonic of the other.
Pixel
A visible point on the display. The oscilloscope display is 640 pixels wide
by 480 pixels high.
Pop-up Menu
A sub-menu of a main menu. Pop-up menus temporarily occupy part of the
waveform display area and are used to present additional choices associated
with the main menu selection. You can cycle through the options in a pop-up
menu by repeatedly pressing the main menu button underneath the pop-up.
Positive duty cycle
A timing measurement of the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal
period, expressed as a percentage.
Positive overshoot
Amplitude (voltage) measurement.
Max * High
Amplitude
PositiveOvershoot +
100%
Glossary–9
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Positive width
A timing measurement of the distance (time) between two amplitude
points — rising-edge MidRef (default 50%) and falling-edge MidRef (default
50%) — on a positive pulse.
Posttrigger
The specified portion of the waveform record that contains data acquired
after the trigger event.
Pretrigger
The specified portion of the waveform record that contains data acquired
before the trigger event.
Probe
An oscilloscope input device.
Quantizing
The process of converting an analog input that has been sampled, such as a
voltage, to a digital value.
Probe compensation
Adjustment that improves low-frequency response of a probe.
Pulse trigger
A trigger mode in which triggering occurs if the oscilloscope finds a pulse,
of the specified polarity, with a width between, or optionally outside, the
user-specified lower and upper time limits.
Real-time sampling
A sampling mode where the oscilloscope samples fast enough to completely
fill a waveform record from a single trigger event. Use real-time sampling to
capture single-shot or transient events.
Record length
The specified number of samples in a waveform.
Reference memory
Memory in a oscilloscope used to store waveforms or settings. You can use
that waveform data later for processing. The oscilloscope saves the data even
when the oscilloscope is turned off or unplugged.
Glossary–10
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Rise time
The time it takes for a leading edge of a pulse to rise from a LowRef value
(typically 10%) to a HighRef value (typically 90%) of its amplitude.
RMS
Amplitude (voltage) measurement of the true Root Mean Square voltage.
Runt trigger
A mode in which the oscilloscope triggers on a runt. A runt is a pulse that
crosses one threshold but fails to cross a second threshold before recrossing
the first. The crossings detected can be positive, negative, or either.
Sample acquisition mode
The oscilloscope creates a record point by saving the first sample during
each acquisition interval. That is the default mode of the acquisition.
Sample interval
The time interval between successive samples in a time base. For real-time
digitizers, the sample interval is the reciprocal of the sample rate. For
equivalent-time digitizers, the time interval between successive samples
represents equivalent time, not real time.
Sampling
The process of capturing an analog input, such as a voltage, at a discrete
point in time and holding it constant so that it can be quantized. Two general
methods of sampling are: real-time sampling and equivalent-time sampling.
Setup/Hold trigger
A mode in which the oscilloscope triggers when a data source changes state
within the setup or hold time relative to a clock source. Positive setup times
precede the clock edge; positive hold times follow the clock edge. The clock
edge may be the rising or falling edge.
Select button
A button that changes which of the two cursors is active.
Selected waveform
The waveform on which all measurements are performed, and which is
affected by vertical position and scale adjustments. The light over one of the
channel selector buttons indicates the current selected waveform.
Glossary–11
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Side menu
Menu that appears to the right of the display. These selections expand on
main menu selections.
Side menu buttons
Bezel buttons to the right of the side menu display. They allow you to select
items in the side menu.
Slew Rate trigger
A mode in which the oscilloscope triggers based on how fast a pulse edge
traverses (slews) between an upper and lower threshold. The edge of the
pulse may be positive, negative, or either. The oscilloscope can trigger on
slew rates faster or slower than a user-specified rate.
Slope
The direction at a point on a waveform. You can calculate the direction by
computing the sign of the ratio of change in the vertical quantity (Y) to the
change in the horizontal quantity. The two values are rising and falling.
Tek Secure
This feature erases all waveform and setup memory locations (setup memories
are replaced with the factory setup). Then it checks each location to verify
erasure. This feature finds use where this oscilloscope is used to gather
security sensitive data, such as is done for research or development projects.
Time base
The set of parameters that let you define the time and horizontal axis
attributes of a waveform record. The time base determines when and how
long to acquire record points.
Timeout trigger
A trigger mode in which triggering occurs if the oscilloscope does NOT find
a pulse, of the specified polarity and level, within the specified time period.
Trigger
An event that marks time zero in the waveform record. It results in acquisi-
tion and display of the waveform.
Trigger level
The vertical level the trigger signal must cross to generate a trigger (on edge
trigger mode).
Glossary–12
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Vertical bar cursors
The two vertical bars you position to measure the time parameter of a
waveform record. The oscilloscope displays the value of the active (move-
able) cursor with respect to the trigger and the time value between the bars.
Waveform
The shape or form (visible representation) of a signal.
Waveform interval
The time interval between record points as displayed.
XY format
A display format that compares the voltage level of two waveform records
point by point. It is useful for studying phase relationships between
two waveforms.
YT format
The conventional oscilloscope display format. It shows the voltage of a
waveform record (on the vertical axis) as it varies over time (on the
horizontal axis).
Glossary–13
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Glossary–14
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Stop After Limit Test Condition Met, 3–187
Template Source, 3–184
Numbers
1/seconds (Hz), Cursor menu, 3–131
2 + 2 channel operation, xiv, 1–1, 1–2, Glossary–1
20 MHz, Vertical menu, 3–17
V Limit, 3–185
ACQUIRE MENU button, 3–33, 3–184
Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms, 3–5
Acquisition, 3–25, Glossary–1
Interval, Glossary–1
250 MHz, Vertical menu, 3–17
Mode, envelope, 3–30
Modes
Readout, 3–33
A
AC coupling, Glossary–1
AC line voltage, trigger input, 3–64
AC, Main Trigger menu, 3–74
Accept Glitch, Main Trigger menu, 3–93
Accessories, A–1
Acquisition length, Option 2M, A–2
Acquisition mode, Choosing an, 3–25
Acquisition modes
How to select, 3–33
Incompatible with InstaVu, 3–58
Active cursor, Glossary–1
Optional, A–4–A–8
Probes, A–5
Software, A–7
Standard, A–3, A–7
Active voltage probes, D–3
active, Saved waveform status, 3–155
Advanced applications, Features for, 3–183
Advanced DSP Math, Option 2F, A–3
Algorithms, B–1
Aliasing, 3–37, 3–203, Glossary–1
AMI, Telecom Trigger menu, 3–104
Amplitude, 3–114, Glossary–1
Amplitude Units, Cursor menu, 3–131
AND, Glossary–2
AND, Main Trigger menu, 3–83, 3–85
Applications
derivative math waveforms, 3–210
FFT math waveforms, 3–191
integral math waveforms, 3–215
Area, 3–114, Glossary–2
Accuracy, Glossary–1
Acquire menu, 3–33
Average, 3–33
Average mode, 3–184
Compare Ch1 to, 3–186
Compare Ch2 to, 3–186
Compare Ch3 to, 3–186
Compare Ch4 to, 3–186
Compare Math1 to, 3–186
Compare Math2 to, 3–186
Compare Math3 to, 3–186
Create Limit Test Template, 3–184
Envelope, 3–33
H Limit, 3–185
Hardcopy if Condition Met, 3–187
Hi Res, 3–33
Attenuation, Glossary–2
External, 3–18
Auto, Main Trigger menu, 3–75
Automated Measurements, Snapshot of, 2–27
Automated measurements, 2–22, 3–114
of derivative math waveforms, 3–212
of FFT math waveforms, 3–198
of integral math waveforms, 3–219
Automatic trigger mode, 3–66, Glossary–2
Autosave, Save/Recall Waveform menu, 3–159
Autoset, 2–15, 3–8, Glossary–2
Default settings, 3–9
How to execute, 3–9
AUTOSET button, 2–15
AUX TRIGGER INPUT, BNC, 2–5
Auxiliary trigger, 3–64
Average, Incompatible with InstaVu, 3–58
Limit Test, 3–187
Limit Test Condition Met, 3–187
Limit Test Setup, 3–186, 3–187
Limit Test Sources, 3–186
Limit Testing, 3–184
OFF (Real Time Only), 3–34
OK Store Template, 3–185
ON (Enable ET), 3–34
Peak Detect, 3–33
Repetitive Signal, 3–34
Ring Bell if Condition Met, 3–187
RUN/STOP, 3–36
Sample, 3–33
Single Acquisition Sequence, 3–36
Stop After, 3–35, 3–187
Index–1
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Average acquisition mode, 3–30, 3–61, Glossary–2
Average mode, Acquire menu, 3–184
Average, Acquire menu, 3–33
Buttons
CH1, CH2 ..., 3–12
Channel selection, 2–17, 3–12
Main menu, 2–3
Average, More menu, 3–191
Side menu, 2–3
BW symbol, 3–17
B
Bandwidth, Glossary–2
C
Selecting, 3–17
Bandwidth, Vertical menu, 3–17
Banner, displaying, 3–181–3–182
Base, Cursor menu, 3–131
Blackman-Harris window, 3–195
BMP, 3–165
Cables, 3–175
Cal Probe, Vertical menu, 3–143
Cart, Oscilloscope, A–1
Centronics, 2–5
Port, 3–167, 3–174
BMP Color, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
BMP Mono, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
BNC
CH1, CH2 ... buttons, 3–12
Ch1, Ch2 ..., Delayed Trigger menu, 3–111
Ch1, Ch2 ..., Main Trigger menu, 3–74, 3–82, 3–85,
3–86, 3–92, 3–93, 3–94, 3–96, 3–97, 3–101
Ch1, Ch2 ..., Telecom Trigger menu, 3–104
Change Colors, Color menu, 3–46
Channel, Glossary–2
AUX TRIGGER INPUT, 2–5
DELAYED TRIGGER OUTPUT, 2–5
MAIN TRIGGER OUTPUT, 2–5
SIGNAL OUTPUT, 2–5
Bold, Color menu, 3–45
Readout, 2–6, 3–11, 3–50
Burst width, 3–114
Button
Reference Indicator, 2–6, 3–11
Selection buttons, 2–17, 3–12
Trigger input, 3–64
ACQUIRE MENU, 3–33, 3–184
AUTOSET, 2–15
Channel readout, 2–6
CLEAR MENU, 2–3, 2–8, 2–13, 2–23, 2–24, 3–123
CURSOR, 3–129
DELAYED TRIG, 3–68, 3–108
DISPLAY, 3–39, 3–44
FORCE TRIG, 3–69
HARDCOPY, 3–160, 3–167, 3–177
HELP, 3–181
Channel reference indicator, Glossary–3
Channel–probe deskew, 3–143, Glossary–3
Channels, Selecting, 3–11
Circuit loading, Glossary–3
Class Glitch, Main Trigger menu, 3–91
Class, Main Trigger menu, 3–96, 3–101
Pattern, 3–81
HORIZONTAL MENU, 3–68, 3–108
InstaVu, 3–55
Runt, 3–93
Setup/Hold, 3–86
MEASURE, 3–117, 3–135
MORE, 3–12, 3–158, 3–189
ON/STBY, 1–7, 2–3
Save/Recall SETUP, 2–10, 3–11, 3–152, 3–160
Save/Recall WAVEFORM, 3–155, 3–160
SELECT, 3–130, Glossary–11
SET LEVEL TO 50%, 3–69
SINGLE TRIG, 3–37, 3–70
STATUS, 3–179
Slew Rate, 3–97
State, 3–85
Classes, Pulse triggers, 3–90
CLEAR MENU button, 2–3, 2–8, 2–13, 2–23, 2–24,
3–123
Clear Spool, Hardcopy menu, 3–170
Clipping
derivative math waveforms, 3–213
FFT math waveforms, 3–201
how to avoid, 3–201, 3–213, 3–219
integral math waveforms, 3–219
Clock Source, Main Trigger menu, 3–86
CMI, Telecom Trigger menu, 3–104
Code, Telecom Trigger menu, 3–104
Collision Contrast, Color menu, 3–48
TRIGGER MENU, 3–72, 3–73, 3–81, 3–85, 3–86,
3–91, 3–93, 3–97
UTILITY, 3–142, 3–166, 3–176
VERTICAL MENU, 2–19
WAVEFORM OFF, 2–21, 3–13, 3–43
ZOOM, 3–49, 3–51
Index–2
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Color, 3–44
SIGNAL OUTPUT, 2–5
VGA, 2–5
How to set, 3–44
Color Deskjet, 3–165
Color Matches Contents, Color menu, 3–47, 3–48
Color menu, 3–44
Contrast, Display menu, 3–40
Conventions, xiv
Copy, File Utilities menu, 3–163
Coupling, 2–19
Bold, 3–45
Change Colors, 3–46
Ground, Glossary–5
Collision Contrast, 3–48
Color, 3–46, 3–47, 3–48
Color Matches Contents, 3–47, 3–48
Hardcopy, 3–45
Hue, 3–46
Lightness, 3–46
Selecting, 3–17
Trigger, 3–67
Coupling Waveforms, 3–5
Coupling, Delayed Trigger menu, 3–111
Coupling, Main Trigger menu, 3–74
Coupling, Vertical menu, 3–17
Create Directory, File Utilities menu, 3–163
Map Math, 3–47
Map Reference, 3–47
Math, 3–47
Monochrome, 3–45
Normal, 3–45
Create Limit Test Template, Acquire menu, 3–184
Create Measrmnt, Measure Delay menu, 3–123
Cross Hair, Display menu, 3–42
Current probes, D–4
Options, 3–48
Cursor
Palette, 3–45
Horizontal bar, 3–127
Persistence Palette, 3–45
Ref, 3–48
Measurements, 3–126
modes, 3–127
Reset All Mappings To Factory, 3–49
Reset All Palettes To Factory, 3–49
Reset Current Palette To Factory, 3–49
Reset to Factory Color, 3–46
Restore Colors, 3–48
Saturation, 3–46
Spectral, 3–45
Temperature, 3–45
View Palette, 3–45
Paired, 3–127
readout, 3–128
Setting adjustment response (speed), 3–131
Vertical bar, 3–127
CURSOR button, 3–129
Cursor menu, 3–129, 3–196, 3–217
1/seconds (Hz), 3–131
Amplitude Units, 3–131
Base, 3–131
Color, Color menu, 3–46, 3–47, 3–48
Color, Display menu, 3–44
Comm trigger, 3–65
Function, 3–129, 3–130
H Bars, 3–129, 3–130
Independent, 3–130
Communication Signal Analyzer, A–2
Compare Ch1 to, Acquire menu, 3–186
Compare Ch2 to, Acquire menu, 3–186
Compare Ch3 to, Acquire menu, 3–186
Compare Ch4 to, Acquire menu, 3–186
Compare Math1 to, Acquire menu, 3–186
Compare Math2 to, Acquire menu, 3–186
Compare Math3 to, Acquire menu, 3–186
Compensation, of passive probes, 3–6
Configure, Utility menu, 3–166, 3–177
Confirm Delete, File Utilities menu, 3–163
Connector
IRE (NTSC), 3–131
seconds, 3–131
Time Units, 3–131
Tracking, 3–130
Video Line Number, 3–131
Cursor readout
H-Bars, 3–196, 3–212, 3–217
Paired, 3–212
Paired cursors, 3–198, 3–219
V-Bars, 3–198, 3–212, 3–218
Cursors, 3–126, Glossary–3
How to use, 3–129
AUX TRIGGER INPUT, 2–5
Centronics, 2–5
DELAYED TRIGGER OUTPUT, 2–5
GPIB, 2–5, 3–175
MAIN TRIGGER OUTPUT, 2–5
Power, 2–5
with derivative waveforms, 3–212
with FFT waveforms, 3–196
with integral waveforms, 3–217
Cycle area, 3–114, Glossary–3
Cycle mean, 3–114, Glossary–3
Cycle RMS, 3–115, Glossary–3
RS-232, 2–5
Index–3
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
procedure for measuring, 3–212
record length of, 3–211
Desk Top Publishing, 3–166
Hardcopy, 3–151
D
Data Source, Main Trigger menu, 3–86
Date/Time
On hardcopies, 3–168
To set, 3–169
DC coupling, Glossary–3
Deskew, 3–143, Glossary–3
Deskew, Vertical menu, 3–143
Deskjet, 3–165
DC offset, 3–201
Deskjet, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
DeskjetC, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
Differential active probes, D–4
Differentiation
of a derivative, 3–210
waveform, 3–210
Digitizing, Glossary–4
Disk, How to save a hardcopy to, 3–171
Disk drive, 3–160
for DC correction of FFTs, 3–201
with math waveforms, 3–201, 3–219
DC, Main Trigger menu, 3–74
Default Model(s), xiv
Define Inputs, Main Trigger menu, 3–82, 3–85, 3–87
Define Logic, Main Trigger menu, 3–83, 3–85
Delay by Events, Delayed Trigger menu, 3–110
Delay by Time, Delayed Trigger menu, 3–110
Delay by, Delayed Trigger menu, 3–110
Delay measurement, 3–122, Glossary–3
Delay time, Glossary–3
Delay To, Measure Delay menu, 3–122
Delayed Only, Horizontal menu, 3–108
Delayed Runs After Main, 3–68
Delayed Runs After Main, Horizontal menu, 3–22,
3–108
Delayed Scale, Horizontal menu, 3–22
Delayed time base, Incompatible with InstaVu, 3–58
DELAYED TRIG button, 3–68, 3–108
Delayed trigger, 3–68, 3–107–3–112
How to set up, 3–108
Display, 2–6
Hardcopy of, 3–164
Options, 3–38–3–62
Record View, 3–71
System, Glossary–4
Display ‘T’ @ Trigger Point, Display menu, 3–41
DISPLAY button, 3–39, 3–44
Display menu, 3–39, 3–44
Color, 3–44
Contrast, 3–40
Cross Hair, 3–42
Display, 3–39
Display ‘T’ @ Trigger Point, 3–41
Dots, 3–39
Delayed Trigger menu, 3–108–3–112
Ch1, Ch2 ..., 3–111
Dots style, 3–186
Filter, 3–42
Coupling, 3–111
Frame, 3–42
Delay by, 3–110
Full, 3–42
Delay by Events, 3–110
Graticule, 3–42
Delay by Time, 3–110
Grid, 3–42
Falling edge, 3–111
Infinite Persistence, 3–39
Intensified Samples, 3–39
Intensity, 3–40
Level, 3–112
Rising edge, 3–111
Set to 50%, 3–112
Linear interpolation, 3–42
NTSC, 3–42
Set to ECL, 3–112
Set to TTL, 3–112
Overall, 3–40
Slope, 3–111
PAL, 3–42
Source, 3–111
Readout, 3–41, 3–43
Settings, 3–39, 3–44
Sin(x)/x interpolation, 3–42
Style, 3–39
Text/Grat, 3–40
Trigger Bar, 3–41
DELAYED TRIGGER OUTPUT, BNC, 2–5
Delayed Triggerable, 3–68
Delayed Triggerable, Horizontal menu, 3–22, 3–110
Delete Refs, Save/Recall Waveform menu, 3–157
Delete, File Utilities menu, 3–162
Delta Time, Main Trigger menu, 3–98
Derivative math waveform, 3–211
applications, 3–210
Variable Persistence, 3–39
Vectors, 3–39
Waveform, 3–40
derivation of, 3–211
XY, 3–43
procedure for displaying, 3–211
Index–4
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
YT, 3–43
Fast Fourier Transforms (FFTs), applications, 3–191
Display, Display menu, 3–39
Display, Status menu, 3–179
Dots, 3–39
Dots style, Display menu, 3–186
Dots, Display menu, 3–39
DPU411–II, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
DPU412, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
Drives, File Utilities menu, 3–164
Dual Wfm Math, More menu, 3–190
Dual Window Zoom, 3–52
FastFrame, Incompatible with InstaVu, 3–58
FastFrame interactions, 3–61, 3–128
FastFrame Setup, Horizontal menu, 3–60
FastFrame, Horizontal menu, 3–60
FFT frequency domain record, 3–198
defined, 3–199
length of, 3–200
FFT math waveform, 3–192
acquisition mode, 3–202
aliasing, 3–203
Dual Zoom, Zoom menu, 3–54
Dual Zoom Offset, Zoom menu, 3–54
Duty cycle, 2–23, Glossary–8, Glossary–9
automated measurements of, 3–198
DC correction, 3–201
derivation of, 3–192
displaying phase, 3–194
frequency range, 3–200
E
frequency resolution, 3–200
interpolation mode, 3–202, 3–203
magnifying, 3–202
phase display, setup considerations, 3–204
phase suppression, 3–195, 3–205
procedure for displaying, 3–193
procedure for measuring, 3–196
record length, 3–200
Edge trigger, 3–65, 3–72, Glossary–4
How to set up, 3–73
Readout, 3–72
Edge, Main Trigger menu, 3–72, 3–73
Edges, Measure Delay menu, 3–123
Either, Main Trigger menu, 3–92, 3–94, 3–97
empty, Saved waveform status, 3–155
Encapsulated Postscript, 3–165
Enter Char, Labelling menu, 3–162, 3–163
Envelope, Incompatible with InstaVu, 3–58
Envelope acquisition mode, 3–30, 3–61, Glossary–4
Envelope, Acquire menu, 3–33
EPS Color Img, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
EPS Color Plt, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
EPS Mono Img, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
EPS Mono Plt, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
Epson, 3–165
reducing noise, 3–202
undersampling, 3–203
zero phase reference, 3–204
FFT time domain record, defined, 3–199
File System, 3–160
File Utilities menu, 3–160
Confirm Delete, 3–163
Copy, 3–163
Create Directory, 3–163
Delete, 3–162
Drives, 3–164
File Utilities, 3–161
Format, 3–164
Icons, 3–153, 3–156, 3–162, 3–164
Overwrite Lock, 3–164
Print, 3–163
Epson, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
Equivalent time sampling, 3–27, 3–61
Equivalent-time sampling, random, Glossary–4
Extended acquisition length, 3–22
External Attenuation, Vertical menu, 3–18
Extinction %, 3–116
Extinction dB, 3–116
Extinction Ratio, 3–116, B–8
Extinction ratio, Glossary–4
Rename, 3–162
File Utilities, File Utilities menu, 3–161
File Utilities, Save/Recall Setup menu, 3–154
File Utilities, Save/Recall Waveform menu, 3–160
Filter, Display menu, 3–42
Fine Scale, Vertical menu, 3–18
Firmware version, 3–179
F
Factory Setup, How to execute, 3–11
factory, Saved setup status, 3–152
Fall time, 3–115, Glossary–4
Falling edge, Delayed Trigger menu, 3–111
Falling edge, Main Trigger menu, 3–76, 3–85, 3–86
Fast Fourier Transforms, description, 3–191
Fit to screen, Horizontal menu, 3–22
Fixtured active probes, D–4
FORCE TRIG button, 3–69
Format, File Utilities menu, 3–164
Format, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
Frame Count, Horizontal menu, 3–60
Index–5
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Frame Length, Horizontal menu, 3–60
Frame, Display menu, 3–42
Frame, Horizontal menu, 3–60
Frequency, 2–22, 3–115, Glossary–4
Front Cover removal, 1–7
Front panel, 2–4
Printing a hardcopy, 3–164
Spool, 3–170
Hardcopy (Talk Only), Utility menu, 3–166
HARDCOPY button, 3–160, 3–167, 3–177
Hardcopy if Condition Met, Acquire menu, 3–187
Hardcopy menu
Full, Display menu, 3–42
BMP Color, 3–167
Full, Vertical menu, 3–17
BMP Mono, 3–167
Function, Cursor menu, 3–129, 3–130
Fuse, 1–6, 2–5
Clear Spool, 3–167, 3–170
Deskjet, 3–167
DeskjetC, 3–167
DPU411–II, 3–167
DPU412, 3–167
G
EPS Color Img, 3–167
EPS Color Plt, 3–167
EPS Mono Img, 3–167
EPS Mono Plt, 3–167
Epson, 3–167
Format, 3–167
GPIB, 3–167
HPGL, 3–167
Interleaf, 3–167
Landscape, 3–167
Laserjet, 3–167
Layout, 3–167
OK Confirm Clear Spool, 3–170
Palette, 3–167
PCX, 3–167
PCX Color, 3–167
Port, 3–167
Portrait, 3–167
Gated Measurements, 3–118, Glossary–4
Gating, Measure menu, 3–119
General purpose (high input resistance) probes, D–1
General purpose knob, 2–7, 2–25, Glossary–5
Glitch trigger, 3–89, 3–90, Glossary–5
How to set up, 3–91
Glitch, Main Trigger menu, 3–93
Goes FALSE, Main Trigger menu, 3–83, 3–85
Goes TRUE, Main Trigger menu, 3–83, 3–85
GPIB, 2–5, 3–174–3–178, Glossary–5
Connecting to, 3–176
Interconnect cabling, 3–175
Interface requirements, 3–174
Procedures for using, 3–176
Protocols, 3–174
Selecting and configuring the port, 3–176
Typical configuration, 3–175
GPIB Programming, F–1
GPIB, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
GPIB, Utility menu, 3–177
RLE Color, 3–167
Thinkjet, 3–167
TIFF, 3–167
Graticule, 3–42, Glossary–5
Hardcopy, Color menu, 3–45
Hardcopy, Utility menu, 3–177
Help, Accessing, 3–179
HELP button, 3–181
Graticule measurements, 3–132
Graticule, Display menu, 3–42
Grid, Display menu, 3–42
Ground coupling, Glossary–5
GROUP 1, GROUP 2 ... buttons, 3–51
Help system, 3–179
HF Rej, Main Trigger menu, 3–74
Hi Res, Incompatible with InstaVu, 3–58
Hi Res acquisition mode, 3–32, Glossary–5
Hi Res, Acquire menu, 3–33
High, 3–115, Glossary–6
High Ref, Measure menu, 3–121
High speed active probes, D–4
High voltage probes, D–2
High-Low Setup, Measure menu, 3–120
HiRes acquisition mode, 3–61
Histogram counting, 3–133
Histogram measurements, 3–135
Histogram menu, 3–133, 3–134
Histogram, Measure menu, 3–120
H
H Bars, Cursor menu, 3–129, 3–130
H Limit, Acquire menu, 3–185
Hamming window, 3–195
Hanning window, 3–195
Hard Disk, Option HD, A–1
Hardcopy, 3–164, Glossary–5
How to print (controller), 3–172
How to print (no controller), 3–169
How to save to disk, 3–171
How to set up for, 3–166
Index–6
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Histograms, 3–133
Installation, 1–6
HistoMasks, Status menu, 3–179
Hits in Box, 3–135
InstaVu, 3–55, Glossary–6
InstaVu mode
Holdoff, trigger, 3–66, Glossary–6
Horiz Pos, Horizontal menu, 3–22
Horiz Scale, Horizontal menu, 3–22
Horizontal
How to use, 3–56
Modes incompatible with, 3–58
Vs. Normal DSO mode (illustrated), 3–23, 3–57
Waveform capture rate, 3–55
Integral math waveform, 3–215
applications, 3–215
Bar cursors, 3–127, Glossary–6
Control, 3–19–3–62
Menu, 3–68
Position, 3–19
automated measurements of, 3–219
derivation of, 3–215
Readouts, 3–18
Scale, 3–19
SCALE knob, 2–14
System, 2–14
magnifying, 3–214, 3–220
procedure for displaying, 3–216
procedure for measuring, 3–217
record length of, 3–215
Horizontal menu, 3–108
Delayed Only, 3–108
Delayed Runs After Main, 3–22, 3–108
Delayed Scale, 3–22
Integration, Waveform, 3–215
Intensified Samples, Display menu, 3–39
Intensified, Horizontal menu, 3–108, 3–110
Intensity, Glossary–6
Delayed Triggerable, 3–22, 3–110
Extended acquisition length, 3–22
FastFrame, 3–60
FastFrame Setup, 3–60
Fit to screen, 3–22
Intensity, Display menu, 3–40
Interleaf, 3–165
Interleaf, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
Interleaving, 3–29, Glossary–7
Interpolation, 3–28, 3–29, 3–42, Glossary–6
And zoom, 3–50
Frame Count, 3–60
Frame Length%, 3–60
Frame%, 3–60
Horiz Pos, 3–22
FFT distortion, 3–203
Incompatible with InstaVu, 3–58
linear versus sin(x)/x, 3–203
IRE (NTSC), Cursor menu, 3–131
Horiz Scale, 3–22
Intensified, 3–108, 3–110
Main Scale, 3–22
Record Length, 3–21
Set to 10%, 3–22
Set to 50%, 3–22
Set to 90%, 3–22
K
Keypad, 2–7, 2–26
Knob, Glossary–7
General purpose, 2–7, 2–25, Glossary–5
Horizontal POSITION, 2–14, 3–19
Horizontal SCALE, 2–14, 3–19
Trigger MAIN LEVEL, 2–15, 3–68
Vertical POSITION, 2–14, 3–15
Vertical SCALE, 2–14, 3–15
Time Base, 3–108
Trigger Position, 3–21
HORIZONTAL MENU button, 3–68, 3–108
Horizontal POSITION knob, 3–19, 3–51
Horizontal Readouts, 3–18
Horizontal SCALE knob, 3–19, 3–51
HPGL, 3–165
HPGL, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
Hue, Color menu, 3–46
L
Labelling menu, Enter Char, 3–162, 3–163
Landscape, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
Language options, Option L, A–3
Laserjet, 3–165
Laserjet, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
Layout, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
Level, Delayed Trigger menu, 3–112
I
I/O, Status menu, 3–179
I/O, Utility menu, 3–166
Icons, File Utilities menu, 3–153, 3–156, 3–162, 3–164
Independent, Cursor menu, 3–130
Infinite Persistence, Display menu, 3–39
Level, Main Trigger menu, 3–76, 3–93, 3–97, 3–102
Index–7
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Level, Telecom Trigger menu, 3–106
Level, Trigger, 3–68
Glitch, 3–93
Goes FALSE, 3–83, 3–85
Goes TRUE, 3–83, 3–85
HF Rej, 3–74
Level, 3–76, 3–93, 3–97, 3–102
LF Rej, 3–74
Mode & Holdoff, 3–75
NAND, 3–83, 3–85
Negative, 3–92, 3–94, 3–97
Noise Rej, 3–74
LF Rej, Main Trigger menu, 3–74
Lightness, Color menu, 3–46
Limit Test Condition Met, Acquire menu, 3–187
Limit Test Setup, Acquire menu, 3–186, 3–187
Limit Test Sources, Acquire menu, 3–186
Limit Test, Acquire menu, 3–187
Limit Testing, Incompatible with InstaVu, 3–58
Limit testing, 3–183
Linear interpolation, 3–28, 3–42, Glossary–6
Linear interpolation, Display menu, 3–42
Logic trigger, 3–65, 3–78
NOR, 3–83, 3–85
Normal, 3–75
OR, 3–83, 3–85
Definitions, 3–78
Polarity, 3–94, 3–97
Pattern, 3–77, Glossary–7
Readout, 3–79
State, 3–78, Glossary–7
Polarity and Width, 3–92
Positive, 3–92, 3–94, 3–97
Pulse, 3–72, 3–93, 3–96, 3–101
Reject Glitch, 3–93
Logic triggering, 3–76
Logic, Main Trigger menu, 3–72
Low, 3–115, Glossary–7
Rising edge, 3–85, 3–86
Runt, 3–93
Low impedance Zo probes, D–2
Low Ref, Measure menu, 3–121
Lubrication, E–2
Set Thresholds, 3–82, 3–85
Set to 50%, 3–69, 3–76, 3–93, 3–102
Set to ECL, 3–76, 3–93, 3–98, 3–102
Set to TTL, 3–76, 3–93, 3–98, 3–102
Slope, 3–75
Source, 3–74, 3–92, 3–94, 3–96, 3–97, 3–101
State, 3–85, 3–86
Telecom, 3–104
M
Main menu, Glossary–7
Main menu buttons, 2–3, Glossary–7
Main Scale, Horizontal menu, 3–22
Main Trigger Menu
Falling edge, 3–76
Rising edge, 3–76
Main Trigger menu, 3–72, 3–73, 3–81, 3–85, 3–86,
Thresholds, 3–94, 3–98
Time, 3–102
Timeout, 3–101, 3–102
Trigger When, 3–83, 3–85, 3–98
True for less than, 3–83
True for more than, 3–83
Type, 3–72, 3–73, 3–96, 3–101
Type Pulse, 3–91
3–91, 3–93, 3–97
AC, 3–74
Accept Glitch, 3–93
AND, 3–83, 3–85
Width, 3–92, 3–96
MAIN TRIGGER OUTPUT, BNC, 2–5
Map Math, Color menu, 3–47
Map Reference, Color menu, 3–47
Mask Counting, 3–136
Masks
Auto, 3–75
Ch1, Ch2 ..., 3–74, 3–82, 3–85, 3–86, 3–92, 3–93,
3–94, 3–96, 3–97, 3–101
Class, 3–96, 3–101
Class Glitch, 3–91
Clock Source, 3–86
Coupling, 3–74
Data Source, 3–86
DC, 3–74
Define Inputs, 3–82, 3–85, 3–87
Define Logic, 3–83, 3–85
Delta Time, 3–98
Edge, 3–72, 3–73
Either, 3–92, 3–94, 3–97
Falling edge, 3–85, 3–86
creating user, 3–138, 3–139
editing user, 3–138, 3–139
storing user, 3–140
Math waveform
derivative. See Derivative math waveform
FFT. See FFT math waveform
integral. See Integral math waveform
Math waveforms, 3–191
Disallowed in InstaVu, 3–59
Math, Color menu, 3–47
Index–8
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Math1/2/3, More menu, 3–191
Maximum, 3–115, Glossary–7
Mean, 3–115, 3–135, Glossary–8
Mean +– 1 StdDev, 3–135
Mean +– 2 StdDev, 3–135
Mean +– 3 StdDev, 3–135
Mean dBm, 3–116, B–10
MEASURE button, 3–117, 3–135
Measure Delay menu
Mean +– 1 StdDev, 3–135
Mean +– 2 StdDev, 3–135
Mean +– 3 StdDev, 3–135
Mean dBm, 3–116
Median, 3–135
Minimum, 3–115, Glossary–8
Negative duty cycle, 3–115
Negative overshoot, 3–115
Negative width, 3–115
Overshoot, Glossary–9
Peak Hits, 3–135
Create Measrmnt, 3–123
Delay To, 3–122
Edges, 3–123
Peak to peak, 3–115, Glossary–9
Period, 3–116, Glossary–9
Phase, 3–116, Glossary–9
Pk-Pk, 3–135
Positive duty cycle, 3–116
Positive overshoot, 3–116
Positive width, 3–116
Measure Delay To, 3–122
OK Create Measurement, 3–123
Measure Delay To, Measure Delay menu, 3–122
Measure menu, 3–117, 3–124
Gating, 3–119
High Ref, 3–121
High-Low Setup, 3–120
Histogram, 3–120
Low Ref, 3–121
Mid Ref, 3–121
Mid2 Ref, 3–121
Propagation delay, 3–115
Readout, 3–116, 3–117
Reference levels, 2–24
Rise time, 2–23, 3–116, Glossary–11
RMS, 3–116, Glossary–11
StdDev, 3–135
Min-Max, 3–120
Reference Levels, 3–120
Remove Measrmnt, 3–118, 3–124
Select Measrmnt, 3–117, 3–122, 3–135
Set Levels in % units, 3–121
Snapshot, 3–124
Undershoot, Glossary–8
Waveform Count, 3–135
Width, 2–23, Glossary–8, Glossary–10
Measurement Accuracy, Ensuring maximum, 3–142,
3–143
Statistics, 3–125, 3–126
Measurement
Measurements
Algorithms, B–1
Amplitude, 3–114, Glossary–1
Area, 3–114, Glossary–2
Burst width, 3–114, Glossary–2
Cycle area, 3–114, Glossary–3
Cycle mean, 3–114, Glossary–3
Cycle RMS, 3–115, Glossary–3
Delay, 3–122, Glossary–3
Duty cycle, 2–23, Glossary–8, Glossary–9
Extinction %, 3–116
Automated, 2–22
automated, 3–114
Classes of, 3–113
Cursor, 3–126
Gated, 3–118
graticule, 3–132
List of automated, 3–114, 3–135–3–150
Snapshot of, 3–123
Measuring Waveforms, 3–113
Median, 3–135
Extinction dB, 3–116
Extinction Ratio, 3–116
Fall time, 3–115
Memory, Waveform, 3–157
Menu
Frequency, 2–22, 3–115, Glossary–4
Gated, Glossary–4
Acquire, 3–33, 3–184
Color, 3–44
High, 3–115, Glossary–6
Histogram, 3–135
Histogram counting, 3–133
Hits in Box, 3–135
Low, 3–115, Glossary–7
Mask Counting, 3–136
Cursor, 3–129
Delayed Trigger, 3–108–3–112
Display, 3–39, 3–44
File Utilities, 3–160
Horizontal, 3–68, 3–108
Main, 2–6
Maximum, 3–115, Glossary–7
Mean, 3–115, 3–135, Glossary–8
Main Trigger, 3–72, 3–73, 3–81, 3–85, 3–86, 3–91,
3–93, 3–97
Index–9
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Measure, 3–117, 3–124
More, 3–158, 3–189, 3–193, 3–211
Operation, 2–7
N
NAND, Glossary–8
Pop-up, 2–8, Glossary–9
Save/Recall, 3–152
NAND, Main Trigger menu, 3–83, 3–85
Negative duty cycle, 3–115
Save/Recall Acquisition, 3–156, 3–159
Save/Recall Waveform, 3–155
Setup, 2–10, 3–11
Status, 3–179
Utility, 3–166
Negative overshoot, 3–115
Negative width, 3–115
Negative, Main Trigger menu, 3–92, 3–94, 3–97
No Process, More menu, 3–191
Noise
Mid Ref, Measure menu, 3–121
Mid2 Ref, Measure menu, 3–121
Min-Max, Measure menu, 3–120
Minimum, 3–115, Glossary–8
Mode & Holdoff, Main Trigger menu, 3–75
Model number location, 2–3
Models, Manual references to, xiv
Models, key features and differences, 1–2
Monochrome, Color menu, 3–45
MORE button, 3–12, 3–158, 3–186, 3–189
More menu, 3–158, 3–189, 3–211
Average, 3–191
reducing in FFTs, 3–202
reducing in phase FFTs, 3–195, 3–205
Noise Rej, Main Trigger menu, 3–74
NOR, Glossary–8
NOR, Main Trigger menu, 3–83, 3–85
Normal trigger mode, 3–65, Glossary–8
Normal, Color menu, 3–45
Normal, Main Trigger menu, 3–75
NRZ, Telecom Trigger menu, 3–104
NTSC, Display menu, 3–42
Nyquist frequency, 3–203
Blackman-Harris, 3–195
Change Math waveform definition, 3–193, 3–211,
3–216
dBV RMS, 3–194
diff, 3–211
Dual Wfm Math, 3–190
FFT, 3–193
Hamming, 3–195
Hanning, 3–195
intg, 3–216
Linear RMS, 3–194
Math1, Math2, Math3, 3–193, 3–211, 3–216
Math1/2/3, 3–191
No Process, 3–191
OK Create Math Waveform, 3–189, 3–216
Phase (deg), 3–194
O
OFF (Real Time Only), Acquire menu, 3–34
Off Bus, Utility menu, 3–177
Offset
DC. See DC Offset
Vertical, 3–18
vertical, 3–201, 3–213, 3–219
Offset, Vertical menu, 3–18
OK Confirm Clear Spool, Hardcopy menu, 3–170
OK Create Math Wfm, More menu, 3–189
OK Create Measurement, Measure Delay menu,
3–123
OK Erase Ref & Panel Memory, Utility menu, 3–153
OK Store Template, Acquire menu, 3–185
ON (Enable ET), Acquire menu, 3–34
ON/STBY button, 1–7, 2–3
Optical Power. See Mean dBm
Optical probes, D–5
Options, A–1
Options, Color menu, 3–48
OR, Glossary–8
OR, Main Trigger menu, 3–83, 3–85
Oscilloscope, Glossary–9
Overall, Display menu, 3–40
Overshoot, Glossary–9
Phase (rad), 3–194
Rectangular, 3–195
Reference waveform status, 3–158
Set 1st Source to, 3–190
Set 2nd Source to, 3–190
Set FFT Source to:, 3–193
Set FFT Vert Scale to:, 3–194
Set FFT Window to:, 3–195
Set Function to, 3–189
Set Function to:, 3–211, 3–216
Set operator to, 3–190
Set Single Source to, 3–189, 3–190
Set Single Source to:, 3–211, 3–216
Single Wfm Math, 3–189, 3–211, 3–216
Overwrite Lock, File Utilities menu, 3–164
Index–10
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Probe Cal, 3–143
Probe usage, 1–5
P
P6205 Active Probe, 1–5
P6701A/B with calibration, A–2
P6703A/B with calibration, A–2
Packaging, C–1
Probe–channel deskew, 3–143, Glossary–3
Probes
Accessories, A–5
Active voltage, D–3
Paired cursor, 3–127
Compensation, 2–17, Glossary–10
Compensation of, 3–6
Compensation Signal, 2–14
Connection, 2–9
PAL, Display menu, 3–42
Palette, Color menu, 3–45
Palette, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
Passive voltage probes, D–1
Pattern trigger, 3–76
Current, D–4
Definition, Glossary–10
Differential active, D–4
Fixtured active, D–4
How to setup, 3–81
PCX, 3–165
PCX Color, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
PCX, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
Peak detect acquisition mode, 3–30, Glossary–9
Peak Detect, Acquire menu, 3–33
Peak Hits, 3–135
General purpose (high input resistance), D–1
High speed, D–4
High voltage, D–2
Low impedance Zo, D–2
Optical, D–5
Peak to peak, 3–115, Glossary–9
Period, 3–116, Glossary–9
Persistence, 3–39
Persistence Palette, Color menu, 3–45
Phase, 3–116, Glossary–9
Phase suppression, 3–205
Pixel, Glossary–9
Option 22 to add, A–2
Option 23 to add, A–2
Option 24 to add, A–2
Option 26 to add, A–2
Option 27 to add, A–2
Option 2D to delete, A–3
Option 4D to delete, A–3
P6205 Active, 1–5
Pk-Pk, 3–135
Polarity and Width, Main Trigger menu, 3–92
Polarity, Main Trigger menu, 3–94, 3–97
Pop-up menu, 2–8, Glossary–9
Port, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
Port, Utility menu, 3–177
Portrait, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
Position
Passive, 3–6
Passive voltage, D–1
Selection, D–1
Procedures, Inspection and Cleaning, E–1–E–2
Product description, 1–1
Programmer manual, F–1
Programming, GPIB, F–1
Programming Examples, F–1
Propagation delay, 3–115
Pulse trigger, 3–65, 3–89
definition of classes, 3–89
Pulse triggers, definitions of, 3–90
Vertical, 3–16
vertical, 3–201, 3–213, 3–219
Position, Vertical menu, 3–18
Positive duty cycle, 3–116
Positive overshoot, 3–116
Positive width, 3–116
Pulse, Main Trigger menu, 3–72, 3–93, 3–96, 3–101
Positive, Main Trigger menu, 3–92, 3–94, 3–97
Postscript, 3–165
Posttrigger, Glossary–10
Power connector, 1–7, 2–5
Power cords, A–1
Q
Quantizing, Glossary–10
Power off, 1–8
Power on, 1–7
Pretrigger, Glossary–10
R
Preview, Zoom menu, 3–52
Principal power switch, 1–7, 2–5
Print, File Utilities menu, 3–163
Printer (Color), Option 3I and 3P, A–3
Printing a Hardcopy, Reference Article, 3–164
Rack mounting, A–2
Readout
Acquisition, 3–33
Channel, 2–6, 3–11, 3–50
Cursors, 2–6
Index–11
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Edge trigger, 3–72
Preparation for, 3–174
General purpose knob, 2–6
Logic trigger, 3–79
Measurement, 3–116, 3–117
Record view, 2–6
Snapshot, 3–123
Time base, 2–6
Procedures for, 3–176
Selecting and configuring the port, 3–176
Remove Measrmnt, Measure menu, 3–118, 3–124
Rename, File Utilities menu, 3–162
Repetitive Signal, Acquire menu, 3–34
Reset, How to execute, 3–11
Trigger, 2–6, 3–71
Trigger Level Bar, 3–40
Trigger Point, 3–40
Reset All Mappings To Factory, Color menu, 3–49
Reset All Palettes To Factory, Color menu, 3–49
Reset Current Palette To Factory, Color menu, 3–49
Reset to Factory Color, Color menu, 3–46
Reset Zoom Factors, Zoom menu, 3–52
Restore Colors, Color menu, 3–48
Ring Bell if Condition Met, Acquire menu, 3–187
Rise time, 2–23, 3–116, Glossary–11
Rising edge, Delayed Trigger menu, 3–111
Rising edge, Main Trigger menu, 3–76, 3–85, 3–86
RLE Color, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
RMS, 3–116, Glossary–11
Readout, Cursor, Paired, 3–212
Readout, cursor
H-Bars, 3–196, 3–212, 3–217
Paired cursors, 3–198, 3–219
V-Bars, 3–198, 3–212, 3–218
Readout, Display menu, 3–41, 3–43
Real time sampling, 3–26
Real-time sampling, Glossary–10
Rear panel, 2–5
Recall, Setups, 3–151
RS-232, 2–5
Recall Factory Setup, Save/Recall Setup menu, 3–153
Recall Saved Setup, Save/Recall Setup menu, 3–153
Recalling
RS-232, Port, 3–167, 3–174
RS232C/Centronics Hardcopy Interface, Option 13,
A–1
Acquisitions, 3–154
RUN/STOP, 3–61
Waveforms, 3–154
RUN/STOP, Acquire menu, 3–36
Runt trigger, 3–89, 3–90, Glossary–11
How to set up, 3–93–3–112
Record Length, Limit in Hi Res mode, 3–21
Record length, 3–21, 3–22, Glossary–10
derivative math waveforms, 3–211
integral math waveforms, 3–215
Option 1M, A–2
Runt, Main Trigger menu, 3–93
S
Option 2M, A–2
Record Length, Horizontal menu, 3–21
Record lengths, Incompatible with InstaVu, 3–58
Record View, 2–6, 3–14, 3–18, 3–71
Rectangular window, 3–195
Ref, Color menu, 3–48
Sample acquisition mode, 3–30, Glossary–11
Sample interval, Glossary–11
Sample Rate, Maximum, 3–29
Sample, Acquire menu, 3–33
Sampling, 3–26, Glossary–11
Sampling and acquisition mode, 3–34
Sampling and digitizing, 3–25
Saturation, Color menu, 3–46
Ref1, Ref2, Ref3, Ref4, File, Save/Recall Waveform
menu, 3–158
Ref1, Ref2, Ref3, Ref4, Reference waveform status,
3–158
Reference Indicator, Channel, 3–11
Reference levels, 2–24
Defining for Measure, 3–120
Reference Levels, Measure menu, 3–120
Reference memory, Glossary–10
Reject Glitch, Main Trigger menu, 3–93
Remote communication, 3–174–3–178
Remote operation
Save, Setups, 3–151
Save Acq, Save/Recall Waveform menu, 3–156
Save Current Setup, Save/Recall Setup menu, 3–152
Save Format, Save/Recall Waveform menu, 3–157
Save Waveform, Save/Recall Waveform menu, 3–155
Save/Recall Acquisition menu, 3–156, 3–159
Save/Recall SETUP button, 2–10, 3–11, 3–152, 3–160
Save/Recall Setup menu, 3–152
factory status, 3–152
File Utilities, 3–154
Recall Factory Setup, 3–153
Recall Saved Setup, 3–153
Communicating with Remote Instruments, 3–174
Connecting to the GPIB, 3–176
GPIB interface requirements, 3–174
GPIB Protocols, 3–174
Save Current Setup, 3–152
Interconnect cabling, 3–175
Index–12
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
user status, 3–152
Set/Hold Trigger, 3–78
Save/Recall WAVEFORM button, 3–155, 3–160
Save/Recall Waveform menu, 3–155
active status, 3–155
Setting Up for the Examples, 2–9
Settings, Display menu, 3–39, 3–44
Setup menu, 2–10, 3–11
Autosave, 3–159
Setup/Hold trigger
Delete Refs, 3–157
empty status, 3–155
File Utilities, 3–160
Ref1, Ref2, Ref3, Ref4, File, 3–158
Save Acq, 3–156
Maximum hold time (NOTE), 3–79
Negative setup or hold times, 3–79
Positive setup or hold times, 3–79
Trigger point location, 3–79
Setup/Hold trigger, 3–77
Save Format, 3–157
How to setup, 3–86–3–112
Save Waveform, 3–155
Saving
Setups, Save and recall, 3–151
Shipping, C–1
Acquisitions, 3–154
Side menu, Glossary–12
Waveforms, 3–154
Side menu buttons, 2–3, Glossary–12
SIGNAL OUTPUT, BNC, 2–5
Signal Path Compensation, 1–5, 3–142
Sin(x)/x interpolation, 3–28, 3–42, Glossary–6
Sin(x)/x interpolation, Display menu, 3–42
Single Acquisition Sequence, Acquire menu, 3–36
SINGLE TRIG button, 3–37, 3–70
Single Wfm Math, More menu, 3–189
Single-Shot sampling, 3–26
Saving and recalling acquisitions, 3–154
Saving and recalling setups, 2–28, 3–151
Saving and recalling waveforms, 3–154
Saving Waveforms and Setups, 3–151
Scale, vertical, 3–201, 3–213, 3–219
seconds, Cursor menu, 3–131
Security bracket, 2–5
SELECT button, 3–130, Glossary–11
Select Measrmnt, Measure menu, 3–117, 3–122,
3–135
Slew rate setting, How derived, 3–100
Slew Rate Trigger, 3–91
Slew rate trigger, 3–89, Glossary–11, Glossary–12
600 ps limitation, 3–99–3–112
7.5 ns limitation, 3–99–3–112
How to set up, 3–97–3–112
Selected waveform, Glossary–11
Self test, 1–8
Serial number, 2–5
Service Assurance, A–7
Slope, Glossary–12
Set 1st Source to, More menu, 3–190
Set 2nd Source to, More menu, 3–190
Set Function to, More menu, 3–189
SET LEVEL TO 50% button, 3–69
Set Levels in % units, Measure menu, 3–121
Set operator to, More menu, 3–190
Set Single Source to, More menu, 3–189, 3–190
Set Thresholds, Main Trigger menu, 3–82, 3–85
Set to 10%, Horizontal menu, 3–22
Set to 50%, Delayed Trigger menu, 3–112
Set to 50%, Horizontal menu, 3–22
Set to 50%, Main Trigger menu, 3–69, 3–76, 3–93,
3–102
Slope, Delayed Trigger menu, 3–111
Slope, Main Trigger menu, 3–75
Slope, Trigger, 3–68
Snapshot, Readout, 3–123
Snapshot of Measurements, 2–27, 3–123
Snapshot, Measure menu, 3–124
Software version, 3–179
Source, Delayed Trigger menu, 3–111
Source, Main Trigger menu, 3–74, 3–92, 3–94, 3–96,
3–97, 3–101
Source, Telecom Trigger menu, 3–104
Spectral, Color menu, 3–45
Spooler, Hardcopy, 3–170
Start up, 1–5
Set to 50%, Telecom Trigger menu, 3–106
Set to 90%, Horizontal menu, 3–22
Set to ECL, Delayed Trigger menu, 3–112
Set to ECL, Main Trigger menu, 3–76, 3–93, 3–98,
3–102
Set to ECL, Telecom Trigger menu, 3–106
Set to TTL, Delayed Trigger menu, 3–112
Set to TTL, Main Trigger menu, 3–76, 3–93, 3–98,
3–102
State trigger, 3–77, 3–85–3–112
How to set up, 3–85–3–112
State, Main Trigger menu, 3–85, 3–86
Statistics, Measure menu, 3–125, 3–126
Status, Determining setup, 3–179
STATUS button, 3–179
Status menu, 3–179
Display, 3–179
Firmware version, 3–179
Set to TTL, Telecom Trigger menu, 3–106
Set to Zero, Vertical menu, 3–18
Index–13
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Histo/Masks, 3–179
I/O, 3–179
System, 3–179
Tracking, Cursor menu, 3–130
Trigger, 3–63–3–112, Glossary–12
AC Line Voltage, 3–64
Trigger, 3–179
Auxiliary, 3–64
Waveforms, 3–179
Comm, 3–65
StdDev, 3–135
Coupling, 3–67
Stop After Limit Test Condition Met, Acquire menu,
Delay, 3–68
Delayed, 3–107–3–112
3–187
Edge, 3–65, 3–72, Glossary–4
Glitch, 3–89, 3–90, Glossary–5
Holdoff, 3–66
Level, 3–68, Glossary–12
Logic, 3–65, 3–76, 3–78
Stop After, Acquire menu, 3–35, 3–187
Style, Display menu, 3–39
Switch, principal power, 1–7, 2–5
System, Status menu, 3–179
System, Utility menu, 3–166
Mode, 3–65
Pattern, 3–76, 3–81
Position, 3–21, 3–61, 3–67
Pulse, 3–65, 3–89
T
Talk/Listen Address, Utility menu, 3–177
Tek Secure, 3–153, Glossary–12
Tek Secure Erase Memory, Utility menu, 3–153
Telecom Standard, Telecom Trigger menu, 3–105
Telecom trigger, 3–103
Readout, 3–71
Runt, 3–89, 3–90, Glossary–11
Setup/Hold, 3–77, 3–78, 3–86–3–112
Slew Rate, 3–91, Glossary–11, Glossary–12
Slew rate, 3–89
Slope, 3–68
Source, 3–64
State, 3–77, 3–85–3–112
Status Lights, 3–70
Telecom, 3–103
Timeout, 3–89, 3–91, 3–101, Glossary–12
Types, 3–72–3–112
How to set up, 3–104
Telecom Trigger menu
AMI, 3–104
Ch1, Ch2 ..., 3–104
CMI, 3–104
Code, 3–104
Level, 3–106
NRZ, 3–104
Set to 50%, 3–106
Set to ECL, 3–106
Video, 3–65
Width, 3–89, 3–96
Trigger Bar, 2–6, 3–61
Set to TTL, 3–106
Source, 3–104
Trigger Bar Style, Display menu, 3–41
Trigger if Faster Than, Main Trigger menu, 3–99
Trigger if Slower Than, Main Trigger menu, 3–99
Trigger Level Bar, Readout, 3–40, 3–61
Trigger MAIN LEVEL knob, 2–15, 3–68
TRIGGER MENU button, 3–72, 3–73, 3–81, 3–85,
3–86, 3–91, 3–93, 3–97
Trigger Point, Readout, 3–40, 3–61
Trigger Position, Horizontal menu, 3–21
Trigger Status Lights, 3–70
Trigger When, Main Trigger menu, 3–83, 3–85, 3–98
Trigger, delayed, How to set up, 3–108
Trigger, edge, How to set up, 3–73
Trigger, glitch, How to set up, 3–91
Trigger, runt, How to set up, 3–93–3–112
Trigger, slew rate, How to set up, 3–97–3–112
Trigger, Status menu, 3–179
Trigger, telecom, How to set up, 3–104
Trigger, timeout, How to set up, 3–101–3–112
Trigger, width, How to set up, 3–96–3–112
Telecom Standard, 3–105
Telecom, Main Trigger menu, 3–104
Temperature compensation, 3–142
Temperature, Color menu, 3–45
Template Source, Acquire menu, 3–184
Text/Grat, Display menu, 3–40
Thinkjet, 3–165
Thinkjet, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
Thresholds, Main Trigger menu, 3–94, 3–98
TIFF, 3–165
TIFF, Hardcopy menu, 3–167
Time base, Glossary–12
Time Base, Horizontal menu, 3–108
Time Units, Cursor menu, 3–131
Time, Main Trigger menu, 3–102
Timeout Trigger, 3–91
Timeout trigger, 3–89, 3–101, Glossary–12
How to set up, 3–101–3–112
Timeout, Main Trigger menu, 3–101, 3–102
Index–14
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Triggering on Waveforms, 3–63
Triggering, Auto mode, Incompatible with InstaVu,
3–58
True for less than, Main Trigger menu, 3–83
True for more than, Main Trigger menu, 3–83
Type Logic, Main Trigger menu
Logic, 3–81, 3–85, 3–86
Coupling, 3–17
Deskew, 3–143
External Attenuation, 3–18
Fine Scale, 3–18
Full, 3–17
Offset, 3–18
Position, 3–18
Set to Zero, 3–18
VERTICAL MENU button, 2–19
Vertical position, for DC correction of FFTs, 3–201
Vertical POSITION knob, 3–15, 3–51
Vertical Readout, 3–14
Pulse, 3–97
Type Pulse, Main Trigger menu, 3–91
Type, Main Trigger menu, 3–72, 3–73, 3–96, 3–101
Pulse, 3–93
Vertical SCALE knob, 3–15, 3–51
VGA Output, 2–5
Video Line Number, Cursor menu, 3–131
Video Trigger, Option 5, A–1
Video trigger, 3–65
U
Undershoot, Glossary–8
user, Saved setup status, 3–152
UTILITY button, 3–142, 3–166, 3–176
Utility Menu
View Palette, Color menu, 3–45
OK Erase Ref & Panel Memory, 3–153
Tek Secure Erase Memory, 3–153
Utility menu, 3–166
W
Waveform, Glossary–13
Acquiring and Displaying of, 3–5
Autoset on, 3–8
Configure, 3–166, 3–177
GPIB, 3–177
Hardcopy, 3–177
Coupling to the oscilloscope, 3–5
Interval, Glossary–13
Hardcopy (Talk Only), 3–166
I/O, 3–166
Math, 3–188
Off Bus, 3–177
Priority for turning off, 3–13
Save Formats, 3–157
Port, 3–177
System, 3–166
Saving, 3–151
Talk/Listen Address, 3–177
Triggering on, 3–63
Waveform clipping. See Clipping
Waveform Count, 3–135
Waveform differentiation, 3–210
Waveform FFTs, 3–191
Waveform integration, 3–215
Waveform memory, 3–157
WAVEFORM OFF button, 2–21, 3–13, 3–43
Waveform record
V
V Limit, Acquire menu, 3–185
Variable Persistence, Display menu, 3–39
Vectors, 3–39
Vectors display, Incompatible with InstaVu, 3–58
Vectors, Display menu, 3–39
Vertical
FFT, 3–198
FFT frequency domain, 3–199
FFT source, 3–198
Bar cursors, 3–127, Glossary–13
Offset, 3–18
Position, 3–15, 3–16
Readout, 3–14
Scale, 3–15
SCALE knob, 2–14, 3–15
System, 2–14
FFT time domain, 3–199
Waveform, Display menu, 3–40
Waveforms
And zoom, 3–50
Math, 3–191
Measuring, 3–113
Vertical deskew, 3–143, Glossary–3
Vertical menu
Scaling and positioning, 3–14
Waveforms, Status menu, 3–179
Width, 2–23, Glossary–8, Glossary–10
Width trigger, 3–89, 3–96
20 MHz, 3–17
250 MHz, 3–17
Bandwidth, 3–17
Cal Probe, 3–143
Index–15
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
How to set up, 3–96–3–112
YT, Display menu, 3–43
Width, Main Trigger menu, 3–92, 3–96
Window, 3–206
Z
Blackman-Harris, 3–195, 3–207, 3–210
characteristics of, 3–208
Zero phase reference point, 3–199, 3–204
establishing for impulse testing, 3–204,
3–205–3–206
Hamming, 3–195, 3–207, 3–210
Hanning, 3–195, 3–207, 3–210
rectangular, 3–195, 3–207, 3–210
rectangular vs. bell-shaped, 3–209
selecting, 3–207
Zoom, 3–49–3–62
And interpolation, 3–50
And waveforms, 3–50
derivative math waveforms, 3–214
Dual Window mode, 3–52
Dual Zoom, 3–54
Windowing, process, 3–206
Windows, descriptions of, 3–195
Dual Zoom Offset, 3–54
Incompatible with InstaVu, 3–58
on FFT math waveforms, 3–202
on integral math waveforms, 3–220
ZOOM button, 3–51
X
XY
Format, 3–43
Incompatible with InstaVu, 3–58
XY format, Glossary–13
XY, Display menu, 3–43
Zoom feature, 3–49
Zoom menu
Dual Zoom, 3–54
Dual Zoom Offset, 3–54
Preview, 3–52
Reset Zoom Factors, 3–52
Y
YT, Format, 3–43
YT format, Glossary–13
Index–16
TDS 500C, TDS 600B, & TDS 700C User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|